Standard Specifications For Building Works 2020 JKR

JABATAN KERJA RAYA MALAYSIA
KEMENTERIAN KERJA RAYA
JKR 20800-0226-20
ISBN 978-967-2284-14-7
STANDARD eJ
SPECIFICATIONS
FOR BUILDING WORKS
2020
Published by :
JABATAN KERJA RAYA MALAYSIA
Copyright © 2020
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR BUILDING WORKS 2020
© Jabatan Kerja Raya Malaysia 2020
All enquiries regarding this book should be forwarded to:
Pengarah Kanan
Cawangan Kontrak Dan Ukur Bahan
Ibu Pejabat Jabatan Kerja Raya Malaysia
Aras 14-19 Menara Tun Ismail Mohamed Ali
No. 25 Jalan Raja Laut
50582 Kuala Lumpur, MALAYSIA.
Tel : 03 - 2616 5055 / 03 - 2616 5408

Fax : 03 - 2697 7157 / 03 - 2691 5602
Website : http://www.jkr.gov.my
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, whether mechanical
or electronic including photocopying and recording without the written consent of JKR Malaysia.
Perpustakaan Negara Malaysia Cataloguing-in-Publication Data
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Committee Representation iv
Preface v
Acknowledgement vi - viii
List of Tables ix - xi
List of Figures xii
List of Abbreviations xiii
List of Appendices xiv
SECTION A : PRELIMINARIES AND GENERAL CONDITIONS A/1 - A/36

SECTION B : EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORKS B/1 - B/17
SECTION C : FOUNDATION AND WORKS BELOW LOWEST FLOOR LEVEL C/1 - C/69
SECTION D : CONCRETING D/1 - D/68
SECTION E : WALL SYSTEM E1 - E/20
SECTION F : SEWERAGE F/1 - F/12
SECTION G : ROOFING G/1 - G/11
SECTION H : TIMBER, JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY H/1 - H/37
SECTION I : CEILING I/1 - I/12
SECTION J : STRUCTURAL STEEL AND METALWORKS J/1 - J/9
SECTION K : PLASTERING, PAVING, TILING AND CARPET K/1 - K/20
SECTION L : WATER RETICULATION L/1 - L/10
SECTION M : RAINWATER COLLECTION M/1 - M/6
SECTION N : GLAZING N/1 - N/7
SECTION O : PAINTING O/1 - O/10
SECTION P : ROADS AND HARDSTANDING P/1 - P/11
SECTION Q : FENCING AND GATES Q/1 - Q/4
SECTION R : LANDSCAPING AND TURFING R/1 - R/10
SECTION S : DRAINAGE S/1 - S/8
SECTION T : SIGNAGE T/1 - T/4
SECTION U : SLOPE STABILISATION U/1 - U/89
SECTION V : GROUND IMPROVEMENT V/1 - V/58
SECTION W : HYDROSEEDING W/1 - W/5
SECTION X : INTERNAL COLD WATER AND SANITARY PLUMBING SYSTEM X/1 - X/35
SECTION Y : SANITARY FITTINGS Y/1 - Y/5
Appendices
iii
COMMITTEE REPRESENTATION
This Standard Specifications for Building Works 2020 was managed and developed by the Jabatan Kerja Raya
Malaysia with the assistance of the Main Committee of Standard Specifications for Building Works 2020, which
comprises representatives from the following departments:
Cawangan Kontrak Dan Ukur Bahan (CKUB)

Cawangan Kejuruteraan Awam Dan Struktur (CKAS)
Cawangan Arkitek (CA)
Cawangan Kejuruteraan Mekanikal (CKM)
Cawangan Kejuruteraan Cerun (CKC)
Cawangan Kejuruteraan Geoteknik (CKG)
Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik (CKE)
Cawangan Jalan (CJ)
Cawangan Kejuruteraan lnfrastruktur Pengangkutan (CKIP)
Cawangan Alam Sekitar Dan Kecekapan Tenaga (CASKT)
Cawangan Dasar Dan Pengurusan Korporat (CDPK)
iv
PREFACE
This Standard Specifications for Building Works 2020 was prepared by the Jabatan Kerja Raya (JKR) Malaysia
to replace the Standard Specifications for Building Works 2014. The Standard was first compiled in the 2005
Edition.
This Standard serves to establish uniformity and base specifications for materials and workmanship required for
building works particularly in conventional tender procurement for JKR projects. It also sets out the level of
technical performance and characteristics required to promote an adequate, safe and well-maintained building
so as to effectively contribute to the development of the country.
The content of the Standard has incorporated updates and revisions to the previous edition. It has a significant
impact on the construction industry as it features current technology development, updating of the international
and national standards and revised specifications to be in line with the Government policies.
This Standard Specifications for Building Works 2020 is divided into 25 Sections. Appendix A/1 of Section A :
Preliminaries And General Conditions, make reference to the relevant Acts, Regulations and Guidelines et
cetera. Compliance with this Standard does not of itself confer immunity from legal obligations.
This Standard may be adopted in whole or in part. Any addition or omission may be effected to suit the
requirement of the particular project.
The Committee of Standard Specification for Building Works 2020 was establised in the JKR to coordinate
standard specification related to building works in the JKR. The Standard Specifications will be periodically
reviewed, updated and new editions issued to cater the current standards and regulations as well as the dynamic
technological developments in the construction industry. Between editions, amendments may be issued. It is
therefore important that users assure themselves that they are referring to the current Standard.
V
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Jabatan Kerja Raya Malaysia would like to extend our sincere appreciation to all those involved in the
development of this standard.
Advisor of Standard Specifications For Building

Works 2020
Y.Brs. lr. Kamaluddin Bin Haji Abdul Rashid Ketua Pengarah Kerja Raya
Chairman of Standard Specifications For Building

Works 2020 Committee
Y.Brs. Sr Zulkifle Bin Mohammad Pengarah Kanan
Master Committee Members
lr. Hj. Zulakmal Bin Hj. Sufian Timbalan Ketua Pengarah Kerja Raya
(Sektor Infra)
Y.Bhg. Dato' lr. Hj. Shuib Bin Tabri Mantan Pengarah Kanan
Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik
Y.Bhg. Dato' lr. Hj. Mohamad Zulkefly Bin Sulaiman Pengarah Kanan
Cawangan Kejuruteraan Awam Dan Struktur
Y.Bhg. Datin Ar. Mariani Noor Binti Suhud Pengarah Kanan
Cawangan Arkitek
lr. Razdwan Bin Kasim Pengarah Kanan
Cawangan Kejuruteraan Mekanikal
Y.Bhg. Datuk lr. Ruslan Bin Abdul Aziz Pengarah Kanan
Cawangan Jalan
lr. Hj, Yaakob Bin Abdul Latif Pengarah Kanan
Sr Nik Zainal Alam Bin Hasan Pengarah
lr. Hj. Mohamed Amin Bin Kasim Pengarah
Cawangan Kejuruteraan lnfrastruktur Pengangkutan
lr. Hj. Zulkifly Bin A. Ghani Pengarah
Cawangan Kejuruteraan Cerun
lr. Abdul Hadi Bin Abdul Aziz Mantan Pengarah
Cawangan Kejuruteraan Geoteknik
Puan Farah Bin Abdul Samad Pengarah
Cawangan Alam Sekitar Dan Kecekapan Tenaga
Puan Mastura Bin Shaari Pengarah
Cawangan Dasar Dan Pengurusan Korporat
vi
Permanent Representative
lr. Dr. Lim Char Ching Pengarah

Cawangan Jalan
Ar. Hasnah Binti Yun Pengarah
Cawangan Arkitek
Sr Dr. Rozina Binti Mohd Zafian Juruukur Bahan Penguasa Kanan
lr. Aishah Hazlina Binti Md. Dean Jurutera Mekanikal Penguasa Kanan
lr. Edayu Binti Saleh @ Aman Jurutera Awam Penguasa Kanan
lr. Faizan Binti Ismail Jurutera Awam Penguasa Kanan
lr. Su Faizah Binti Sukor Jurutera Awam Penguasa
Puan Monaliza Binti Mohd Hassan Arkitek Penguasa
lr. Shahrul Affendy Bin Abu Bakar Jurutera Elektrik Penguasa
Encik Nik Mazli Bin Hj. Ariffin Arkitek Penguasa
Encik Mahadir Bin Masihat Jurutera Awam
Substitute Representative
lr. Dr. Abdul Murad Bin Zainal Abidin Jurutera Mekanikal Penguasa Kanan
lr. Atikah Binti Zakaria @ Ya Jurutera Awam Penguasa Kanan
Cawangan Jalan
Encik Massrol Nizzam Bin Md Salleh Arkitek Penguasa
Cawangan Arkitek
lr. Noraidah Binti Yahya Jurutera Awam Penguasa
Sr Sabrina Binti Mohamad Juruukur Bahan Kanan
lr. Eng Boon Cheng Jurutera Awam Kanan
Encik Yuvabalan NL Govindasamy Jurutera Awam Kanan
vii
Puan Ai'nun Bashirah Binti Hamid Jurutera Awam Kanan
Puan Aiza Binti Abdul Adzis Jurutera Elektrik Kanan
Puan Norfariza Binti Ismail Jurutera Awam
lr. Norliana Binti Manap Jurutera Awam
Secretariat
Sr Anita Binti Ibrahim Juruukur Bahan Penguasa Kanan

Sr Abdul Halim Bin Embong Juruukur Bahan Penguasa Kanan
Sr Nurfidatul Ema Binti Saaidin Juruukur Bahan Penguasa
Sr Nur Waheeda Binti Ismail Juruukur Bahan Kanan
Encik Maizali Halil Bin Ghazali Juruukur Bahan
Encik Mohamad Farid Bin Mohd Nasir Penolong Juruukur Bahan
viii
LIST OF TABLES
Table A 1 - Submission of Documents A/20

Table A2 - Environmental Quality Standards to be Complied With by The Contractor A/35
Table 81 - Equivalent Production Rate of Hard Mass Vs 50m3/Hr and
Type of Excavator 8/16
Table 82 - Equivalent Production Rate of Rock Mass Vs 20m3/Hr and Track-Type
of Tractor (Dozer) 8/16
Table 83 - Category Of Excavation Based On Corrected Point Load Test Index ls(S0) 8/16
Table 84 - Grading Limits of Materials for Replacement of Excavated Material 8/17
Table 85 - Frequency of Control Test for Earth Embankment 8/17
Table C1 - Plate Bearing Test - Load Increments and Minimum Holding Time C/60
Table C2 - Specification of Precast Concrete Piles (after MS1314) C/61
Table C3 - Slump Range for Typical Concreting Situations C/62
Table C4 - Static Load Test - Load Increments and Minimum Holding Time C/62
Table CS - Typical Allowable Driving Stresses C/63
Table C6 - Tests for Bentonite Drilling Fluids C/63
Table C7 - Tests for Polymer Drilling Fluids C/63
Table D1 - Cement and Combination Types 8 D/43
Table D2 - General Purpose Cements and Combinations D/44
Table D3 - Testing of Aggregates D/45
Table D4 - Grading for Coarse Aggregate D/46
Table DS - Grading for Fine Aggregate D/46
Table D6 - Admixtures Acceptance Test Requirements D/47
Table D7 - Prescribed Mixes for General Use Per Cubic Meter of Concrete
by Weight Batching D/48
Table D8 - Proportions and Strength Requirements for Prescribed
Mixes by Volume Batching D/48
Table D9 - Durability Recommendations for Reinforced or Prestressed
Elements of Structures with an Intended Working Life of At
Least 50 Years D/49
Table D10 - Durability Recommendations for Reinforced or Prestressed
Elements of Structures with an Intended Life of At Least 100 Years D/51
Table D11 - Minimum Cement and Combination Contents with Maximum Aggregate
Sizes Other Than 20MM D/53
Table D12 - Exposure Classes D/54
Table D13 - Slump Classes D/55
Table D14 - Compaction Classes D/55
Table D15 - Vebe Classes D/55
Table D16 - Flow Classes D/55
Table D17 - Consistence Suitable for Different Uses of In-Situ Concrete D/56
Table D18 - Maximum Total Chloride D/57
Table D19 - Compressive Strength Classes for Designed Concrete Normal
Weight and Heavy Weight Concrete D/57
Table D20 - Compressive Strength Classes for Light Weight Concrete D/58
Table D21 - Minimum Rate of Sampling for Assessing Conformity D/58
Table D22 - Conformity Criteria for Compressive Strength D/59
Table D23 - Compressive Strength Requirements for Prescribed Mix D/59
Table D24 - Sampling Rate for Identity Testing D/59
ix
LIST OF TABLES (Cont'd)
Table D25 - Identity Criteria for Compressive Strength of Certified Concrete D/60
Table D26 - Identity Criteria for Compressive Strength of Non-Certified Concrete D/60
Table D27 - Identity Criteria for Slump Specified as a Slump Class D/60
Table D28 - Identity Criteria for Slump Specified as a Target Value D/61
Table D29 - Identity Criteria for Flow Specified as a Flow Class D/61
Table D30 - Identity Criteria for Flow Specified as a Flow Value D/61
Table D31 - Recorded Data and Other Documents, Where Relevant D/62
Table D32 - Characteristic Strength of Steel Reinforcement D/63
Table D33 - Minimum Periods Between Concreting and Removal of Forms D/63
Table D34 - Measurement Location and Sampling for Element D/63
Table D35 - Recommended Minimum Concrete Strength for Lifting and Handling D/64
Table D36 - Recommended Corrugated Sleeve Diameter D/64
Table E1 - Masonry Mortars E/18
Table E2 - Minimum Concrete Cover for Carbon Steel Reinforcement E/19
Table F1 - Gradient of Sewer Pipes F/4
Table F2 - Parameter Limits for Sewage and Industrial Effluents F/11
Table F3 - Sewerage Work Submission F/11
Table F4 - Sewerage Work Submission for STP F/12
Table H1 - Schedule of Timber Grouping and Usage H/26
Table H2 - Schedule of Timber Species in accordance with Strength
Grouping (S.G) H/27
Table H3 - Schedule of Moisture Contents (M.C) of Timber for Various Positions
in Building H/28
Table H4 - Natural Durability 1 Classification of Peninsular Malaysia Timbers
For Ground Contact H/29
Table H5 - Natural Durability 1 Classification of Sarawak Timbers for Ground
Contact H/30
Table H6 - Common Commercial Timber Sizes H/31
Table H7 - Minimum required size of Washers for Structural Bolted Joints H/32
Table H8 - Properties of Malaysian Timber H/32
Table H9 - Schedule of Ironmongery H/33
Table L1 - Width of Pipe Trenches L/2
Table L2 - Type of Water Storage Tank L/9
Table P1 - Gradation Limits for Drainage Layer P/2
Table P2 - Gradation Limits for Sub-Base P/3
Table P3 - Gradation Limits for Crushed Aggregate Road Base P/5
Table P4 - Gradation Limit for Wet-Mix Road Base P/6
Table P5 - Tolerances in Surface Levels of Pavement Courses P/9
Table S1 - Grading Limits for Sand Backfill S/4
Table S2 - Grading Limit for Granular Backfill Other Than Sand S/4
Table S3 - Maximum Depths of Open Drain S/5
Table S4 - Maximum Steepness of The Side Slopes S/5
X
LIST OF TABLES (Cont’d)
Table U1 - Physical Property Requirements for Filter Cloth U/2

Table U2 - Properties of Geocell (General) U/6
Table U3 - Properties of Geocell U/6
Table U4 - Verification Test Loading Schedule U/17
Table U5 - Grading Limits for Sand / Aggregate U/19
Table U6 - Properties of Grease U/46
Table U7 - Properties of Plastics U/48
Table U8 - Particle Size Distribution of Selected Fill U/52
Table U9 - Allowable Electrical and Chemical Limits of Selected Fill and
Granular Filter U/53
Table U10 - Tolerances of Reinforced Fill Structure U/63
Table U11 - Galvanised Wire Sizes for Gabions U/78
Table U12 - Minimum Mass of Zinc Coating for Gabions U/79
Table U13 - Wire Diameter and Tolerance U/81
Table U14 - Minimum Mass of Zink Coating of Wire U/81
Table U15 - Standard Size of GRES U/86
Table V1 - Sampling Frequency and Testing Requirements for Geotextile V/50
Table V2 - Sampling Frequency and Testing Requirements for Geogrid V/50
Table V3 - Guidelines for Geotextile Overlap Requirements as a Function of
(Foundation Soil) Strength V/50
Table V4 - Properties of Non-woven Geotextile V/51
Table V5 - Properties of High Strength Woven Geotextile V/52
Table V6 - Properties of Geogrid V/53
Table V7 - Properties of Prefabricated Vertical Drain V/54
Table V8 - Typical Gradings Used With The Different Processes for Stone Column V/54
Table V9 - Construction Parameters To Be Monitored During DSM Installation V/54
Table V10 - Data Required for Each Instrument V/55
Table V11 - Data Required for Each Instrument V/57
Table W1 - Mulchfibres Application Rate for Normal Soil W/2
Table W2 - Mulchfibers Application Rate for Hard Material W/2
Table X1 - List of Internal Piping X/3
Table X2 - Diameter of Feeders to Number of Fitting Served X/4
Table X3 - Recommended Maximum Spacing of Support for Horizontal Cold Water Pipe X/5
Table X4 - Recommended Maximum Spacing of Support for Vertical Cold Water Pipe X/6
Table X5 - Physical Properties of FRP Panel X/9
Table X6 - Standard for The Respective Steel Tank X/10
Table X7 - Standard for Different Types of Sanitary Pipe X/15
Table X8 - Minimum Acceptable Thickness of UPVC Waste Pipe and Fittings X/17
Table X9 - Minimum Acceptable Thickness of Underground UPVC Pipe and Fittings X/18
Table X10 - Recommended Maximum Spacing of Support for Horizontal Sanitary Pipe X/20
Table X12 - Trenches Width for Different Pipe Diameter X/22
Table Y1 - List of Sanitary Fittings Y/3
xi
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure C1 - Plan View of Typical Pile Load Test Set Up C/64

Figure D1 - Concrete Testing Flow Chart D/65
Figure D2 - Slump Test Measurement D/66
Figure D3 - Flow Test measurement D/66
Figure D4 - Qualitative Confirmation-Acceptance Limits for Measurement D/67
of Concrete Cover
Figure D5 - Lift Shaft Enclosure D/67
Figure D6 - Limit of Accuracy of Shaft Plumb on All Sides of Shaft Enclosure D/68
Figure D7 - Accuracy of Structural Opening D/68
Figure E1 - Running or Stretcher Bond E/20
Figure E2 - Running or Stretcher Bond E/20
Figure H1 - Engineered Timber Products H/25
Figure U1 - Double-Twist Mesh U/78
Figure U2 - Double-Twist Mesh U/84
Figure U3 - Wire Mesh Dimensional Layout U/84
Figure V1 - Types of Seam with Double Thread Lock Stitch V/58
Figure X1 - Indirect Feed System) X/32
Figure X2 - Pumping to Multiple Building Blocks X/33
Figure X3 - Direct Feed from Main Water Pipe X/34
Figure X4 - Pumping to Elevated Water Tank X/35
xii
ABBREVIATIONS
B.Q. Bills of Quantities

CePSWaM Certified Environmental Professional in Scheduled Waste Management
CESSWI Certified Erosion, Sediment and Storm Water Inspector
CIAST Pusat Latihan Pengajar dan Kemahiran Lanjutan
CIDB Construction Industry Development Board
CISEC Certified Inspector of Sediment and Erosion Control
cow Clerk of Works
DGFR Director General of Fire and Rescue
DOE Department of Environment
DOSH Department of Occupational Safety and Health
EIA Environmental Impact Assessment
EMP Environmental Management Plan
EPD Environmental Protection Department
JKR Jabatan Kerja Raya
MOH Ministry of Health
MSMA Manual Saliran Mesra Alam
MTIB Malaysian Timber Industry Board
NREB Natural Resources and Environment Board
PDRM Palis Diraja Malaysia
P.E. Professional Engineer
R.O.W. Right of Way
S.O. Superintending Officer
S.P. System Provider
SIRIM Standards and Industrial Research Institute of Malaysia
SPAN Suruhanjaya Perkhidmatan Air Negara
xiii
LIST OF APPENDICES
APPENDIX A/1 - LEGISLATION AND REGULATIONS A/29

APPENDIX A/2 - LIST OF S.O.’S FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT A/30
APPENDIX A/3 - LIST OF S.O.’S TRANSPORT SERVICES A/31
APPENDIX A/4 - LIST OF LABORATORY EQUIPMENT A/32
APPENDIX A/5 - TABLE A2: ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY STANDARDS
TO BE COMPLIED WITH BY THE CONTRACTOR A/35
APEENDIX C/1 - BENDING STRENGTH FOR PRECAST CONCRETE PILES C/65
APPENDIX H/1 - GLUED LAMINATED TIMBER PERFORMANCE WARRANTY
(SPECIMEN) H/36
APPENDIX H/2 - SAMPLE CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE H/37
APPENDIX J/1 - CHECKLIST FOR THE INSTALLATION OF LONG SPAN
STEEL TRUSSES J/7
APPENDIX N/1 - SCHEDULE OF GLASS N/6
APPENDIX O/1 - PAINT PERFORMANCE WARRANTY (SPECIMEN) O/9
xiv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION A: PRELIMINARIES AND GENERAL CONDITIONS PAGE
1. Scope of Works A/1

2. Standards A/1
3. Contract Documents A/2
4. Adjoining Property A/2
5. Goods, Materials and Workmanship A/3
6. Use of Local Materials A/3
7. Sustainable Materials and Products A/4
8. Metrication A/4
9. Ordering A/4
10. Supply of Materials by Government A/4
11. Shop Drawings, Samples and Mock-ups A/5
12. Contractor’s Plant A/5
13. Construction Plan A/5
14. Project Signboard A/8
15. Progress Photographs A/8
16. Sufficient Notice to Local Authorities/Utility Providers/Regulatory Bodies A/9
17. Access and Temporary Roads A/9
18. Temporary Diversion and Relocation of Existing Overhead and Services Underground A/9
19. Temporary Power and Water Supplies for the Works A/9
20. Site Security A/10
21. Care and Protection of Materials and Works A/10
22. Legislation and Regulations A/10
23. Erosion and Sedimentation Control (ESC) A/10
24. Access Roads and Maintenance of Existing Roads A/12
25. Control of Workmen, Plant and Machinery at Site A/12
26. Particulars of Employees A/13
27. Contractor’s Temporary Accommodation and Facilities for Workmen A/13
28. Contractor’s Office and Storage A/13
29. Office Accommodation for S.O. A/14
30. Telephone for S.O. A/14
31. Personal Protective Equipment for S.O. A/14
32. Office Equipment and Facilities for S.O. A/15
33. Material Testing Laboratory and Staff A/15
34. Survey Instruments and Personnel A/16
35. Safe Working Area A/16
36. Safety, Health and Welfare A/16
© COPYRIGHT JKR MALAYSIA

37. Sanitation A/18
38. Waste Management A/18
39. Environmental Protection Works A/19
40. Water and Air Quality, Noise and Vibration Control A/20
41. Nominated Sub-contractors A/22
42. Nominated Suppliers A/23
43. Coordination of Mechanical and Electrical Services A/23
44. Keeping the Site Tidy A/25
45. As-built Drawings A/25
46. Total Asset Management A/26
47. Site Investigation Works A/28
48. Clearing, Cleaning and Making Good on Completion A/28

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION A: PRELIMINARIES No. Pindaan : 00
AND GENERAL CONDITIONS Tarikh : 02 Januari 2020
JKR MALAYSIA Muka Surat : A/1
1. Scope of Works
The Works covered in this Contract comprise the provision by the Contractor at his
own risk and cost of all materials, scaffolding, tools, plant, labour, transport, water,
light and everything else necessary for the construction and completion of
1.…………………………………………………………………….……all to the
approval of the S.O..
The Conditions of Contract for the Works, which is embodied in the Form of
Contract (Form PWD 203/Form PWD 203A), shall be read in conjunction with this
Specification. A copy of the Form of Contract is available for inspection on the
Tender Table on any working day up to the time appointed for receiving tenders. If
the tenderer considers that any of the clauses of the Contract involves expenses,
he shall allow for the money value of such clauses in his Tender.
2. Standards
All Standards referred to in this Specification together with any addenda issued
shall be deemed to be the editions current at the time of Tender. If the Malaysian
Standard (MS) exists, which the S.O. deems to be equivalent to the British or
other Standard specified, then the MS shall be followed. Other equivalent
standards specifying superior material may be used with the approval of the S.O..
In the event of any discrepancy between the provision of this Specification and the
provision within the relevant Standards or Codes of Practice (CP) as mentioned in
this Specification, then the provision of this Specification shall take precedence.
The following references shall mean:
(i) AASHTO - The American Association of State Highway and Transportation

Officials
(ii) ANSI - American National Standards Institute
(iii) API - American Petroleum Institute Specification
(iv) AS/NZS - Australian/New Zealand Standard
(v) ASTM - The American Society for Testing and Materials
(vi) AWWA - American Water Works Association
(vii) BS - British Standards Specification as issued by the British Standards
House, London (the latest amendment)
(viii) CNS - China National Standard
(ix) CP - British Standard Code of Practice issued by the Council for Code
of Practice in Great Britain (the latest amendment)
(x) DIN - Deutsche Industrie Norm (German Institute for Standardisation)
(xi) EN - European Standard which is a standard that has been adopted
by one of the three recognized European Standardisation
Organisations (ESOs), that is CEN (European Committee for
Standardization), CENELEC (European Committee for
Electrotechnical Standardisation) and ETSI (European
Telecommunications Standards Institute)
(xii) JIS - Japanese Industrial Standard
(xiii) MS - Malaysian Standards as issued by the Standard & Industrial
Research Institute of Malaysia (the latest amendment)
(xiv) APHA - American Public Health Association
@COPYRIGHT JKR MALAYSIA

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
3. Contract Documents
The Contract Documents shall consist of:
PWD Form of Contract (for contract based on Specification and

Drawings or for contract based on Quantities) and addendum to the
Conditions of Contract;
Form of Tender;
Letter of Acceptance;
Special Provisions to the Conditions of Contract as listed in the PWD

Form of Contract;
Contract Drawings;
Specifications and addendums;
Summary of Tender and Schedule of Rates (for contract based on

Specifications and Drawings);
B.Q. (for contract based on Quantities); and
Any other relevant documents included therein.
The documents shall be taken as mutually explanatory of each other and in case
of any discrepancy or inconsistency, the following rules shall apply:
The Conditions of Contract (PWD Form 203/ PWD Form 203A) shall
take preference over all other documents.
Special Provisions to Conditions of Contract shall take preference over

Conditions of Contract.
Addendum to Conditions of Contract shall take preference over

Conditions of Contract.
In Drawings, large scale details shall take preference over small scale
Drawings.
The Addendum Specification shall take preference over the Standard

Specifications and Drawings.
Drawings shall take preference over Standard Specifications.
Any discrepancies shall be referred as soon as possible to the S.O. who shall
decide which shall be followed.
4. Adjoining Property
Where the property adjoining the Site is in constant use by the Employer/adjoining
owners and occupiers, the Contractor shall arrange and carry out the Works so as to
cause minimum interference or interruption to the use of adjoining properties including
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
roads, footpaths, other access and any existing services thereto. He shall comply with all
instructions or directions given by the S.O. in these matters.
5. Goods, Materials and Workmanship
Materials and workmanship throughout the Works shall be in accordance with the
Drawings and Specifications and to the approval of the S.O..
Where required, all works shall be executed by competent and skilled workers in
the related field.
Wherever in this Specification any proprietary goods or materials are specified,

goods or materials of alternative manufacture may be considered for acceptance
provided they comply in all respect as regards to appearance and quality, and are
approved by the S.O..
If, however, the Contractor has shown beyond reasonable doubt that the specified
goods or materials cannot be obtained and the S.O. is satisfied with regard to the
non-availability of the goods and materials, the benefit of cost savings, if any,
resulting from the Contractor’s proposal or substitution of goods or materials
approved by the S.O., shall be deducted from the Contract Sum.
6. Use of Local Materials
The Contractor shall use locally manufactured materials and goods as listed in the
‘Senarai Bahan/Barangan Binaan Tempatan’ issued by IKRAM QA Services Sdn.
Bhd. and/or ‘Senarai Bahan/Barangan Buatan Tempatan’ issued by SIRIM QA
Services Sdn. Bhd., whichever is relevant. If the Contractor fails to comply with
this requirement, a penalty shall be imposed and/or the materials supplied shall be
rejected.
The locally manufactured materials and goods which are not listed aforesaid, may
be permitted if the materials have been tested and certified by IKRAM QA
Services Sdn. Bhd. and/or SIRIM QA Services Sdn. Bhd. whichever is relevant. If
the testing cannot be carried out by IKRAM QA Services Sdn. Bhd. and/or SIRIM
QA Services Sdn. Bhd., the Contractor may apply and, subject to the approval of
the S.O., carry out the testing by other agencies.
Under no circumstances will the Contractor be permitted to incorporate or supply

imported materials, plant, equipment, or other goods into the Works or forming
part of the scope of the Works except those approved by the Government, prior to
the execution of the Contract. The Contractor shall substitute any materials, plant,
equipment, or other goods proposed to be imported but not approved by the
Government, with suitable local materials, plant, equipment, or other goods,
including making any necessary sub-sequential changes or adjustments to the
design of the Works to accommodate such substitution, all to the concurrence of
the S.O..
The Contractor shall ensure that the procurement of approved imported materials,
plant, equipment, or other goods are obtained directly from the country of origin
based on Free on Board (F.O.B) or other similar basis. The transportation and
insurance of such imported materials, plant, equipment, or other goods from the
country of origin to the Site shall be arranged by the Contractor through approved
Government’s Multi Modal Transport Operators (MTO). The Contractor shall allow
in his tender all costs and time required in complying with the requirements of this

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
sub-section including the cost required for the services provided by the MTO.
The Contractor shall submit documentary evidence of compliance with this sub-
section to the S.O. within one (1) month from the date of each delivery to the Site
of such materials, plant, equipment, vehicles or other goods.
7. Sustainable Materials and Products
Notwithstanding the materials and products shown on the Drawings or specified

herewith, the Contractor is encouraged to propose, at no additional cost,
alternative equivalent materials or “Green” products to be used in the Works,
subject to the approval of the S.O., such as:
Environmentally friendly materials or “Green” products that are certified

under the SIRIM Eco-Label certification or any labels under the Global
Eco-Label Network (GEN) certification.
Product registered under MyHijau Mark Scheme.
Products self-declared “Green” by the manufacturer with certification

from recognised independent certifying bodies and not a member of
GEN.
The contractor shall refer to SIRIM/JKR Standard on Manual for Green Product
Scoring System (GPSS) for additional information on sustainable materials and
products.
8. Metrication
Unless otherwise specified hereinafter or shown on the Drawings, only materials of

metric dimension shall be used for the Works. Materials of equivalent imperial dimension
may only be used if the Contractor can satisfy the S.O. that the required materials are
not available in metric dimension.
9. Ordering
The Contractor shall place his orders for specified materials at the earliest possible date
after notification of acceptance of tender or at such times as may be specifically stated
for any particular material.
10. Supply of Materials by Government
If the Contractor fails for any reason to supply any materials, which he has
contracted to supply, or if he fails to supply any such materials in sufficient time to
enable the Contract to be completed by the agreed date for completion, the
Government may supply any portion, or all of such materials.
If the Government supplies such material, the cost in respect thereof to be borne
by the Contractor shall be either the current market rates or the actual cost to the
Government, whichever is greater, plus 5% on cost charges.
The cost to be borne by the Contractor, as detailed above, shall be deducted from
any money due or to become due to the Contractor under this Contract and failing

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
which such costs shall be recovered from the Performance Bond or as a debt due
from the Contractor.
No action by the S.O. under this sub-section shall be deemed in any way to affect
or modify the right of the Government to claim for damages in the event of the
Contractor’s failure to complete the Works by the agreed date of completion.
11. Shop Drawings, Samples and Mock-ups
The Contractor shall submit for approval relevant shop drawings as requested by
the S.O..
The Contractor shall submit samples of materials or execute samples of

workmanship for the S.O.’s approval, and for further samples as required until the
samples submitted or executed are in accordance with this Specification.
The Contractor shall prepare sample installations as required to match specified

works in all respects before proceeding with work.
Mock-up units approved and accepted by the S.O. shall be referred as the
Standard of comparison for the work.
The Contractor shall submit for approval as requested by the S.O., manufacturer's
specifications, installation instruction, general recommendation for the work,
including certified laboratory test reports and other data required to show
compliance with these specifications.
12. Contractor’s Plant
The Contractor shall provide, erect, keep insured, maintain and remove on
completion all requisite scaffolding, hoist, ladder, staging, tarpaulins, tools,
vehicles, tackles and other plants and apparatus (excluding piling and pile testing
equipment), as required by all trades as are necessary for the execution of the
Works.
All mechanical plant used by the Contractor shall be of such type, size and
capacity suitable to the type and nature of the Works and site conditions where the
Works are to be executed.
The Contractor shall take note the required cranage for the erection and
completion of precast components and to ensure that the said cranes are or will
be available during the construction stages.
13. Construction Plan
Within fourteen (14) days after the receipt of the Letter of Acceptance, the
Contractor shall submit to the S.O. for his approval the following:
Programme of Works
A detailed work programme using the Critical Path Method (CPM)

including electronic and printed copies of all data. The programme shall
represent the sequence and the dependencies of work and must
represent the intended work sequence. The programme shall be

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
presented in the form of Gantt chart and network diagrams indicating,

among others the critical activities, interface dates, resources and cost
required to complete the works within the Contract period.
The work programme shall be prepared, updated and revised as

specified in the JKR Work Programme Guideline and as directed by the
S.O.. The Contractor shall be required to update all information and
maintain the planned programme weekly/monthly using the CPM or as
instructed by the S.O..
The work programme shall be prepared and maintained by trained and

qualified personnel. The Contractor shall submit relevant documents
such as curriculum vitae and certificates of the said personnel to the
S.O. for approval.
Method Statements
The Contractor shall also furnish in writing to the S.O. or S.O.’s

Representatives particulars of the Contractor’s method statements for
carrying out such works and of the construction plant and temporary
works, if any, which the Contractor intends to supply, use or construct as
the case may be. The submission to and approval by the S.O. or the
S.O.’s Representatives of such programme or the furnishing of such
particulars shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his duties or
responsibilities under the Contract.
Contractor’s Organisation Chart
The Contractor shall submit to the S.O. the organisation chart of his
project team showing the personnel involved, their designations and
relationship including their roles and responsibilities.
Schedules
The Contractor shall submit the following schedules:
(i) Maintenance and Calibration Schedule of the plant and

equipment to be used in the Works.
(ii) Inspection and Testing Schedule of the plant and

equipment, itemising the type and frequency of
inspection and testing.
Quality Assurance Plan (QAP)
Applicable for project value more then RM10 Million.
Contractor to Submit Quality Assurance Plan
(i) The Contractor shall submit to the S.O. an outline

Quality Assurance Plan for comment within fourteen (14)
days of the date of Letter of Acceptance. Within twenty-
eight (28) days thereafter the Contractor shall submit to
the S.O. for approval a properly documented Quality
Assurance Plan that shall take proper account of the
S.O.’s comment on the outline Quality Assurance Plan.
The approval by the S.O. of such plan shall not relieve

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
the Contractor of any of his obligations under the

Contract. The Contractor shall update and revise the
said Quality Assurance Plan during the progress of the
work in order to comply with the contract, all to the
(ii) Details of all procedures and compliance documents

shall be submitted to the S.O. for information before
each design for temporary works and execution stage of
the Works is commenced. When any document of a
technical nature is issued to the S.O. evidence of the
prior approval by the Contractor himself shall be
apparent on the document itself.
(iii) Quality Assurance Plan shall set out the specific quality
procedures, practices, resources and sequence of
activities to meet the requirements of the Contract and
Specifications and shall include the proposed
organization structure of the Contractor including quality
assurance team, quality procedures, Contractor’s plant,
construction programme, method statements,
environmental management, health and safety, selection
and testing of materials, placement, installation, site
operational control, non-conforming reporting (NCR),
closing out NCR for the taking over, coordination with
local and statutory authorities, internal quality audit
control, remedying of defects , commissioning and
maintenance (if any).
(iv) All Quality Assurance Plan submitted by the Contractor

to the S.O. shall conform to the relevant standards set
out by the International Standards Organisation (ISO)
and in conjunction with the Public Works Department
Quality Management System.
Contractor to Adhere Quality Assurance Plan
The Contractor shall implement the quality assurance

procedures in the approved Quality Assurance Plan and shall
submit a monthly quality assurance report to be endorsed by a
Quality Assurance Officer incorporating all test results, test
certificates, photographs and lab reports relating to the quality
of materials and workmanship.
Quality Assurance Team
(i) The Contractor shall appoint a suitably qualified and

experienced person to act solely as Quality Assurance
Officer full time on Site to lead the Quality Assurance
Team. The Quality Assurance Officer shall meet the
following requirements:
a) Possess a relevant technical Degree from a

university recognised by the Government of
Malaysia, and

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
b) Possess not less than 5 years’ experience in the

construction industry, and
c) Possess a Construction Industry Development

Board (CIDB) Green Card, and
d) Has any one of the following;
i. Minimum 2 years relevant experience in the

implementation of MS ISO 9001 in the
construction industry, or
ii. Has attended field internal audit activities

for MS ISO 9001, or Possess Internal
Auditor Certificate from agency or body
recognised by MAMPU
(ii) The Contractor shall provide a Quality Assurance Team

and resources that are required to ensure the effective
operation of the Quality Assurance Plan
a) Verification of Implementation
i. The Contractor shall at his own cost provide

all access, assistance and facilities to
enable the S.O.’s Representative to
audit/verify the implementation of the
Quality Assurance Plan and adherence
thereto.
ii. The S.O.’s Representative may, at his

discretion, reject any of the Works which in
his opinion have not been executed in
accordance with the Quality Assurance
Plan and which ultimately does not conform
with the specification, or the resultant
execution of the work was not done in a
good and workmanlike manner and to the
accepted standard and good practice. The
contractor shall re-execute at his own cost
and without any entitlement to any
extension of time all such parts of the
Works so rejected.
14. Project Signboard
The Contractor shall provide, erect, paint and maintain a project signboard as shown on
the relevant drawing or as directed by the S.O.. The signboard shall be erected at a
prominent position at the Site as approved by the S.O..
15. Progress Photographs
The Contractor shall take progress photographs at monthly intervals or more

frequent as directed by the S.O.. The photographs must be taken from different
angles including aerial view as directed by the S.O. and the average number of

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
photographs shall be sufficient enough to show the progress of the Works. For
building works, the average number per month shall not be less than six (6) per
block of building.
The Contractor shall supply six (6) sets of bound printed copies of the approved
photographs, all properly titled and dated. The photographs shall also be provided
in jpeg or other approved format with each image set at minimum size of 1920 x
1080 pixels and at resolution of 60 frames per second and submitted to the S.O.
monthly, in compact discs or removable storage devices.
16. Sufficient Notice to Local Authorities/Utility Providers/Regulatory Bodies
The Contractor shall give sufficient notice to the relevant Local Authorities/Utility
Providers/Regulatory Bodies before commencing or to inspect any works in
relation to their scope of services. Failure to give sufficient notice shall not entitle
the Contractor to extension of time due to any subsequent delays in connection
with the Works.
Any notice given to the above-mentioned authorities shall also be copied to the
S.O..
17. Access and Temporary Roads
The Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary temporary entrance to the Site
and temporary culverts, tracks, bridges, et cetera for access to and within the Site as
long as required to the approval of the S.O.. The position where the site access is to be
made shall be as indicated on the site plan or as approved by the S.O. and the
Contractor shall make all arrangements and obtain all approvals and permissions
required at his own cost.
18. Temporary Diversion and Relocation of Existing Overhead and Services

Underground
Before commencing any excavation, et cetera, the Contractor shall enquire from
the various authorities whether any underground pipes, cables, et cetera are
present on the Site and if so, he shall make arrangements for the disconnection,
removal and if necessary, the relocation and reconnection of such services and
pay all necessary cost and fees in connection with all temporary diversion and
relocation of existing services.
If during excavation, the Contractor comes across any underground cables, et

cetera, he shall immediately stop work and refer to the S.O. for further instructions
and make arrangements for the disconnection, et cetera The Contractor shall be
responsible for making good all damage to the cables, et cetera, and shall
indemnify the Government against any claims as a result of such damage.
19. Temporary Power and Water Supplies for the Works
The Contractor shall provide adequate power supplies for temporary lighting and
for the execution of the Works. Electricity shall be obtained from Tenaga Nasional
Berhad (TNB) or the local electricity supply company. Where such electricity
supply cannot be provided, generator set(s) may be used but safety precautions
must be taken. The use of kerosene lamps shall not be allowed.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
The Contractor shall provide all water required for the use in the Works including
providing and removing all temporary plumbing and storage facilities on
completion.
The Contractor shall pay all associated costs and fees for the power and water
supplies.
The Contractor shall pay all permanent bills until the issuance of Certificate
Practical Completion (CPC).
20. Site Security
The Contractor shall provide all necessary personnel and lighting for the security of the
site at all times until completion of the whole works.
21. Care and Protection of Materials and Works
The Contractor shall provide and maintain everything necessary for proper protection of
materials and Works from any damage by weather, carelessness or otherwise. Any
damage caused shall be made good at the Contractor’s own cost to the approval of the
S.O..
22. Legislation and Regulations
The Contractor shall at all times comply with the provisions of all legislation,
regulations and by-laws currently in force with regard to and in connection with the
construction works, the environment, safety and health. The relevant legislation,
regulations and by-laws including any revisions thereto are as listed in but not
limited to APPENDIX A/1.
The Contractor shall be liable for and shall indemnify the Government against any
damages, expenses, liability, losses, claims, prosecution, proceedings, fines and
penalties caused by any non-compliance or contravention of the above legislation,
regulations and by-laws.
23. Erosion and Sedimentation Control (ESC)
The Contractor shall execute the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan (ESCP) and
all control measures as shown on the Drawings in such a manner and order as
directed by the S.O. that will minimize accelerated erosion and sedimentation
during the construction phase. The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance
with MSMA relating to erosion and sediment control.
The Contractor shall execute ESCP which requires for inspection of erosion and
sediment control devices and facilities on a weekly basis and following
precipitation events, as well as maintenance, replacement or repairs to inadequate
or damaged controls and devices to ensure effective and efficient operation.
The Contractor shall maintain all the temporary works regularly throughout the
construction period, or as directed by the S.O. and making good of any damaged
portions during the course of the works.
The Contractor shall make proper provision for the drainage of surface water from

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
the work site (run-off) including rainwater from surrounding areas (run-on) which
drain on to the site.
The Contractor shall provide, form, fix and maintain such pumps, chutes, walls,
drains, bunds and other temporary works necessary for the proper drainage of the
Site so that no ponding, flooding or other damage or disturbance is caused to
areas surrounding the works throughout the duration of the Contract.
The Contractor shall execute protection and maintenance of erosion control as

stated in SECTION B: EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORKS sub-section 7..
Silt/Sediment traps shall be constructed as shown on the Drawings unless

otherwise directed by the S.O.. The silt/sediment traps shall be maintained
regularly throughout the contract period, including desilting when required or as
directed by the S.O. and making good of any damages during the course of the
Works. The desilted material shall be transported to disposal site approved by the
S.O..
The Contractor shall construct construction stabilization access as shown on the

Drawing unless otherwise directed by the S.O. for reducing tracking of mud and
dirt onto public’s roads by Contractor’s vehicles. The construction stabilization
access can be made from aggregates, asphaltic concrete and concrete based on
longevity, required performance and site condition. The use of asphalt concrete
grindings for stabilized construction access/roadway shall be not allowed.
Stabilized construction access shall be maintained by the Contractor until
construction staging requires removal or upon final stabilization of the construction
site. Upon removal of the stabilized construction access, the area shall be graded
and stabilized.
The Contractor shall construct wash trough/wash bay complete with water jet as
shown on the Drawing unless otherwise directed by the S.O. for cleaning all
debris, dirt and mud from the wheels and tyres of Contractor’s vehicles leaving the
Site. The position of the wash trough/wash bay shall be as indicated on the site
plan or as approved by the S.O.. The wash trough/wash bay shall be maintained
regularly throughout the contract period as directed by the S.O..
The Contractor shall construct temporary waterway crossing as shown on the

Drawing unless otherwise directed by the S.O., for providing erosion-free access
point across a waterway for contractor’s vehicles or equipment and may be
necessary to prevent contractor’s equipment from causing erosion of the waterway
and tracking of pollutants into the waterway.
The Contractor shall install check dam as shown on the Drawings unless
otherwise directed by the S.O., for preventing erosion by reducing the velocity of
storm water flows in diversion channel in steep terrain. The check dam shall be
constructed of rocks or logs which are secured against damage during significant
floods. It shall be of sufficient height and spacing to allow small pools to form
between each one and also promote sedimentation behind the dam. The check
dam shall be inspected after each rainfall and when a sediment accumulation of
approximately one third (1/3) of the check dam height is observed, the sediment
shall be removed.
The Contractor shall construct protection works to the drainage inlets and outlets
as shown on the Drawings unless otherwise directed by the S.O. for trapping
sediment and debris. The drainage inlet and outlet protection work may consist of
rock, grouted rip-rap, concrete rubble, gravel, sand bag, wire mesh or trash screen
shall be constructed in such a manner that will facilitate cleanout and disposal of

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
trapped sediment / debris and minimizes interference with construction activities.
24. Access Roads and Maintenance of Existing Roads
All access roads to the site shall be built away from the existing watercourses,
streams and rivers with proper drainage system and be paved for a distance of at
least 10 metre from where these access roads join existing roads.
The Contractor shall maintain all access roads including the drainage system
throughout the construction period to the satisfaction of the S.O..
Where the Contractor uses existing/private roads as his access, he shall be

responsible for any damage to the existing roads, bridges, drains, culverts,
roadside furniture, and all other appurtenances and services on such roads
caused by any work carried out by him throughout the construction period. The
Contractor shall repair any damages and reinstate the same to their original
condition to the satisfaction of the S.O..
All temporary diversion affecting public/private roads must be approved by the

Government, private landowners and the S.O.. All such diversions must be
equipped with temporary diversion signs and comply with the current JKR
requirements Adequate workmen for controlling traffic diversion must be provided.
If the Contractor fails to carry out his obligations as stated above, the S.O. shall
carry out such maintenance and restoration and all costs incurred shall be borne
by the Contractor or deducted from any money due or to become due to the
Contractor under this Contract.
25. Control of Workmen, Plant and Machinery at Site
The Contractor shall be responsible for controlling all persons under his
employment and those employed by his sub-contractors, merchants and haulers
at the work site and shall take all necessary precautions to prevent damage and
nuisance of any kind and shall indemnify the Government against any claim
arising therefrom.
The Contractor shall ensure, so far as is practicable, the safety, health and welfare
at work of all his workmen including:
The provision and maintenance of plant and system of work that is safe
and without risks to health;
Ensuring safety and absence of risks to health in connection with the use
or operation, handling, storage and transport of plant and substances;
The provision for such information, instruction, training and supervision

as is necessary to ensure the safety and health at work of his workmen;
The maintenance of place of work condition, the provision and

maintenance of the means of access to and egress from place of work
that are safe and without risks;
The provision and maintenance of a working environment for his

workmen that is safe, without risks to health, and adequate as regards
facilities for their welfare at work;

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
Ensuring all workmen have valid CIDB Green Cards before entering the
construction site.
26. Particulars of Employees
The Contractor shall on each working day furnish, maintain and update a full list of all his
workers to the S.O. including all workers employed by his sub-contractors or Nominated
Sub-contractors on the work site giving all particulars in the format as approved by the
S.O..
27. Contractor’s Temporary Accommodation and Facilities for Workmen
If any, the Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary accommodation

including all necessary facilities and services for water supply, drainage, sanitation
and lighting for his staff. Before any works can commence the Contractor shall
submit to the S.O., details of the proposed buildings and services and shall obtain
the S.O.’s approval together with any other necessary approvals in writing from
the relevant Authorities.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all fees and other charges or expenses
incurred in connection with such office and housing and shall keep the whole area
in a clean, tidy and well-maintained condition. The Contractor shall provide
adequate first aid facilities appropriate to the size and composition of his staff and
labour force.
The Contractor shall be responsible for controlling all persons under his
employment and those employed by his sub-contractors at the work site and shall
take all necessary precautions to prevent damage and nuisance of any kind and
shall indemnify the Government against any claim arising therefrom.
When instructed by the S.O. upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall
remove all such buildings and appurtenant works from the site, clean up the area
and restore it to the satisfaction of the S.O..
28. Contractor’s Office and Storage
The Contractor shall provide and maintain on the Site in positions as approved by
the S.O. the following adequate, secure and weatherproof temporary building(s)
for use during the execution of the Contract.
Office for Contractor’s use
Shed for storage of cement with the floor raised 300 mm above the
ground.
Shed for bar-bending and similar Works
Store for chemical / hazardous substance
Store for other building materials
…………………………………….

Insert other item if required
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
The Contractor shall store or stack at all times, all materials, tools, et cetera in a
safe and orderly manner so as not obstruct any passageway or place of work.
29. Office Accommodation for S.O.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain a site office for the use of the JKR
supervisory staff all in accordance with JKR design type as shown on the relevant
Drawings inclusive of all fittings and furniture as stated therein.
The Contractor is permitted to provide relocatable site office as an alternative to

the JKR design type. The quality of such relocatable site office shall be of
equivalent standard but not inferior to the JKR design type and shall be equipped
with similar fittings and furniture as indicated in the JKR design site office.
Where relocatable site office is to be provided, the Contractor shall submit details
of the relocatable site office together with his tender. Such details shall include the
name of the manufacturer, floor area and layout, list of fittings and furniture and
brochures (if available). The Contractor shall also indicate whether the proposed
site office is new or had been previously used.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the office is to be sited, positioned and
constructed as approved by the S.O..
The Contractor is also permitted to rent a premise of equivalent floor area and
standard not inferior to the JKR design type and equipped with similar furniture,
fittings and equipment. Where a rented premise is to be provided, the Contractor
shall submit details, which shall include the layout and a list of furniture and fittings
to be provided to the S.O. for approval.
The Contractor shall make proper arrangement for and pay all charges in
connection with conservancy. The site office shall comply with local building by-
laws. It shall be erected or provided by the Contractor and approved by the S.O.
within four (4) weeks from the date of possession of Site.
On completion of the Works, unless otherwise instructed, the site office with all
fittings and furniture shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be
removed from the Site forthwith.
30. Telephone for S.O.
The Contractor shall arrange and provide telephone at the S.O.’s site office including
provision of high speed internet access and sufficient capacity for the sole use of the
S.O. and his representatives in connection with the supervision and administration of the
Contract and pay for all installation, rental, call charges and disconnection.
31. Personal Protective Equipment for S.O.
Personal Protective Equipment
The Contractor shall provide personal protective equipment as listed in latest

revision of JKR Specifications for Occupational Safety and Health In Engineering
Constructions Works for the use of the S.O. and his supervisory staff throughout
the duration of the Contract which comply with the DOSH requirements.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
32. Office Equipment and Facilities for S.O.
Office Equipment for S.O..
The Contractor shall provide the equipment and facilities as listed in

APPENDIX A2 for the use of the S.O., his representatives and staff. All
equipment and facilities provided shall be delivered, tested and installed
within four (4) weeks from the Date for Possession of Site.
The facilities provided shall be maintained by the Contractor or his

appointed agent throughout the contract period. Maintenance shall
include all necessary monthly servicing according to the manufacturer
specifications and supply of accessories and consumables.
Within thirty (30) days from the issuance of the Certificate of Practical
Completion, the equipment shall be returned to the Contractor.
If the Contractor fails to provide or maintain any equipment or facilities as

listed in APPENDIX A/2 the Government shall have the right to procure
the equipment from other sources or maintain it and all expenses arising
shall be borne by the Contractor and an appropriate adjustment shall be
made to the Contract Sum.
Suitable types of fire extinguishers shall be installed and maintained at

required locations on the Site throughout the Contract period.
Transport Services for S.O..
The Contractor shall provide suitable transportation service by means of

vehicle(s) including licensed and competent driver(s) as stipulated in
APPENDIX A/3.
The Contractor shall ensure that the vehicle(s) is/are in a good and well-
maintained condition.
The vehicle(s) shall be in the custody of the Contractor at all times and
be readily available for the use of the S.O. and his staff.
The Contractor shall provide comprehensive insurances to cover all

drivers and passengers and ensure that all road tax is valid throughout
the period of service.
Replacement vehicle(s) shall be provided when the normal vehicle is not

available such as during periods of servicing, maintenance or repair. If
the Contractor fails to provide the required transport, the officer shall
have the option to arrange alternative transport and the Contractor shall
bear the expenses incurred.
Within thirty (30) days from the issuance of the Certificate of Practical
Completion, the vehicle(s) shall be returned to the Contractor.
33. Material Testing Laboratory and Staff
Where specified, the Contractor shall provide a testing laboratory within the site
with a minimum floor area 60 m2 all in accordance with the relevant drawings
including water and electricity supply. The Laboratory shall be equipped with the

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
necessary equipment required to carry out the tests as identified in APPENDIX

A/4 (List of Laboratory Equipment). The Contractor shall be responsible for the
maintenance of the Laboratory and all equipment including all necessary
calibration throughout the duration of the Contract. The laboratory may be jointly
used by the S.O. and the Contractor.
Alternatively, the Contractor may rent a premise of equivalent floor area and
standard not inferior to that of the JKR specified type with similar fittings and
necessary equipment as identified in APPENDIX A/4.
All equipment shall be returned to the Contractor within thirty (30) days after the
issuance of the Certificate of Practical Completion.
All tests shall be carried out by qualified laboratory staff(s) and shall be witnessed
and approved by the S.O..
Subject to the S.O.’s approval, the Contractor may also propose an accredited
laboratory approved by SIRIM as an alternative to the construction of a testing
laboratory.
All works subject to laboratory test shall not be permitted to commence until the
laboratory and necessary equipment have been provided or the accredited
laboratory has been approved by the S.O..
34. Survey Instruments and Personnel
The Contractor shall provide for the sole use of the S.O. and his staff all such
instruments, equipment and survey personnel as may be required until thirty (30) days
after the issuance of the Certificate of Practical Completion. The Contractor shall ensure
that all instruments and equipment are maintained in good working condition at all times.
35. Safe Working Area
The Contractor shall at all times comply with Guidelines for Public Safety and Health at
Construction Sites, DOSH, and other Occupational Safety and Health requirements
stated and as listed in JKR Specifications for Occupational Safety and Health In
Engineering Constructions Works JKR No. 20700-0349-19 to ensure safe working area.
36. Safety, Health and Welfare
The Contractor shall be required to provide a complete First Aid Kit as stated
under Factory and Machinery (Safety, Health and Welfare) Regulation 1970 which
shall be kept and properly maintained in the Contractor’s site office. The kit shall
be in the charge of either the Contractor’s site representative or some other
responsible person who shall be on the Site during all working hours to ensure
that the first aid facilities are available without delay at all times when Works is in
progress. At least one (1) designated person of the Contractor’s staff shall be
trained in first aid duties.
The Contractor shall refrain from dumping and/or depositing any form of materials
that are capable of collecting water which afford breeding places for mosquitoes,
rodents, insects and vermin of any kind. All excavation and any portion of the site
where water stagnates or accumulates shall be kept dry by pumping, bailing or
other operations. The Contractor shall pay all charges as may be required by the

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
MOH and/or Local Authority and employ whatever destructive measures as are
necessary.
All Works shall be carried out without unreasonable noise level and dust emission.
The Contractor shall take measures to ensure that all equipment and machinery
are in proper working condition so as to minimize the amount of noise and dust
generated. The S.O. may require the Contractor to submit a proposal on how to
reduce excessive noise and dust.
The Contractor is prohibited from discharging oil and grease to any water course.
Storage tanks for oil and grease shall be placed on concrete base with upstand
edges to contain any spillage. Any spilled oil and grease shall be promptly
removed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall collect, and store used oil,
grease and other scheduled wastes and dispose these according to methods
approved by DOE.
Where the contract period is more than six weeks, the Contractor shall register
with DOSH within seven (7) days after commencement of Works.
All safety measures shall be carried out in accordance with Occupational Safety
and Health Act (OSHA) 1994, JKR Specifications for Occupational Safety and
Health In Engineering Constructions Works JKR No. 20700-0349-19 and relevant
local by-laws. The Contractor shall be held solely responsible for all accidents
arising from any negligence in this respect. The Contractor shall employ
throughout the entire contract period a competent and qualified person as Safety
and Health Practitioner as below:
Site Safety Supervisor (SSS) to be stationed minimum 15 hours a week

for all projects.
Safety and Health Officer (SHO) to be stationed full time for contracts
worth more than RM20 million.
The Contractor shall ensure all sub-contractors and nominated sub-contractors

who employ more than 20 persons shall appoint a Contractor Safety Supervisor
(CSS) to be stationed minimum 5 hours a week.
The Contractor shall submit Safety and Health Plan (S-Plan) in writing duly signed
by the Director of the company to the S.O. within one (1) month after the receipt of
the Letter of Acceptance. The S-Plan shall be as per requirements in JKR
Specifications for Occupational Safety and Health In Engineering Constructions
Works JKR No. 20700-0349-19. The Contractor shall submit revised S-Plan
whenever required.
The Contractor shall form a Safety and Health Committee in accordance with the
Occupational Safety and Health Regulations 1996 and organise meetings at
minimum once in every three (3) months.
The Contractor shall conduct Occupational Safety and Health (OSH) related
training and programmes for the workmen including sub-contractors in accordance
with JKR Specifications for Occupational Safety and Health In Engineering
Constructions Works JKR No. 20700-0349-19.
The Contractor shall carry out site safety and health inspections and submit
monthly safety and health reports to the S.O. in accordance with JKR
Specifications for Occupational Safety and Health In Engineering Constructions
Works JKR No. 20700-0349-19.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
The Contractor shall provide and maintain safety and health statistic scoreboard at
the entrance of site office and workplace in accordance with JKR Specifications for
Occupational Safety and Health In Engineering Constructions Works JKR No.
20700-0349-19.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate traffic safety signage, warning
signs and warning lights at place of Works and close proximity to public.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain traffic control by competent persons
including provision of flagmen where Works is in close proximity to public roads.
The Contractor shall carry out site safety and health inspections as per DOSH
requirements and/or instructed by the S.O..
37. Sanitation
The Contractor shall provide and maintain sufficient water efficient temporary
toilets at appropriate locations on site as approved by the S.O.. Toilets shall be
complete with adequate water closets, urinals, hand-basins with proper sanitary
system and maintained in a clean and sanitary condition in accordance with the
requirements of the MOH.
All wastewater must be treated such that its discharged effluent meets the
requirements of all existing legislation and regulations.
38. Waste Management
The contractor shall ensure all waste generated on site shall be managed in
accordance with the latest statutes and other related legislation as follows:
Type of waste generated on Statutory requirement

site
Scheduled waste / hazardous  Environmental Quality Act 1974
waste  Environmental Quality (Scheduled Wastes)
Regulations, 2005
Construction & demolition waste  Solid Waste and Public Cleansing
Domestic waste Management Act 2007
 Solid Waste and Public Cleansing
Management (Scheme for Construction
Solid Waste) Regulations 2018
Actions need to be carried out to ensure all waste generated on site are managed
properly as required by the law (but not limited to) are as follows:
The Contractor shall submit in the approved format the Construction

Waste Management Plan (CWMP) to the S.O. for approval within
fourteen (14) days from the date of site possession.
The Contractor shall provide adequate Roll-On Roll-Off (RORO) Bin for
construction waste and Mobile Garbage Bin (MGB) for domestic waste.
The Contractor shall provide a minimum of one (1) suitable location on

site for segregation and collection of construction and domestic waste.
The Contractor shall provide proper storage facility and container for

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
Schedule Waste Management in accordance with the Drawings.
The Contractor shall appoint a licensed contractor(s) to collect the

construction waste, scheduled waste and domestic waste from the site to
approved locations for disposal or to recycle the waste.
The contractor shall keep all records relating to disposal of waste from
site.
39. Environmental Protection Works
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA)
For projects subjected to EIA under Section 34A of the Environmental Quality Act
(EQA) 1974, the contractor shall ensure full compliance to all EIA approval
conditions stipulated by Department of Environment (DOE) or other relevant
authorities.
Environmental Management Plan (EMP)
The Contractor shall prepare the EMP for the following situations:
Projects worth more than RM20 Million including earthworks.
Project sites located in Environmental Sensitive Area (ESA) as

defined in the National Physical Plan by PLAN Malaysia
(Jabatan Perancangan Bandar dan Desa.)
Projects where Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) has

been carried out.
The EMP shall be prepared by a registered environmental consultant

and submitted to the DOE/NREB/EPD (for EIA projects) or the S.O. (for
Non-EIA projects) for approval. The contractor shall ensure EMP must
be approved before commencement of site clearing and earthwork
activities on site. The EMP shall be concise, up to date and site specific.
The EMP shall refer to the following but not limited to:
DOE/NREB/EPD format for the preparation of EMPs (For EIA

projects);
The approved EIA report and conditions imposed (if any);
JKR format based on latest Guideline/Arahan Teknik Jalan

(ATJ) on Environmental Protection and Enhancement Works
(EPW) (For Non-EIA projects).
The Contractor also required to submit the following

documents as per Table A1 to the S.O.:

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
Table A1. Submission of Documents
No. of
Documents Reporting Frequency Timing
Copies
EMP must be approved
Environmental Once only (to be updated before commencement of
5
Management Plan (EMP) when necessary) site clearing and earthwork
activities on site*
Environmental Monitoring
5 Monthly 14 days after monitoring**
Report (EMR)
Environmental Audit
5 Quarterly 14 days after audit***
Report (EAR)
14 days prior to issuance of
Environmental Closure
5 Once Only Certificate of Practical
Audit Report (ECAR)
Completion***
Note * To be carried out by registered environmental consultant with DOE/NREB/EPD

** Parameters to be tested needs to be carried out by accredited laboratory
*** To be carried out by registered environmental auditor with DOE/NREB/EPD
Environmental Officer (E.O)
The Contractor shall appoint a qualified person as a full time E.O as per
S.O.’s approval for environmental management works, throughout the
contract period for the implementation of EIA and JKR Sistem
Pengurusan Alam Sekitar (SPAS) or project more than RM 20 million
including earthwork:
For EIA project:

E.O. shall have degree in Civil Engineering or environmental science
with 3-years related experience and be certified with
CESSWI/CISEC/CePSWaM or equivalent as required by
DOE/NREB/EPD.
For non-EIA project:

E.O. shall have degree in Civil Engineering or environmental science
with 1-year related experience.
40. Water and Air Quality, Noise and Vibration Control
The Contractor shall carry out monitoring of water and air quality, noise and
vibration as indicated in the EMP and tests to be carried out by accredited
laboratories. Parameters to be tested are as specified in TABLE A2 (APPENDIX
A/5).
Water Quality
All silt fence, silt traps, sedimentation basin and other erosion and
sediment control measures as shown in ESCP drawing must be
constructed and maintained by the Contractor.
The water used for cleaning vehicle tires in wash troughs should be
distributed through any sediment settling sump overflow and directed
into the silt trap. The used water should not be allowed to discharge
directly into existing drainage system.
Water quality standards and monitoring schedule from the silt traps/
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
sedimentation basin/rivers/stream/ water bodies shall comply as

specified in TABLE A2 (APPENDIX A/5) or as directed by the S.O.. Silt
traps and sediment basin discharges shall be monitored monthly and
shall be collected within 30 minutes after rainfall event of more than
20mm (For Non-EIA projects) or 12.5 mm (For EIA projects).
The contractor is prohibited from discharging oil, grease, paint and

sewage to any watercourse.
The contractor shall carry out monthly water quality monitoring at

locations on existing water bodies as indicated in the EMP. Water quality
sampling shall also be tested by an accredited laboratory.
Air Quality
The Contractor is not allowed to carry out open burning of cleared

vegetation, debris and construction waste et cetera, shall not be allowed
unless prior approval is obtained from the Director General of the DOE.
The Contractor shall provide suitable numbers of spraying equipment for

regular spraying of water over the existing roads, tracks and access
roads, near settlements, completed as well as incomplete road and other
barren areas of the site used by the contractor especially during the dry
season or as and when directed by the S.O..
When the Contractor’s trucks or equipment utilizes public or private

roadways, all dirt and materials shall be removed from the trucks/
equipment by hosing, lorry wash-trough, et cetera before leaving the site.
The Contractor shall provide for the prompt removal of all dirt and other
materials spilled from his or his sub-contractor’s vehicles on public or
private roadways.
For Contractor’s trucks carrying sand, aggregates, earth and other loose
construction materials liable to spillage, tarpaulin must be used to cover
such open trucks when passing through villages and settlements or on
all roadways.
The Contractor shall also ensure dust control at quarry / batching plant (if
any) and usage of generator set (genset) complies with environmental
requirement as stipulated in the Environmental Quality (Clean Air)
Regulations, 2014.
Noise and Vibration Control
All work shall be carried out with least disturbance and noise. The
contractor shall ensure all his equipment and machineries are in proper
working condition so as to minimize the amount of noise generated. The
S.O. may require the contractor to replace any machinery that to his
discretion is emitting excessive noise.
The Contractor shall ensure that at any time, the noise and vibration
levels resulting from his works at or across real property boundary
should not exceed the Recommended Limit as Specified in TABLE A2
(APPENDIX A/5). No person unless duly authorized by law or carrying
our legitimate duties shall use explosives or results in explosions which
create a vibration disturbance across a real property boundary or on a

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
public space or right of way.
The Contractor shall comply with the general recommendations set out
in The Planning Guidelines for Environmental Noise Limits and Control
and The Planning Guidelines for Vibration Limits and Control in the
Environment together with any specific requirements described in the
Contract.
The Contractor shall indemnify and keep indemnified the Government,

S.O. and the S.O.’s Representatives against any liability for damages on
account of noise and vibration disturbance created while or in carrying
out of the works and from and against all claims, demands, proceedings,
damages, costs charges and expenses whatever in regard or in relation
to such liability.
The contractor shall carry out noise and vibration monitoring at locations
as indicated in the EMP. The parameter to be tested is as specified in
TABLE A2 (APPENDIX A/5).
41. Nominated Sub-contractors
The Contractor shall allow in his tender price for attendance and facilities upon all
Nominated Sub-contractors. Such attendance and facilities shall include the
following:
Ascertaining from Nominated Sub-contractors all particulars relating to

their work in regard to sizes and positions in which chases, holes,
mortices, et cetera are required to be formed or left.
Making good of walls, ceilings, floors, roofs, et cetera and finishes

thereto including touching up of all paintwork necessitated, damaged or
disturbed by the Nominated Sub-contractor’s work.
Supplying all setting out information.
Giving all necessary dimensions and taking responsibility for their

accuracy.
Affording free and full use of standing scaffolding whilst it remains

erected on the Site.
Affording free and full use of storage accommodation for materials,

equipment and plant which are for incorporation into the Works and/or
which require protection against weather and deterioration, messrooms,
sanitary and welfare facilities.
Providing site space only for Nominated Sub-contractor’s temporary

office, workshops, workmen’s accommodation and storage of materials,
tools, plant and equipment which are not for incorporation into the Works
and not requiring protection against weather or deterioration.
Providing temporary water supply, electric power supply, artificial lighting

and paying all fees and charges for fuel, water and electricity consumed
including for testing and commissioning of the whole Nominated Sub-
contractor’s works.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
Liaising with the relevant supply/service authorities for the expeditious

installation of the connections for permanent water and electricity
supplies in the Works making available such supplies to the Nominated
Sub-contractors; and paying all fees and charges for such installation,
deposits for such supplies/services on behalf of the Government. All
such payments made, shall be reimbursed to the Contractor on
production of receipted bills.
Providing competent personnel in compliance with the latest Electricity

Regulations to take responsibility for the operation of the electrical
installation from the time the permanent electricity supply is made
available until testing, commissioning and handing over of the Works.
Protecting, watching and taking full responsibility for all Nominated Sub-
contractor’s work and unfixed materials and goods intended for use
thereon.
Removing rubbish and debris off the Site and cleaning the Works
internally and externally.
It is deemed that the Nominated Sub-contractor shall include in the Sub-contract

Sum, inter alia, the costs in connection with the following:
Unloading, getting in, storing and all handling and hoisting of these
materials, plant and tools into required positions.
Providing, erecting, maintaining and removing of all his temporary office,

workshops and workmen’s accommodation including paying all
assessment and other charges.
Connecting to temporary water and power supplies made available by

the Contractor for the execution of the Works, supplying and running
distribution pipes, hoses, cables, leads, electrical gear, et cetera but
excluding payment for water and electricity consumed.
Provision of fuel, gas, steam, oil lubricants, chemicals and everything

else necessary (other than water and electricity) for the test running and
commissioning of the Sub-contract Works.
Any scaffolding, staging, et cetera that are required for the Sub-contract
Works not covered by sub-section 42.1(v) above.
42. Nominated Suppliers
The Contractor shall allow in his tender, price for attendance upon all Nominated
Suppliers which is to include taking delivery, unloading, setting in, checking and
accepting delivery, returning empties, handling, storing and hoisting of the
materials/goods supplied by the Nominated Suppliers. Packing and carriage to Site shall
be borne by the Nominated Supplier unless specifically stated to the contrary.
43. Coordination of Mechanical and Electrical Services
General
This section shall describe the scope of works, qualifications, competency, roles

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
and responsibilities of the Mechanical and Electrical (M&E) Services Coordination

Team.
Scope of Work
The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the implementation

of all M&E works and related activities within the project scope. For this
purpose, the Contractor shall appoint M&E Services Coordinators full
time on site during the whole duration of the works. The appointment
shall be approved by the S.O..
The Contractor shall ensure all M&E requirements are implemented in a

timely manner and adequately integrated with all services involved such
as architectural, structural and other related services.
The Contractor shall conduct regular coordination meetings among all

sub-contractors, nominated or otherwise, from related disciplines to
evaluate and resolve all issues or problems regarding integration and
coordination of all services.
Minimum Requirement of M & E Services Coordinator Based on Project Cost As

Followed:
Project Cost (RM) Minimum Requirement of M&E Coordinator

Below 10 Million 1 CoW
Between 10 to 50 Million 1 Engineer & 1 CoW
More Than 50 Million 1 Engineer & 2 CoW
Qualification and Competency of M&E Coordinators
Engineer
Degree in related engineering field with minimum three (3) years of

working experience in building construction.
Clerk of Works (CoW)
Diploma in related engineering field with minimum five (5) years of

working experience in building construction.
Responsibilities of M&E Services Coordinator
The M&E Services Coordinator shall be responsible, on behalf

of the Contractor for:
(i) Ensure all M&E works are well coordinated with

architectural and structural works including but not
limited to modular coordination, factory fabrication, on
site supervision and inspection for the implementation of
IBS.
(ii) Guide the overall M&E works and implementation of

related activities within the project scope and providing
timely and relevant information.
(iii) Ensure that all layout, schematic, detail and Builder’s

Work in Connection (BWIC) drawings (for architectural,
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
structural, mechanical and electrical works) are received

from the S.O..
(iv) Supervise all the installation and construction works to

ensure the works are sufficiently coordinated.
(v) Identify and resolve issues or problems related to
integration and coordination of services by producing
coordinated services drawing, new method of installation
et cetera.
Coordinated Drawings
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the S.O. a complete set of
Coordinated Drawings which comprise Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and
Electrical works pertaining to all the services incorporated into the Works by his
sub-contractors, nominated sub-contractors or otherwise. The Coordinated
Drawings submitted by the Contractor must integrate with all the drawing for the
whole Works and must ensure efficient and orderly installation of all the parts of
the Works to ensure of non-interference with structural framing, ceilings,
partitions, equipment’s, lights, mechanical and electrical and other services, with
emphasis to safety maintainability and serviceability for the lifetime of the Works.
The Contractor shall guarantee that the said Coordinated Drawings shall be free
and independent of any fault and they are fit for the purpose.
44. Keeping the Site Tidy
The Contractor shall make every effort to keep the Site in a reasonably clean and
tidy condition for the duration of the Works. He shall, in addition, from time to time
and on the completion of any area of the Works or where directed by the S.O.,
remove rubbish, surplus materials, or any other construction debris from such
areas as may be attributable to his work under this Contract and generally
maintain the Site in a satisfactory condition, to the approval of the S.O..
The Contractor shall gather up and clear away all rubbish as it accumulates during
the progress of the Works at least twice each week at times approved by the S.O..
The services shall be continued until the completion of the Works. Garbage or
construction waste shall be disposed in a locally available landfill or hauled to
disposal sites approved by the S.O..
45. As-built Drawings
The Contractor shall provide and deliver to the S.O. approved As-built drawings in
the form of:
Four (4) sets of As-built drawings as actually constructed pertaining to

the Works including all services and facilities systems and all supporting
documents such as Operation and Maintenance Manual, Testing and
Commissioning Certificates.
Four (4) sets of Digital Copies in AutoCAD (.dwg) format to be stored in

compact discs or removable storage.
Four (4) sets of Digital Copies in Acrobat (.pdf) format to be stored in

compact discs or removable storage.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
The As-built drawings supplied shall be comprehensive and to the

satisfaction of the S.O. as to allow for a complete understanding of the
Works as they were actually built incorporating all Works arising from
variations, expenditure of Provisional Sums and Prime Cost Sums.
46. Total Asset Management
Introduction
This is the requirement for the application of Total Asset Management

(TAM) principles and best practices to fulfill Dasar Pengurusan Aset
Kerajaan (DPAK) for all assets including building, road and other
infrastructure.
Total Asset Management practices cover the asset whole life-cycle as

outlined in the Manual Pengurusan Aset Menyeluruh Kerajaan (MPAM),
namely the following phases:
Asset Planning
Asset Creation
Asset Utilization
Asset Disposal
General Requirement
The overall planning of the project shall incorporate all the required
buildings and facilities specified in the project brief and shall reflect the
operational policies of the project.
The contractor shall have a team of experienced and adequate

knowledge in operation and maintenance to ensure.
Quality of design and construction
Excellent supervision
Compliance to specification and method statement
Excellent cost control and construction period management
The contractor shall execute the government interest in continuous

improvement agenda and applying best practices in the implementation
of government programmes and projects.
Asset creation Phase
The highest performance deliverables shall be considered in order to

fulfil government services delivery.
Asset creation shall be in compliance to contract requirements, existing

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
laws and regulations.
The design shall incorporate design for maintainability to avoid loss to

the government and affect productivity due to the following:
High operation and maintenance cost
Longer waiting time for repair works
High downtime of system/components
Risk of accident/injury during maintenance and repair works
Planning, design and construction of the building shall consider the

following, but not limited to:
Catering for cultural diversity of the building users
Effective space planning for usage and maintenance
Ease of maintenance including accessibility for maintenance

purpose.
Security and safety
Comfort and ergonomics
Good environmental qualities
Sustainable building, energy efficient and fulfill water tightness

condition
Maintainability, serviceability and accessibility
Operational efficiency of completed facility
Life Cycle Cost (Total Cost of Ownership)
Functionality
Space for maintenance team and works shall be provided (e.g. Utilities
Room, Janitor Room)
Identification, Labelling and Registration of Asset
Identification and labelling (No. Daftar Premis Aset (DPA, Blok, Aras & Ruang)
asset informations shall be as per of latest Garis Panduan Pengumpulan Data &
Pelabelan Aset Tak Alih (PeDATA): Aset Bangunan and Sistem Kod Aset Tak Alih
(SKATA) in construction drawings.
Project Construction Stage
All material, equipment and spare parts selected by the contractor shall be of high
good quality (as per specification), sustainable, durable, safe, economical and
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
easy to maintain and easily available as approved by S.O./P.D.
Asset Registration and Labelling Works
The contractor shall collect and fill up asset information’s as per

requirement of Garis Panduan Pengumpulan Data & Pelabelan Aset Tak
Alih (PeDATA): Aset Bangunan (latest version PeDATA). All related form
& template shall be done gradually and submitted to the S.O./P.D. for
approval.
The contractor shall ensure that all coding and labelling of government
assets including but not limited to No. DPA, Blok, Aras & Ruang shall be
done according to current government requirements.
Project Handover
The contractor shall provide all information required by the S.O./P.D for
the purpose of asset registration. The details are described in sub-
section 46.4. and 46.6..
The Contractor shall submit digital copy in the form of Microsoft Word/
MS Excel files of the followings to the S.O./P.D:
Label identification layout plan drawings using 'SKATA room

naming convention' in hard cover binding.
Asset Information’s form (D.A.3 - D.A.6) & template (MS Excel)

format as approved by S.O./P.D.) and List of DAK Komponen
(as per Borang D.A 7 in Garis Panduan Pengumpulan Data &
Pelabelan Aset Tak Alih (PeDATA): Aset Bangunan
The contractor shall compile the asset informations as per requirement of latest
version Garis Panduan Pengumpulan Data & Pelabelan Aset Tak Alih (PeDATA):
Aset Bangunan for the approval of the S.O./P.D..
47. Site Investigation Works
All Site Investigation Works Carried Out Shall Comply to Standard Specification
For Road Works Section 17: Site Investigation JKR/SPJ/2013-S17 or The Latest
Edition Published By JKR.
48. Clearing, Cleaning and Making Good on Completion
The Contractor shall ensure the existing roadside drains bounding the Site are
clear of any construction debris, soil, et cetera, at all times before handing over of
the Works to the S.O. upon completion.
Upon completion of the Works, the Contractor shall remove and clear away from
Site all temporary buildings, temporary works, temporary installation and
equipment, and ensure the Site is in a clean and tidy condition.
Before handing over of the Works, the Contractor shall scrub all floors, pavings,
staircases et cetera and clean out all gutters, gulleys, manholes, sumps and
drains. The Contractor shall also clean all glass panes and leave every part of the
completed Works included in this Contract in a clean, sound and tidy condition to
the approval of the S.O..
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
APPENDIX A/1
LEGISLATION AND REGULATIONS
1. BS 5228: Code of Practice for Noise control on Construction and Demolition Site
2. Construction Industry Development Board Act, 1994
3. Electricity Regulations, 1994
4. Electricity Supply Act, 1990
5. Environmental Quality Act (EQA), 1974
6. Environmental Quality (Prescribed Activities) (Environmental Impact Assessment) Order 2015
7. Environmental Quality (Clean Air) Regulation 2014
8. Environmental Quality (Scheduled Waste) Regulation 2005
9. Environmental Quality (Industrial Effluents) Regulation 2009
10. Environmental Quality (Sewage) Regulation 2009
11. Explosives Act, 1957
12. Factory and Machinery Act (FMA), 1967 Rev 2006 and Regulations under the Act.
13. Federal Territory (Planning) Act 1982 (Act 267)
14. Fire Services Act, 1988
15. Forestry Act 1984 (Act 313)
16. Guidelines for Hazard Identification, Risk Assessment and Risk Control, 2008, DOSH
17. Guidelines for Public Safety and Health at Construction Sites, 2007, DOSH
18. Guidelines for the Prevention of Falls at Workplaces, 2007, DOSH
19. Guidelines on Occupational Safety And Health In Tunnel Construction, 1998, DOSH
20. Guidelines on Occupational Vibration, 2003, DOSH
21. Industry Code of Practice for Safe Working in A Confined Space, 2010, DOSH
22. Irrigation Areas Act, 1953
23. Land Conservation Act 1960 (Act 385)
24. Local Government Act, 1976
25. MS 2318: Code of Practice for Demolition of Buildings, 2010
26. National Land Code (Act 56 of 1965)
27. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), 1994 and Regulations under the Act.
28. Protection of Wildlife Act, 1972 (Act 76)
29. Solid Waste and Public Cleansing Management Act 2007 (Act 672)
30. Standard ISO 45001: Occupational Safety and Health Management System
31. Standard ISO 14001: Environmental Management System
32. Street, Drainage and Building Act, 1974
33. Street, Drainage and Building Act, 1974: Act 133 and Amendment, 1978
34. The Planning Guidelines for Environmental Noise Limits and Control (DOE, 2004)
35. The Planning Guidelines for Vibration Limits and Control in Environment (DOE, 2004)
36. The Radiation Protection (Basic Safety Standards) Regulations 1987
37. Town and Country Planning Act 1976, (Act 172)
38. Uniform Building By-Law (UBBL), 1984
39. Workers Minimum Amenities Act 1990 (Act 446)

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
APPENDIX A/2
LIST OF S.O.’S FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
APPENDIX A/3
LIST OF S.O.’S TRANSPORT SERVICES

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
APPENDIX A/4
LIST OF LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall provide and maintain the following testing laboratory equipment, those
which are deemed necessary only for the project, and shall become the property of the
Contractor at the end of the Contract: -
Test Equipment
1. Mixing Pan (500mm x 500mm)
2. Slump Cone (100mm x 200mm x 300mm)
1. Slump Test
3. Steel Tamping Rod (600mm x 16mm)
4. Measuring Tape
1. Steel Mold Cube (150mm (H) x 150mm (W) x 150mm (L))
2. Steel Mold Cylinder (150mm (D) x 300mm (H))
2. Compressive Strength Test
3. Scoop
(Fresh Concrete)
4. Steel Tamping Rod
5. Compression Test Machine
1. Coring Machine
3. Compressive Strength Test
2. Core Bit
(Cores Sample)
3. Compression Test Machine
4. Concrete Cover Test 1. Electromagnetic Covermeter
1. Vacuum Saturation Apparatus

2. Applied Voltage Cell
5. Rapid Chloride
3. Voltage Application and Data Readout Apparatus
Penetrability Test
4. Corecase
5. Diamond Saw
1. Rebound Hammer Apparatus
6. Rebound Hammer Test
2. Steel Brush
1. Voltmeter
7. Ultrasonic Pulse Velocity
2. Calibrator Block
Test
3. Transmitter and Receiver Transducer
1. Driver Unit (Powder Actuated Device)
8. Penetration Resistance
2. Probe
Test
3. Measuring Unit
1. Phenolphthalein
2. Methylated spirit
9. Carbonation Test 3. Bottle spray
4. Distilled water
5. Beakers
1. Balance weighing
2. Drying oven
10. Water Absorption Test
3. Water tank
4. Desiccator
1. Balance weighing
2. Drying oven
11. Sorption Test 3. Steel Tray
4. Caliper
5. Desiccator

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
Test Equipment Quantity
a) Soil Testing 1. Moisture content tins – 76mm x 25mm with lids

25
Equipment
2. Electric balance of 1kg capacity, accurate to 0.01g

with a tare correction not 1
less than 100g
3. Electric forced draught oven, capacity of 0.08 cu.m 1
4. Desiccator containing anhydrous silic gel 1
5. Liquid limit penetrometer set with all accessories

and digital penetration measurement gauge 0.01 1
mm precision
6. Glass plate – 500mm x 500mm x 10 mm 2
7. Flexible spatula of about 160 mm long 2
8. Evaporating dish of about 150 mm diameter 2
9. Stopwatch readable to 1s 1
10. Linear shrinkage moulds 140mm x 12.5mm radius 5
11. 203mm diameter B.S. sieves – 75mm, 63mm,

50mm, 37.5mm, 28mm, 25mm, 20mm, 14mm,
12.5mm, 9.5mm, 6.3mm, 5mm, 4.75mm, 3.35mm, 1 of each
2.36mm, 2mm, 1.18mm,600µm, 425µm, 300µm,
212µm, 150µm, 75µm, 63µm, lid and pan together
with vibrating machine
12. 203mm diameter B.S. sieves - 75µm, 425µm 1 of each
13. Sample splitter – 50mm, 12mm 2 of each
14. Balance of 10kg capacity, accurate to 1kg 1
15. Modified compaction proctor set with rammer 4.5kg 1

and moulds as specified in MS 1056
16. Modified compaction mould sample extruder as 1

specified in MS 1056

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
Test Equipment Quantity
17. Steel scoop 1
18. Measuring flask – 1000c.c 1
19. Vernier calliper – 150mm 1
20. Steel rule – 300mm 1
21. Compression machine suitable for laboratory and

field C.B.R.s with all fittings necessary for field and 1
laboratory operation as specified in MS 1056
22. C.B.R. moulds fitted with collars and base plates for
compaction and soaking and tripods for small
measurement fitted with dial gauges having 10
0.01mmdivisions and 25mm travel as specified
in MS 1056
23. Annular surcharge disc of 2.26kg weight 10
24. Complete field density kit, sand replacement

typesuitable for volume measurement of 0.005 cu.m 2
to an accuracy of not less than 0.0001 cu.m as
specified MS 1056
25. Crowbar, pick and spade 1 of each
26. Drying pans – 406mm x 406mm x 76mm 1
27. Mackintosh / JKR Probe 1
28. Malaysian Standard MS 1056 – Soils for Civil 1

Engineering Purposes – Test Method, latest edition
29. Malaysian Standard MS 2038 – Site Investigations 1

– Code of Practise

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
APPENDIX A/5
TABLE A2 : ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY STANDARDS TO BE COMPLIED WITH BY THE

CONTRACTOR
National Water
Environment Quality
Quality
JKR Minimum (Sewage) Regulations,
Standards
Aspects Parameter Requirement for 2009
(NWQS)
Non-EIA Projects
Standard Standard Class Class
A B IIA IIB
Minimum
earthwork Phase
construction  6
Soil Soil loss berms/benches for
slopes ( 6m per
berm) Reuse
topsoil
Turbidity ≤ 200 NTU - - ≤ 50 NTU
Suspended ≤ 100
≤ 100 mg/l ≤ 50 mg/l ≤ 50 mg/l
Solid mg/l
Biochemical
Oxygen
≤ 50 mg/l ≤ 20 mg/l ≤ 50 mg/l ≤ 3 mg/l
Demand 5 @
20°C (BOD)5
Chemical
Oxygen ≤ 200
≤ 100 mg/l ≤ 120 mg/l ≤ 25 mg/l
Demand mg/l
(COD)
Water 1,2 pH 5.5 – 9 6–9 5.5 – 9 6-9
≤400
≤100
≤ 400 counts / counts
E-Coli - - counts/
100 ml / 100
100ml
ml
Dissolved
≥ 4 mg/l - - 5-7 mg/l
Oxygen(DO)
Oil and
≤ 10 mg/l ≤ 5 mg/l ≤ 10mg/l ≤ 40 µg /l, N
Grease
Ammoniacal
Nitrogen - ≤ 10 mg/l ≤ 20mg/l ≤ 0.3 mg /l
(river)
Silt trap Turbidity ≤ 250 NTU
and
sediment Total
basin Suspended ≤ 50 mg/l
discharge Solid
Particulate Matter (PM10) (24hr) ≤120 µg/m3/day

Air3
Particulate Matter (PM2.5) (24hr) ≤50 µg/m3/day

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
Receiving Land Use (residential)

Day time (7.00 am – 7.00 pm )
L90 ≤ 60 dBA; L10 ≤75 dBA; Lmax ≤ 90 dBA;
Evening (7.00 pm – 10.00 pm)
Equivalent Noise Level (Leq), L10,
Noise4 L90 ≤55 dBA; L10 ≤70 dBA; Lmax ≤ 85 dBA;
L90
Night time (10.00 pm – 7.00 am)
Noise Sensitive Areas : LAeq ≤40 dBA
Suburban Areas : LAeq ≤ 45 dBA
Urban Areas : LAeq ≤ 50 dBA
Not more than 3 mm/s at receiver location or
Vertical Vibration Peak Velocity
Vibration5 across real property boundary.
(mm/s)
Reference:
1) 2nd Schedule (Regulation 7), Environmental Quality (Sewage) Regulations 2009, Environmental Quality Act 1974.
(i) Standard A: For location with downstream water intake
(ii) Standard B: For location with no downstream water intake
2) National Water Quality Standards for Malaysia
(i) Class IIA: Water Supply II – conventional treatment required
a. Fishery II – sensitive aquatic species
(ii) Class IIB: Recreational use with body contact
3) Recommended Malaysian Guidelines on Ambient Air Quality
4) Schedule 1 & Schedule 6, Planning Guidelines for Environmental Noise Limits & Control, (DOE, 2004)
5) Planning Guidelines for Vibration Limits and Control of the Environment (DOE, 2004)
Note: N - No visible floatable materials or debris or no objectionable odour, or no objectionable taste
For EIA Projects, all requirements should comply with Conditions of Approval (CoA) stipulated by DOE or other
relevant authorities.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION B: EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORKS PAGE
1. General 8/1
2. Soil Investigation Report 8/1
3. Site Clearing, Grubbing and Stripping Topsoil 8/1
4. Timber 8/2
5. Demolition of Existing Structures 8/3
6. Relocation of Existing Utilities and Services 8/3
7. Excavation Works 8/3
8. Filling Works 8/9
9. Protection and Maintenance for Erosion Control 8/14

eJ
No. Dokumen JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran 01
SECTION B: EXCAVATION AND
No.Pindaan 00
EARTHWORKS
Tarikh 02 Januari 2020
JKR MALAYSIA Muka Surat 8/1
1. General
1.1. This work shall consist of all the required excavation and earthworks within the limits
of the Works. It shall include the removal and proper utilization and hauling, or
disposal of all excavated materials, and constructing, shaping and finishing of all
earthworks over the entire extent of the Works, in conformity with the Drawings and
these Specifications.
1.2. The excavation and earthworks shall be executed in such a manner and order as
approved by the S.O .. The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with by-
laws and regulations relating to earthworks.
1.3. Excavation in rock and/or hard material shall respectively be measured and paid for
as extra over to excavation and earthworks in accordance with the Provisional B.Q ..
The Contractor shall give reasonable notice to the S.O. to examine, classify the
excavation and to take measurement prior to breaking up.
1.4. For contract based on Specifications and Drawings, unless otherwise provided in
the Contract, for the purpose of pricing the excavation and earthworks, the whole
excavation shall be assumed to be without rock and/or hard material as defined
hereunder.
1.5. For contract based on Quantities, the pricing shall be in accordance with the B.Q.
and deem to include all validation and quality control testing required by this
specification.
1.6. Computation of volume of rock excavation for payment shall be based on nett
volume excavated as shown on the Drawings.
1. 7. The Contractor shall comply with all statutory requirements and regulations such as
payment of royalties and environmental protection for removal of unsuitable material
and borrow materials.
2. Soil Investigation Report
A soil investigation report shall be made available (if any) at the S.O.'s office for the
Contractor information. The Contractor shall study the soil investigation report in detail and
make his own interpretation of the information provided and make due allowance for the
effect of site conditions on his construction operations. No responsibility is assumed by the
S.O. for any opinion given in the soil investigation report.
3. Site Clearing, Grubbing and Stripping Topsoil
This work shall consist of clearing, grubbing and stripping topsoil in the areas within the
limits of Works designated hereunder and/or shown on the Drawings and/or directed by
the S.O., and of clearing only in other areas designated hereunder and/or shown on the
Drawings and/or directed by the S.O., all as specified herein and as required by the S.O ..
The work shall also include the demolition and disposal of structures in the said areas,
except where otherwise provided for in the Contract, as specified herein and as required
by the S.O ..
3.1. Site clearing
3.1 .1. Clearing shall consist of cutting and/or taking down, removal and disposal
of everything above ground level, including objects such as walls, fences,
drains and other obstructions, except such trees, vegetation, structures or
parts of structures and other things which are designated in the Contract

~
No. Keluaran 01
No.Pindaan 00
EARTHWORKS
JKR MALAYSIA Muka Surat B/2
to remain, to be protect as satisfied under SECTION R: LANDSCAPING

AND TURFING. The material to be cleared shall include but not
necessarily be limited to trees, stumps (parts above ground), logs,
brushwood, undergrowth, long grasses, crops, loose vegetable matter and
structures (except those structures whose removal or clearance is
otherwise provided for in the Contract). Clearing shall also include
levelling of obsolete dikes, terraces, ditches, et cetera, unless otherwise
directed by the S.O ..
3.1 .2. All holes and cavities in the ground surface after clearing, grubbing and
stripping topsoil shall be filled with materials similar to the adjacent ground,
and such fill shall be compacted to a dry density as specified by sub-
section 8.4.3., with the agreement of the S.O .. This work shall be
considered incidental to the work of clearing, grubbing and striping topsoil,
and shall not be measured for payment.
3.2. Grubbing
Grubbing shall consist of removal and disposal of surface vegetation, bases of

stumps, roots, underground parts of structures, and other obstructions to a depth of
at least 500mm below ground level, with the agreement of the S.O ..
3.3. Stripping topsoil
3.3.1. Stripping topsoil shall consist of the removal of topsoil to an average depth
of at least 100mm below ground level, and its stockpiling for use in the
Works, and/or its disposal, as directed by the S.O ..
3.3.2. Topsoil to be stockpiled for the Works shall be sufficiently fertile to promote
and support the growth of vegetation, and shall be taken from such areas
where clearing, grubbing and stripping topsoil is required as approved or
directed by the S.O .. Before stockpiling, topsoil shall be separated from
objectionable materials such as combustible material including all timber
(except timber to be salvaged or used), all brushwood, stumps, roots,
vegetation from clearing, grubbing and stripping topsoil (including the
demolition of structures), with the agreement of the S.O .. The Contractor
shall arrange for stockpile sites either within or outside the site, at his own
expense, and with the agreement of the S.O. or as required by the relevant
laws and regulations.
3.4. Disposal
All materials resulting from site clearing, grubbing and stripping topsoil shall be
removed and disposed of as approved by the S.O. in accordance with
Environmental Quality Act 1974 (Act 127) and Solid Waste and Public Cleansing
Management Act 2007 (Act 672).
4. Timber
4.1. The ownership of timber is vested in the Government. Saleable timber shall be
trimmed and stacked in accordance with the requirements of the appropriate
Government agency, in accessible places within the site as approved or directed by
the S.O ..
4.2. The Contractor shall have the right to use unsaleable timber (or saleable timber
when permission is granted in writing by the appropriate Government agency or

eJ
No. Keluaran 01
No.Pindaan 00
EARTHWORKS
authority) for his own purposes in connection with the Contract, always provided
that he shall comply with the requirements of the S.O ..
5. Demolition of Existing Structures
5.1. Major structures are those which cannot practicably be cleared by bulldozer and/or
hydraulic excavator, whose demolition requires pneumatic tools, explosives and/or
other specialized equipment. A brief description of each major structure (if any) and
depth to which extent it shall be demolished is given in the B.Q ..
5.2. All fences, buildings, structures, and encumbrances of any character within the
limits of the limits of the Works, except those to be removed by others or designated
to remain, shall be demolished and removed by the Contractor.
5.3. Materials designated in the Contract or directed by the S.O. to be salvaged, shall
be carefully removed and stored, and shall be the property of the Government.
6. Relocation of Existing Utilities and Services
6.1. The Contractor's attention is specially drawn to his responsibilities under the Clause
headed 'Damage to Property' of the Condition of Contract.
6.2. Before commencing on any excavation, the Contractor or his representative shall
accompany the S.O. on a site inspection to identify the presence of underground
cables, water or other service pipes at or in the vicinity of such excavation.
Thereafter, the Contractor shall carry out the excavation work in a manner and
sequence as approved by the S.O ..
6.3. If during excavation, the Contractor's workmen uncover any cables, water or other
service pipes, work shall be stopped immediately and shall not be again started until
the matter has been reported to the S.O. who will notify the appropriate local
authority, and subsequently issue whatever directions he deemed appropriate.
7. Excavation Works
7.1. General Requirements
7.1.1. The work shall include the excavation of all types of material, backfilling,
compaction, forming embankments and slopes, etcetera, as is necessary
for the completion of the works up to the formation levels, in accordance
with the lines, grades, dimensions, shapes and typical cross-sections
shown on the Drawings and to the approval of the S.O ..
7.1.2. The Contractor shall provide where necessary temporary water courses,
ditches, drains, pumping or other means of maintaining the earthworks
free from water. Such provision shall include carrying out the work of
forming the cuttings and embankments in such a manner that their
surfaces have at all times a sufficient gradient to enable them to shed
water and prevent water ponding.
7.1 .3. In pumping water out from excavation and in the lowering of water table
the Contractor shall pay due regard to the stability and settlement of all
structures.

~
No. Keluaran 01
No.Pindaan 00
EARTHWORKS
7.1.4. Adequate means for trapping silt shall be provided on all temporary
drainage systems. Similar arrangements shall be made for all earthworks
including excavation whether for pile trenches, foundations or cuttings.
7.1.5. Should the surface of completed areas be damaged by erosion or by any

other causes, the Contractor shall at his own cost make good such areas
to the approval of the S.O ..
7.1.6. The Contractor shall exercise care in preventing wastage of suitable

material needed for embankment or fill construction.
7.2. Definitions
7.2.1. Formation level
Formation level means the final earthwork level after cutting or filling.
7.2.2. Common excavation
Common excavation shall mean excavation in any materials which are not
rock or hard materials as defined in sub-section 7.2.5. and sub-section
7.2.6 ..
7.2.3. Unsuitable materials
7.2.3.1. Unsuitable materials shall include:
(i) Running silt, peat, logs, stumps, roots, grass and other
vegetable matter, perishable or toxic material, slurry or
mud; or
(ii) Organic clay and organic silt; or
(iii) Any material
a) Which is susceptible to spontaneous combustion; or
b) Which is clay having a liquid limit exceeding 80%

and/or a plasticity index exceeding 55%; or
c) Which has a loss of weight greater than 2.5% on

ignition.
7.2.3.2. Materials that are soft or unstable merely because they are too
wet or too dry for effective compaction shall not be classified as
unsuitable, unless otherwise classified by the S.O ..
7.2.4. Suitable materials
7.2.4.1. Suitable materials shall mean those materials other than the
unsuitable materials defined in sub-section 7.2.3 ..
7.2.4.2. General fill shall generally comprise of suitable materials made

up of either cohesive soil or cohesion less soil or mixture of both.
The classification of cohesive and cohesion less soil shall be
based on Soil Classification System set out in the latest MS
1056: Method of Test for Soil for Civil Engineering Purpose.

eJ
No. Keluaran 01
No.Pindaan 00
EARTHWORKS
7.2.4.3. Special fill shall comprise of material, which would otherwise be

classified as general fill, but which contains durable well-graded
natural sand and gravel or crushed rock, other than argillaceous
rock (e.g. mudstone, shale), or durable clean crushed demolition
rubble of similar particle size and free from any contaminants.
7.2.5. Hard Mass
7.2.5.1. This shall mean any cemented sediments, rock mass and highly
fractured rock mass which can be excavated using an excavator
with minimum weight of 41.4 tonnes and nett horsepower rating
of 321 brake horsepower with production rate not exceeding
50m 3/hour. All machineries shall be in good condition and
operated by skilled personnel approved by S.O.
7.2.5.2. Hard mass shall exclude individual masses less than 0.5m 3 .
7.2.6. Rock mass
7.2.6.1. Rock mass shall mean masses found in ledges or masses which
can be excavated using the following machinery with production
rate not exceeding 20m 3/hour:
(i) Track-type tractor (dozer)
Machinery with minimum weight of 37 tonnes and nett

horsepower rating of 303 brake horsepower or more. The
tractor unit is to be in good condition and operated by
skilled personnel in the use of ripping equipment; and
(ii) Ripping unit
The ripper to be attached to the above-mentioned tractor

shall have a minimum penetration force of 120kN. The
ripper shall have a single shank in good working condition
with sharpened cutting point.
7.2.6.2. Boulders or detached pieces shall only be regarded as rock if

they individually exceed 0.5m 3 . For boulders or detached pieces
individually measuring less than 0.5m3, it shall be considered as
common excavation. For determination of the volume of
individual boulder, diameters of the boulder in three (3)
orthogonal directions shall be taken. The average of the three
(3) diameters shall be used to calculate the volume of boulder.
Records of measurements and photographs shall be taken and
kept supporting the calculation of the volume of boulder.
7.2.7. Confirmation of Common Excavation/Hard Mass or Rock Mass

Excavation
7.2.7 .1. Confirmation of common excavation/hard mass excavation or

rock mass excavation shall be carried out with direct method and
indirect method as specified below. Both criteria shall be fulfilled
in order for the material to be classified as hard mass or rock
mass. Confirmation test shall be carried out again when in S.O.'s
opinion the materials are different from those excavated from the
trial excavation before.

eJ
No. Keluaran 01
No.Pindaan 00
EARTHWORKS
(i) Direct Method
Trial excavation shall be carried out using the machineries

as specified in sub-sections 7.2.5. and 7.2.6. to confirm
the materials excavated is categorized under common
excavation/ hard mass excavation based on its hourly
production rate. The trial excavation shall be carried out
on a flat platform as define in sub-section 8.3. in order to
develop the rated horsepower at maximum efficiency.
In the event where the Contractor unable to provide the

machineries as stated in sub-sections 7.2.5. and 7.2.6.,
the Contractor shall propose machineries to be used at
site for the confirmation purpose subjected to approval by
the S.O.. The equivalent production rate of the
machineries are shown in Table B1 & B2 for evaluation
purposes.
The ripper unit shall be used in excavation of hard mass

and rock mass only and shall not be used in common
excavation.
(ii) Indirect Method
Point load test shall be carried out on excavated material

for this purpose. Minimum ten (10) samples from the
excavated material resulted from trial excavation as in
direct method (i) above shall be tested and the results
interpretation are shown in Table B3. Sample to be tested
shall have size not less than 30mm and not more than
85mm with the preferred dimension about 50mm
according to ASTM D5731.
The provision of point load test equipment at site for the

above-mentioned testing shall be at Contractor's own cost
and time. The point load test equipment shall be
calibrated and a valid calibration certificate shall made
available to the S.O. upon requested.
7.3. Dimensional Tolerances
Slopes in cutting shall be trimmed mechanically to neat and even surfaces which
shall have gradients not steeper than that shown on the Drawings. Widths of
excavations shall not exceed the dimensions shown on the Drawings by more than
300mm with encumbrance free to complete the Work, unless otherwise approved
by the S.O ..
7.4. Separation and Stockpiling of Suitable Material
Where excavation reveals a combination of suitable and unsuitable materials, the

Contractor shall, wherever the S.O. considers it practicable, carry out the excavation
in such a manner that the suitable materials are excavated separately for use in the
Works without contamination by the unsuitable materials.

eJ
No. Keluaran 01
No.Pindaan 00
EARTHWORKS
7.5. Removal of Excavated Material from Site
7.5.1. Trial pit shall be carried out prior to removal of material to be excavated to
confirm water table and depth of excavation.
7.5.2. No excavated material shall be removed from the Site except on the
direction or with the approval of the S.O .. Should the Contractor be
permitted to remove suitable materials from the Site to suit his operational
procedure, then he shall make good any consequent deficit of fill material
arising there from, at his own expense. Unless designated dump sites
have been shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall dispose of surplus
suitable material at his own dump areas outside the Site as approved by
the S.O ..
7.6. Removal of Unsuitable Material
7.6.1. Trial pit/ hand auger/JKR Probe shall be carried out prior to removal of
material to be excavated to confirm water table and depth of excavation.
7.6.2. Unsuitable material shall be excavated to such depth and over such area
as shown on the Drawings and/or directed by the S.O. and be transported
and disposed of in an approved manner. Unless approval of the S.O. to
dump and spread the unsuitable material within the Site is obtained, the
Contractor shall be responsible for providing his own dump site for such
unsuitable material. Voids created due to removal of unsuitable material
shall be backfilled with suitable material compacted to a dry density as
specified in sub-section 8.4.3. or that specified for the respective part
earthworks or as directed by the S.O ..
7.7. Replacement of Excavated Material under Standing Water
Where it is decided by the S.O. that replacement of excavated material shall be

done under standing water, voids created due to removal of excavated material shall
be backfilled with hard clean crushed rock, natural gravel or sand having grading
within the respective limits specified in Table B4.
7.8. Sides of Excavation
The Contractor shall ensure that at all times, the sides of the excavation are
maintained in a safe and stable condition and shall be responsible for the adequate
provision of all shoring and strutting including sheet piling required for this purpose.
All temporary works shall comply with the requirements of BS 5975 Code of Practice
for Temporary Works Procedures and The Permissible Stress Design of Falsework.
7.9. Widening Cuts
7.9.1. The S.O. may instruct the Contractor or the Contractor himself may elect
to obtain material for the Works by widening cuts. In the latter case, the
Contractor shall first request permission in writing from the S.O ..
7.9.2. Widening of cuts shall not be permitted beyond the limits of the road
reserve.
7.9.3. Any additional costs and time incurred that resulted from widening cuts
shall be borne by the Contractor.

~
No. Keluaran 01
No.Pindaan 00
EARTHWORKS
7.10. Excavation of Rock
7.10.1. Rock excavation shall be carried out by methods appropriate to site

requirements as approved by the S.O ..
7.10.2. Where the excavation is too hard to be performed by digging, dozing,

scraping, ripping, splitting, breaking, jack picking or other such methods,
the Contractor may make a written request to the S.O. for permission to
blast. Such permission will be granted only if the S.O. is satisfied that all
reasonable measures have been tried to carry out the excavation by
methods other than blasting.
7.10.3. Where explosives are used, the Contractor shall provide a method
statement and shall comply fully with requirements of these Specifications,
or any direction, order, requirement or instruction given by the PDRM or
any other authority competent to do so under any written law. The
Contractor shall comply to the safety and hazard requirements as specify
in Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) and any misconduct and
the use of excessive explosive shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
7.10.4. All material from rock excavations shall be used as far as is practicable in
the Works.
7.10.5. Where the rock is of satisfactory quality, the Contractor may elect to crush
and screen it to produce aggregates required for concrete, road base, sub-
base, or other purposes with the prior approval of the S.O .. Excavated
rock needed for earthwork construction which the Contractor elects so to
use for producing aggregate materials shall be replaced at the
Contractor's own expense by borrow materials of satisfactory quality from
alternative locations approved by the S.O ..
7.10.6. Otherwise, excavated rock shall be used in the construction of

embankment and fill, to the fullest practical extent, in either of the two (2)
following ways:
7.10.6.1. Excavated rock shall be broken down to a maximum particle size

of 300mm and used as rock fill as described in sub-section 8.6 ..
7.10.6.2. Excavated rock shall be broken down to a maximum particle size

of 150mm, blended with suitable earth fill material in a proportion
not exceeding 1 rock to 1 earth, and used as common fill.
7.10.7. The Contractor may only waste excavated rock with the approval of the
S.O .. Excavated rock needed for earthwork construction which the
Contractor elects to waste shall be replaced at the Contractor's own
expense by borrow materials of satisfactory quality from alternative
locations approved by the S.O ..
7.11. Storage and Handling of Explosives
The storage and handling of explosive shall be adhered to all Authorities'

requirement. The prevention of any unauthorised issue or improper use of any
explosive brought on the Works shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and only
experienced and qualified personnel shall be employed to handle explosives for the
purpose of the Works.

eJ
No. Keluaran 01
No.Pindaan 00
EARTHWORKS
7.12. Blasting
7.12.1. Explosives shall be used in the quantities and manner recommended by

the manufacturers and blasting specialist. Blasting shall be restricted to
such periods as the S.O. may prescribe and to comply with all authority's
requirement. If, in the opinion of the S.O., blasting would be dangerous to
persons or properties or to any finished work, or is being carried on in a
reckless manner, he may prohibit it, and order the rock to be excavated
by other means. Such authorisation shall not in any way relieve the
Contractor of his liabilities under the Conditions of Contract.
7.12.2. All necessary precautions shall be taken to avoid overbreak As the

excavation approaches its final lines face, blasting with pre-splitting
technique shall be carried out to reduce blast damage and create
reasonably even finished surface.
7.13. Safety Measures
7.13 .1. When blasting is carried out close to properties or roads, safety rules
complying to all authorities' requirements shall be strictly adhered to.
Where necessary or as directed by the S.O., heavy mesh blasting mats or
any other controlled materials shall be used to ensure that no damage is
caused to persons or properties on or off Site. Special care shall be taken
on highly weathered rock mass and sensitive ground. Plaster shooting will
not be permitted within 400m of any building or structure. The Contractor
shall keep records of the nearby existing properties and provide sufficient
monitoring instrumentation before any blasting commence. Any damage
caused by blasting shall be borne by the Contractor.
7.13 .2. If traffic on any road or railway has to be interrupted for blasting
operations, the Contractor shall obtain approval of his schedule for such
interruption from the appropriate authorities and shall prove to the S.O.
that he has obtained it, prior to the interruption.
7.13 .3. When blasting is carried out with close proximity to sensitive structures
and environmental sensitive areas, thresholds and criteria of vibration, air
blast, dust, fly rock and other blasting impact shall be established for
monitoring purpose.
7.14. Insecure Material
The cut slopes shall be cleared of all rock fragments which move when pried with a
crowbar. The Contractor shall excavate any insecure material to an approved depth
and build up the resulting spaces with Grade 1SP/20 concrete or masonry using
rock similar to the adjoining natural rock so as to ensure a solid face.
8. Filling Works
8.1. Material
8.1.1. Fill materials to form formation level shall be of suitable material obtained
from excavation in cuttings. Where the quantity of such materials is
inadequate, the Contractor shall obtain suitable materials from the
designated borrow pits or from his own borrow pits which have been
approved by the S.O ..

~
No. Keluaran 01
No.Pindaan 00
EARTHWORKS
8.1.2. The fill material shall be free from roots, grass, other vegetable material,
clay lump or material of particles size larger than 150mm.
8.1.3. Unless otherwise directed by the S.O., the following tests shall be carried
out for every 1,500m3 of fill material to be placed at Site:
(i) Atterberg limits
(ii) Gradation analysis
(iii) M.S 1056 Compaction Test (4.5 kg rammer method)
8.1 .4. Sand shall not be used as fill materials at outer edges of the embankment.
8.2. Borrow Pits
8.2 .1. The Contractor shall be responsible for locating borrow pits. Designated
borrow pits shown on the Drawings only indicate to the Contractor
potential areas for borrow. Whether the Contractor obtains materials from
the designated or his own borrow pit, it shall be his responsibility to
ascertain the suitability of the pit with respect to the quantity and quality of
the materials, which shall be subjected to the approval of the S.O ..
8.2.2. The Contractor shall keep the borrow pits free from water ponding and the
excavation neat and tidy. The contractor shall make sure the sidewall of
the borrow pits is stable, protect the slope surface by turfing and shall carry
out other necessary erosion and environmental protection measures
following the agreed method statement or as instructed by the S.O ..
8.3. Placement of Fill Materials
8.3.1. All fill materials shall be deposited in layers and brought up at a uniform
rate so that all parts of the Site reach the designed level at the same time.
The loose depth for each layer of fill shall be determined from the trial
compaction. Each layer shall extend over the full width of the fill area and
shall be compacted in accordance with the requirements of sub-section
8.4.. Each compacted layer shall be maintained at all times with a
sufficiently even surface of longitudinal and cross slope in order to
maintain the stability and drain away the surface water.
8.3.2. Where embankment is to be constructed on ground with a cross slope

flatter than 1 (vertical) to 10 (horizontal) but steeper than 1 (vertical) to 30
(horizontal), the foundation material, except where this is rock, shall be
scarified to a depth of 100mm, blended with embankment fill material and
compacted as described in sub-section 8.4 ..
8.3.3. Where embankment is to be constructed against existing embankment or

on ground with a cross-slope steeper than 1 (vertical) to 10 (horizontal),
the foundation shall be excavated in all materials (including hard rock) to
form benches with horizontal and vertical faces from which construction of
the embankment shall proceed. The benches shall be contiguous beneath
the full width of the embankment and shall be of a suitable width to
accommodate construction equipment such as motor-graders, trucks,
rollers, et cetera. Scarifying of the horizontal and vertical faces of the
benches shall not normally be required, and the material excavated in
forming the benches may normally be used as fill in the embankment as

eJ
No. Keluaran 01
No.Pindaan 00
EARTHWORKS
8.4. Compaction
8.4.1. General
8.4.1.1. All materials used in embankments and as fill elsewhere shall

be compacted as soon as practicable after being placed and
spread. Compaction shall be undertaken to the requirements of
this section by plant approved by the S.O .. All compaction
requirements shall be controlled by means of field density
measurement.
8.4.1.2. For compaction of embankment slope, the Contractor may either

extend each compacted layer beyond the design slope surface
by at least 600mm then trim back to the required slope angle, or
he may employ an agreed tow type roller to compact the sloping
surface.
8.4.2. Compaction trials
8.4.2.1. The latest MS 1056 Compaction Test (4.5kg rammer method)

shall be used in determining the moisture versus density relation
of soil.
8.4.2.2. The Contractor shall submit to the S.O. for his agreement the
proposed method of compaction for each main type of material
to be used in the embankment. This shall include the type of
compaction plant for each type of material and the number of
passes in relation to the loose depth of material to achieve
desired compaction. The maximum loose thickness for fill shall
generally be limited to 400mm unless trial compaction shows
compliance with larger loose thickness and with the approval
from the S.O .. The Contractor shall carry out field compaction
trials, supplemented by any necessary laboratory investigations,
as required by the S.O.. This shall be done by using the
procedures proposed by the Contractor for earthworks and shall
demonstrate to the S.O. that all the specified requirements
regarding compaction can be achieved. Compaction trials with
the main types of material likely to be encountered shall be
completed before the works with the corresponding materials
will be allowed to commence. Each trial area shall be not smaller
than 8m x 15m.
8.4.2.3. For earthwork compaction of less than 100m3 , trial compaction

can be waived with approval from the S.O., but field density
testing as per sub-section 8.4.4. is remained necessary as and
when instructed by the S.O ..
8.4.3. Degree of compaction
The whole of the fill area shall be compacted in layers until no visible track
line and to not less than 90% (for cohesive material) or 95% (for cohesion
less material) of the maximum dry density (MOD) determined in the latest
MS 1056 Compaction Test (4.5kg-rammer method), unless otherwise as
shown on the Drawings.
8.4.4. Field density testing
Field density tests on each layer of compacted earth fill shall be carried
out using the sand replacement method in accordance with the latest MS

~
No. Keluaran 01
No.Pindaan 00
EARTHWORKS
1056 or by using other means of testing of comparable accuracy approved

by the S.O ..
8.4.5. Moisture control
8.4.5.1. Each layer of earth fill shall be processed as necessary to bring

its moisture content to a uniform level throughout the material,
suitable for compaction. The optimum moisture content (OMC)
as determined by the latest MS 1056 Compaction Test (4.5kg
rammer method) shall be used as a guide in determining the
proper range of moisture content, preferably on the wet side, at
which each soil type shall be compacted. Water shall be added
in fine spray for consistent moisture absorption in the fill, or the
material aerated and dried to adjust the soil to the proper range
of moisture content to obtain the required density. Dry sand or
cement or mixture of sand and cement can be added for the
same purpose upon approval by the S.O .. A satisfactory method
and sufficient equipment as approved by the S.O. shall be used
for the furnishing and handling of water.
8.4.5.2. If the natural water content of suitable material is too high for the
proper compaction to be carried out, the Contractor can either
bring down the moisture content by aeration or drying or
alternatively replace it with suitable materials of compactable
moisture range at his own cost.
8.4.6. Air voids
To reduce potential of collapse compression of unsaturated cohesive fill

due to wetting, the moisture content range at fill placement shall be
controlled to achieve a compacted fill with allowable air void content not
exceeding 5%.
8.5. Frequency of Control Tests
8.5.1. For fill/ imported material, control test shall include a series of test as per
Sub-section 8.1.3.
8.5.2. For compacted material, control test shall consist of one field density test
which evenly allocated to each compacted layer of the entire compacted
fill.
8.5.3. The frequency of control tests shall be in accordance with Table B5.
8.5.4. The control tests shall be evenly allocated to each compacted layer of the
entire compacted fill.
8.5.5. If certain test methods are used for the reasons of speed and economy,
calibration between such tests and the master test method as per latest
MS 1056 shall be carried out at the interval of every 100 tests subject to
the S.O. agreement. The calibration is material specific and shall be
performed for each material type. The non-master test method with
variation of more than ± 5% shall be rejected.
8.6. Rock Fill Embankment
8.6.1. Rock used in rock fill embankments shall be of maximum particle size of
300mm so that it can be deposited in horizontal layers, each not exceeding
500mm in compacted depth and extending over the full width of the
eJ
No. Keluaran 01
No.Pindaan 00
EARTHWORKS
embankment except for any specified external cover to slopes or new

formation level. The materials shall be spread and levelled by a crawler
tractor weighing not less than 15 tonnes. Each layer shall consist of
reasonably well graded rock and all large voids with averaging dimension
of exceeding 150mm shall be filled with broken fragments before the next
layer is placed. The top surface and side slopes of embankments so
formed shall be thoroughly blinded with approved fine graded material to
seal the surface.
8.6 .2. There shall be a transition layer between rock fill and earth fill or the top
300mm of subgrade of at least 300mm compacted thickness. This shall
consist of uniformly graded crushed rock between 6mm and 150mm as
8.6.3. Each layer of rock used as rock fill in embankments shall be systematically
compacted by at least 12 passes of a vibrating roller with a static load per
25mm width of roll of at least 45kg or a grid roller with load per 25mm
width of roll of at least 200kg or other approved plant.
8.7. Filling on Soft Ground
8.7.1. Foundation treatment
8.7 .1.1. Where soft ground under embankment is to be treated as shown

on the Drawings or as directed by the S.O., the foundation soil
shall be improved as specified in SECTION V: GROUND
IMPROVEMENT.
8.7 .1.2. The first layer of fill materials shall be deposited over the full
width of the embankment and berms in thicknesses not more
than 500mm or as approved by the S.O. to sufficiently support
earthwork machineries.
8.7 .1.3. If fill materials are required to be placed under standing water,
hard clean crushed rock, natural gravel or sand having grading
within the respective limits specified in Table B4 shall be used
to backfill the embankment not less than 300mm above the
standing water to receive compacted suitable fill thereafter.
8.7.2. Surcharge and staged construction
Where indicated in the Contract or directed by the S.O., the embankment

shall be built to different heights in stages with or without surcharge and
with allowance for consolidation time periods in between stages, all in
accordance with the Contract. Where surcharge is specified, the work
shall be carried as specified in SECTION V: GROUND IMPROVEMENT
WORKS. The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of
surcharge material and the removal and disposal of excess material on
completion of consolidation or when directed by the S.O ..
8.7.3. Geotechnical instrumentations
8.7 .3.1. Geotechnical instruments shall be provided and installed by the

Contractor in the positions as shown on the Drawings or as
directed by the S.O. for the purpose of measuring intended
reading at specified location(s) during and after the construction
period. The details of geotechnical instruments shall be as
shown on the Drawings and the Contractor shall be responsible

~
No. Keluaran 01
No.Pindaan 00
EARTHWORKS
for supplying, installing and maintaining the functionality of the

geotechnical instruments as the work proceeds.
8.7 .3.2. Geotechnical instrumentation works shall also comply to

SECTION V: GROUND IMPROVEMENT WORKS.
8.7.4. Monitoring records
8.7.4.1. All monitoring works and records taken shall comply to

SECTION V: GROUND IMPROVEMENT WORKS.
8.7 .4.2. Joint recording of geotechnical instruments reading shall be

conducted as specified. The monitoring records shall be
submitted to the S.O. on an approved printed form to be supplied
by the Contractor. Softcopy of monitoring records shall be
submitted together with the hard copy records.
8.7.4.3. For the measurement of the volume that has settled below the
original level of the foundation of the embankment, the
measured settlement of each settlement gauge shall be used for
volume computation following the method shown on the
Drawings.
9. Protection and Maintenance for Erosion Control
9.1. The Contractor shall be fully responsible to repair/ remedy any slope erosion, slip
or tension cracks (if any and due to whatever causes) at his own cost if the
requirements are not fully complied with. The method and procedure of remedy/
stabilization plus necessary stability analysis shall be prepared and endorsed by
Professional Engineer with full design verification and justifications.
9.2. Where turfing is required for earthworks protection, it shall be planted immediately
after cutting or filling as specified under SECTION R: LANDSCAPING AND
TURFING.
9.3. Where hydroseeding is required for earthworks protection, it shall be carried out
immediately after cutting or filling as specified under SECTION W:
HYDROSEEDING.
9.3 .1. All grass shall be regularly watered until the vegetation is satisfactorily
established to the requirements of these Specifications. Any dead grass
shall be replaced at the Contractor's own expense.
9.4. Creepers
9.4 .1. Where creepers are introduced on gunited slopes, rocks or unsuitable
materials, species shall be of Malaysian origin such as ficus pumila,
centrusemo pubscens, or to the agreement of the S.O ..
9.4.2. The Contractor shall submit to the S.O. for his consideration and approval,
at least four (4) weeks in advance of the proposed work, full details of his
proposed method of planting the creepers. The information submitted
shall include, but not limited to, a full description of the following aspects
of the work:

eJ
No. Keluaran 01
No.Pindaan 00
EARTHWORKS
9.4.2.1. The preparation of the areas to be planted with creepers,

including the amount of topsoil if appropriate to be used and its
method of application;
9.4.2.2. The details and results of investigations to determine which

types of creepers are compatible with the soil in the areas to be
planted;
9.4 .2.3. The types of creepers to be used, and the function, root and
growth characteristics of each type;
9.4.2.4. The composition of fertilizer to be used at the time of planting

the creepers and its rate of application;
9.4 .2.5. The composition of fertilizer to be used after planting, the times
of application and the rate of application;
9.4 .2.6. The amounts of lime or other chemicals (if any) to be applied to
improve the soil before, during and/or after planting;
9.4.2.7. the cultivation and after care of the areas, including rates and
frequencies of watering, fertilizing and general maintenance for
at least one (1) year after planting;
9.4 .2.8. the time after planting required for establishing permanent,
dense growth of creepers, which will require minimal
maintenance;
9.4.2.9. Guarantees the success of the creepers planting work.
9.4.3. All creepers shall be regularly watered until the vegetation is satisfactorily
established to the requirements of these Specifications. Any dead
creepers shall be replaced at the Contractor's own expense.
9.5. Temporary Slope Protection
9.5.1. Should the Contractor be unable to turf/hydroseed the exposed slopes

within one (1) weeks after cutting/filling works temporary protection
measures such as covering with tarpaulin sheet or artificial cover to control
erosion shall be taken.

~
No. Keluaran 01
No.Pindaan 00
EARTHWORKS
Table B1. Equivalent Production Rate of Hard Mass Based On Types of Excavators
Excavator Weight Engine Factor compared

Series (tonnes) Horsepower (HP) with 41.4 tonnes
(Excavator Series
400)
150 15.4 99 0.33
200 21.2 170 0.58
250 27 188 0.63
300 31 242 0.67
350 36 271 0.75
400 41.4 321 1.0
Table B2. Equivalent Production Rate of Rock Mass Based On types of Track-Types Tractors
With Ripping Equipment (bulldozer ripper)
Dozer Flywheel Operating Factor Equivalent

power (kW) weight compared with Production
(tonne) 37 tonnes Rate for Rock
(Bulldozer Mass (m 3/hr)
Ripper)
D6,D7 200-240 20-25 0.54 11.0
D8 303 37 1.0 20.0
D9 405 48 1.3 26.0
Note: If the contractor elects to use machinery larger than as specified above, it should be considered equivalent to
the specified capacity for the purpose of approval.
Table B3. Category Of Excavation Based On Corrected Point Load Test Index ls(so)
Corrected point load test index lscso1 =!::

Type of excavation
2MPa
Common Excavation Not applicable

(no solid sample can be tested)
Hard Mass < 80% of the samples
Rock Mass .:: 80% of the samples

~
No. Keluaran 01
No.Pindaan 00
EARTHWORKS
Table B4. Grading Limits of Materials for Replacement of Excavated Material
B.S. Sieve Size % Passing by Weight

Crushed Rock or Gravel
63.0 mm 100
37.5 mm 85-100
20.0 mm 0-20
10.0 mm 0-5
Sand
10.0 mm 100
5.0mm 90-100
1.18 mm 45-80
300 µm 10- 30
150 µm 2-10
Table B5. Frequency of Control Test for Earth Embankment
Type of Material Frequency of Test

Fill/ Imported material 1 test per 1500m 3
Compacted material 1 test per 500m 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION C: FOUNDATION WORKS AND WORKS BELOW LOWEST PAGE

FLOOR LEVEL
1. Description C/1
2. General Requirements C/1
3. Soil Investigation Works C/2
4. Shallow Foundations C/2
5. Deep Foundations C/8
6. Subterranean Termites Treatment C/58
7. Damp Proof Membrane (DPM) C/59
8. Damp Proof Course (DPC) C/59
9. Filling Under Floors, Aprons Etc. C/59
10. Hardcore C/59

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
SECTION C: FOUNDATION No. Keluaran : 01
WORKS AND WORKS BELOW No. Pindaan : 00
LOWEST FLOOR LEVEL Tarikh : 02 Januari 2020
JKR MALAYSIA Muka Surat : C/1
1. Description
This work shall consist of the supply, installation/ construction and testing of foundation
works in accordance with this Specification and the lines, levels, grades and cross-sections
shown on the Drawings and as directed by the S.O..
2. General Requirements
2.1. Setting Out
Setting out shall be carried out using the data and reference points as shown on the
Drawings. The foundation position shall be marked with suitable identifiable pegs or
markers at least 300mm length driven into the ground and the location marked with
contrasting material. If raking piles are to be installed then the setting out pins, pegs or
markers is located in an offset position at piling platform level taking into account of
depth to cut-off level and rake value of the pile. In addition, the alignment of pins, pegs
or markers shall indicate the direction of the rake. Immediately before pile installation
or casting of foundation, the foundation point shall be checked by the Contractor
again.
2.2. Excavation
2.2.1. Foundations shall be excavated to the levels and dimensions as shown on the
Drawings, with sides trimmed and bottoms levelled and stepped as required.
2.2.2. All excavations shall be carried down to the required level as shown on the
Drawings unless otherwise, the depths of foundation are decided on the site
by the S.O.. The Contractor shall, at his own cost and expense, make good
any over excavation below the required depth with suitable granular material
or concrete as approved by the S.O..
2.3. Method Statement for Construction Operations
2.3.1. Two (2) weeks before the commencement of foundation works, the Contractor
shall submit to the S.O., a detailed method statement for the foundation
works. The method statement shall contain the followings:
2.3.1.1. A detailed construction sequence;
2.3.1.2. Shop Drawings showing details of all special requirements for the
construction activities such as hoisting of piles, reinforcement
cages, cast in fixing, etc;
2.3.1.3. Design calculation of key temporary works endorsed by a

Professional Engineer;
2.3.1.4. Materials, plant and labour requirement at each construction

stage;
2.3.1.5. Rate of production output based on resources allocated;
2.3.1.6. Other information relevant to the foundation works.
2.3.2. If requested by the S.O., the Contractor shall submit additional information
pertaining to the method of construction (including temporary works and the
use of the construction plant), calculation of the stresses, strain and deflection
that will arise in the permanent works of any part thereof during construction.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
2.3.3. The Contractor shall not deviate from the methods which have been approved
by the by the S.O. on the Contractor’s proposed methods of construction shall
not, in any way, relieve the Contractor of any of his duties or responsibilities
under the Contract.
2.4. Unexpected Ground Conditions
The Contractor shall give a written notice immediately to the S.O. of any
circumstances which, in the Contractor’s opinion, indicate ground conditions that may
differ from those expected by the Engineer as shown in the Drawings. The Contractor
shall submit to the S.O. a report which contains all information available to the
Contractor that will materially assist the S.O. in verifying the conditions reported, and
to modify the design, if necessary.
2.5. Adjacent Structures
2.5.1. The Contractor shall carry out a dilapidation survey of adjacent properties to
establish the existing condition of the adjacent structures and facilities prior to
commencement of foundation works. Dilapidation surveys shall be conducted
by a registered building surveyor and the result of the survey shall be
submitted to the S.O. for record.
2.5.2. The Contractor shall pay very careful attention to the construction constraints
imposed by adjacent structures. The Contractor shall take adequate
measures to ensure his foundation works do not disturb or damage existing
adjacent structures and surrounding environment. The Contractor shall
provide a proposal for monitoring adjacent structures and surrounding
environment for any detrimental effects arising from execution of the
foundation works, so that appropriate and timely preventive action can be
taken to minimise damage. The Contractor’s proposal and monitoring
programme shall be certified by a Professional Engineer.
2.5.3. The Contractor shall be responsible and bear the cost incurred including
claims for damages arising from his execution of the foundation works.
2.6. Existing Services
The Contractor shall give all required notices to the appropriate utility authorities
before commencement of foundation works. The Contractor shall also locate existing
services by piloting, protect existing services, rectify any damage or interference to
them and provide temporary support while repairs are being carried out if so required.
3. Soil Investigation Works
A soil investigation report shall be made available (if any) at the S.O.’s office for the
Contractor information. The Contractor shall study the soil investigation report in detail and
make his own interpretation of the information provided and make due allowance for the
effect of site condition on his construction operation. No responsibility is assumed by the
S.O.’s for any opinion or conclusion given in the soil investigation report.
4. Shallow Foundations
4.1. Definition
Shallow foundation is a foundation constructed in depth of not exceeding 3.0m from

formation level. The depth to width ratio of the foundation is D/B≤ 3. Unless
otherwise specified, shallow foundations shall conform with MS 1756. On no

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
account shall isolated foundations be founded on made up or filled ground unless

detailed engineering analysis has been carried out.
4.2. Type of shallow foundation
4.2.1. Pad Foundation
Pad Foundation is spread or isolated foundation of rectangular or square

reinforced concrete pad that supports localized single point loads such as
structural columns.
4.2.2. Strip Foundation
Strip Foundation is continuous strip of reinforced concrete that supports

continuous loads such as walls.
4.2.3. Raft Foundation
Raft Foundation is a combined strip or pad foundation that may cover the
entire area under a structure supporting several columns and walls.
4.3. Materials
4.3.1. Concrete
The materials and workmanship for concrete shall be as specified under

SECTION D: CONCRETING of this Specification.
4.3.2. Reinforcement
The steel reinforcement shall be as specified under SECTION D:

CONCRETING of this Specification.
4.4. Confirmatory of Allowable Bearing Capacity of Soil
4.4.1. The Contractor shall conduct probe test to confirm the required allowable
bearing capacity. For pad foundation, the probe test shall be conducted at
every column position. Other types of shallow foundation probe test shall be
conducted as stated in the Drawings. The Probe test shall be carried out
according to Standard Specification for Road Works “SECTION 17: SITE
INVESTIGATION”. The Contractor shall submit the results to the S.O. for
approval.
4.4.2. In the case where the allowable bearing capacity required is more than or
equals to 150 kN/m2, the Contractor shall carry out the plate bearing test as
stated in the Drawings.
4.5. Plate Bearing Test
4.5.1. General
4.5.1.1. To verify the allowable bearing capacity, the Contractor shall

carry out plate bearing test as shown on the Drawings and/or as
instructed by the S.O.. The recommended size of the test plate
shall not be less than 500mm in diameter. Selection of bearing
plate is such that it shall not warp or deform under the applied
load.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
4.5.1.2. The design and construction of the load application system shall
be satisfactory for the required test. These details shall be made
available prior to the commencement of testing.
4.5.2. Preparation at Test Level
4.5.2.1. Notice of Excavation
The Contractor shall give at least 48 hours’ prior notice of

commencement of excavation of the specified location to be
tested.
4.5.2.2. Method of Excavation
(i) Excavation to the test level shall commence as quickly as

practicable to minimize the effects of stress relief,
particularly when in cohesive soils. Temporary ground
support shall be installed as and when necessary. Where
the test is to be carried out below the groundwater level in
permeable ground, the equipment for lowering the water
level shall be installed and water level shall be lowered
before the excavation reaches the water table in order to
prevent ground disturbance.
(ii) All loose materials and any embedded fragments shall be

removed so that the area for the plate is generally level and
as undisturbed as possible. For uneven surface, place a
layer of sand, nowhere exceeding 100mm in thickness to
obtain a level soil surface. The depth of the test area should
be the same as the foundation depth of the structure to be
built on site.
4.5.2.3. Supervision
(i) The setting up of plate bearing test equipment shall be

carried out under competent supervision and the equipment
shall be checked to ensure that the setting-up is satisfactory
before the commencement of load test.
(ii) All tests shall be carried out only under the direction of an
experienced and competent supervisor conversant with the
test equipment and test procedures. All personnel operating
the test equipment shall have been trained in its use.
4.5.2.4. Notice of Test
The Contractor shall give at least 24 hours’ prior notice of the

commencement of the test. No load shall be applied to the test
area before the confirmation of the specified test procedure.
4.5.3. Protection of Testing Equipment
4.5.3.1. Protection from Weather
Throughout the test period, all equipment for measuring load and
movement, and beams shall be protected from adverse effects of
sun, wind and precipitation.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
4.5.3.2. Prevention of Disturbance
Construction activities and persons who are not involved in the

testing processes shall be kept at a sufficient distance from the
test location to avoid disturbance due to any unavoidable activity
and its effects.
4.5.4. Method of Loading
4.5.4.1. Test Load
(i) The test load shall be applied in one (1) of the following
ways:
a) By means of a jack which obtains its reaction from the

load heavier than the required load such as concrete
blocks, water in tanks or others;
b) By means of a jack which obtains its reaction from

tension piles or other suitable anchors.
(ii) In all cases, the reaction load or its supports shall be placed
sufficiently far from the proposed test position to reduce the
influence on the results to a tolerable level. Care shall be
taken to ensure that the reaction load remains stable
throughout the test without the possibility of load tilting or
collapsing.
(iii) In addition to the reaction load, it shall be necessary to

provide a loading frame, a bearing plate, a loading column
and a hydraulic jack or other appropriate type of load
measuring device. The loading column shall be of sufficient
strength to prevent undue buckling under the maximum load.
The total weight of the kentledge or reaction force provided
shall be at least 1.2 times the maximum test load.
(iv) In all cases the Contractor shall ensure that when the
hydraulic jack and load measuring device are mounted on
the loading column, the entire system shall be stable up to
the maximum load to be applied. If in the course of carrying
out a test, any unforeseen occurrence should take place,
further loading shall not be applied until a proper engineering
assessment of the prevailing conditions has been made and
steps taken to rectify any fault.
(v) Where an inadequacy in any part of the system might

constitute a hazard, means shall be provided to enable the
test to be controlled from a position clear of the kentledge
stack or test frame.
(vi) The hydraulic jack, pump, hoses, pipes, couplings and other
apparatus to be operated under hydraulic pressure shall be
capable to withstand a pressure of 1.5 times the maximum
pressure used in the test without leaking. Test certificate
shall be submitted before carrying the test.
(vii) The maximum test load expressed as a reading on the

gauge in use shall be displayed and all operators shall be
made aware of this limit.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
(viii) When method (a) is used, care shall be taken to ensure that
the centre of gravity of the kentledge is on the axis of the
loading column. The longitudinal axis of the loading column
and the centre of the bearing plate shall coincide, and the
contact shall be such that any tendency for the plate to tilt is
resisted.
(ix) When method (b) is used, all anchor piles shall be at a

distance of at least three (3) times the bearing plate
diameter from the centre of the plate.
(x) If the anchor piles are to be permanent working piles, their

levels shall be observed during application of the test load to
ensure no residual uplift occurs.
(xi) Alternatively, the Contractor may propose the use of other

types, patented or otherwise, in which case the requirements
as below shall be fully complied with.
4.5.4.2. Contractor’s Load Test System
The Contractor may propose to use other different types from

those specified. The proposal shall be submitted to the S.O. at
least 90 days before the date of testing. The suitability or
adequacy of any system shall be determined by the S.O.. In the
event that the testing system proposed by the Contractor is
acceptable, the Contractor shall obtain a Professional Engineer’s
endorsement on the load settlement results.
4.5.4.3. Deformation Measurement System
The deformation measurement components of the test apparatus

shall be made to the required accuracy. Where a dial gauge or
other measuring device is used on the plate, a reference beam
may serve as the datum. At least four (4) dial gauges or other
measuring devices are to be used for measuring the
displacement. All settlement devices shall be readable to 0.01
mm. In addition, the levelling equipment shall be readable to 0.1
mm and placed at stable datum when specified. The levelling staff
shall have a bubble attached to it so that the verticality of the staff
can be checked.
4.5.5. Testing Procedure
4.5.5.1. General
Prior to the performance of any load test, the Contractor shall

submit to the S.O. for his approval, Work Drawings showing the
method and equipment he proposes to use in the performance of
the load test and the measurement of settlements.
4.5.5.2. Maintained Load Test
(i) The Maintained Load Test shall be carried out as follows:
a) The Full Test Load (FTL) on a tested ground shall be

three (3) times that of the Allowable Bearing Capacity
specified on the Drawings.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
b) The test shall be carried out in three (3) cycles with first
cycle test up to working load, second cycle test up to
twice the Allowable Bearing Capacity and third cycle test
up to full test load.
c) The load shall be applied in increments of 20% of the

working load, until a maximum test load is reached.
Each increment of load shall be applied as smoothly and
as expeditiously as possible. Settlement readings and
time observations shall be taken before and after each
new load increment.
d) Settlement reading shall be taken for every 3 minutes. A

time-settlement graph shall be plotted to indicate when
the rate of settlement of 0.05mm per minute is reached.
A further increment of load shall be applied when this
rate of settlement is achieved, or until a minimum time of
15 minutes has elapsed, whichever is later. The process
shall be repeated until the maximum test load is
reached.
e) The maximum load at each cycle shall then be

maintained for a minimum of 2 hours, and time-
settlement readings shall be taken at regular intervals,
as for the earlier load stages.
f) The test load shall then be decreased in four (4) equal

stages, and time-settlement readings shall be as
specified a foresaid, until the movement ceases. At least
15 minutes interval shall be allowed between the
unloading decrements.
g) During testing, if the result from each dial gauge or other

measuring devices differ by more than 20%, the
Contractor shall release the load and recheck the
arrangement of the load cell and redo the load test.
h) Settlement readings shall be made immediately after

and before every load increment is applied or removed.
The procedure of plate bearing test shall be as specified in

Table C1.
4.5.6. Submission of Results
4.5.6.1. Full test data, complete field test records and results from the
readout unit shall be jointly signed by the S.O.’s representative
and the Contractor’s authorised agent and submit to the S.O.
immediately upon completion of the load test. The submission
shall also consist of the following information:
(i) Stage of loading
(ii) The depth of the test level from ground level
(iii) The plate sizes
(iv) Period for which the load was held

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
(v) Final load and load increment
(vi) Maximum settlement
4.5.6.2. These are to be plotted as time-settlement graphs.
4.5.7. Interpretation of Test Results
The S.O.’s interpretation and conclusions on the test results shall be final.
Unless otherwise specified, the plate bearing test shall be deemed to have
failed if the total settlement at any stage of loading exceeds 25mm.
5. Deep Foundations
5.1. Definition
Deep foundation is defined as those where the depth is more than 3m below the
formation level. The types of deep foundation covered under this specification are as
follows, and not limited to:
(i) Precast reinforced concrete piles
(ii) Prestressed spun concrete piles
(iii) Steel H section piles
(iv) Steel pipe piles
(v) Bored cast in-situ piles
(vi) Micro piles
(vii) Caisson
5.1.1. Trial Pile
A trial pile is a pile installed for ultimate pile load test for which the pile is
normally tested to 2.5 to 3.5 times working load, or until failure occurs so that
the design parameters can be verified. The location of the trial pile shall be as
per drawing or as directed by the S.O.. The trial pile shall not be used as a
working pile.
5.1.2. Preliminary Pile
A preliminary pile is a pile installed before the commencement of the main

piling works for the purpose of establishing the pile installation criteria for
subsequent working piles and for confirming the adequacy of the design,
dimensions and working load. This pile can be used as a working pile unless
otherwise directed by the S.O..
5.1.3. Working Pile
A working pile is a pile which is installed as part of the permanent foundation

work.
5.1.4. Working Load
The Working Load is the Design Load modified to allow for group effect, pile

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
spacing or any other factors changing the efficiency of the total foundation
from that of a single isolated pile and is at least equal to the dead plus
imposed loads on the pile together with the down drag or uplift loads as
appropriate.
5.1.5. Test Load
Test load is load applied to a selected pile to confirm that it is suitable for the
load at the settlement specified. The Full Test Load (FTL) on a pile shall be
twice the Working Load (WL) noted on the Drawings.
5.2. General Requirement
5.2.1. Position
For a pile cut off at or above ground level the maximum permitted deviation of
the pile centre from the centre points shown on the Drawings shall not exceed
75mm in any direction. No pile edge shall be nearer than 150mm from the
edge of any pile cap.
5.2.2. Verticality
The maximum permitted deviation of the finished pile from the vertical is 1 in
75 at any level.
5.2.3. Rake
The piling rig shall be set and maintained to attain the required rake. The
maximum permitted deviation of the finished pile from the specified rake or
the rake shown on the Drawings is 1 in 25.
5.2.4. Forcible Corrections
Forcible corrections to concrete piles shall not be permitted. Forcible

corrections may be permitted to specific types of piles if approved by the S.O..
However, no forcible corrections shall be made to piles which have deviated
beyond the permissible limits specified in sub-sections 5.2.1., 5.2.2., 5.2.3..
5.2.5. Piles Out of Alignment or Position
The Contractor shall, if instructed by the S.O., extract and reinstall any pile
which has deviated out of position or alignment by more than the specified
limit, or alternatively the substructure shall be modified and certified by a
Professional Engineer with Practicing Certificate to the approval of the S.O..
The cost of such extraction and reinstallation or any extra cost in the design
and construction of a modified foundation shall be borne by the Contractor if
such extra works have been made necessary due to the error and/or
negligence of the Contractor.
5.2.6. Welding
5.2.6.1. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawing, all welds

shall be full penetration butt welds complying with the
requirements of BS EN 12334.
5.2.6.2. Redriving of the piles shall only be allowed after the welded joints
have sufficiently air cooled to 100°C or below.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
5.2.7. Welders’ Qualification
5.2.7.1. All welding works shall be executed by qualified welders with valid
certificate issued by approved Authorities such as CIAST.
5.2.7.2. Only welders who are qualified to BS EN 287-1 or who have

attained a similar standard shall be employed on the Works. Proof
of welders’ proficiency shall be made available on request by the
S.O..
5.2.8. Preboring And Jetting of Piles
5.2.8.1. Piles shall not be prebored without the written approval of the
S.O.. Preboring of piles may be allowed for the following reasons:
(i) To ease pile drivability by breaking through hard layers;
(ii) To reduce lateral soil displacement where this could cause

damage to nearby structure;
(iii) To investigate and possibly deal with obstruction in the

ground.
5.2.8.2. The piles shall be in contact with surrounding soil and the
completed piles shall comply with the requirements of this
Specification. Diameter of preboring shall be in accordance with
sub-section 5.7.2.1. of this Specification. If boring is oversize, any
gap between the tube and ground shall be filled with compacted
sand prior to driving the pile.
5.2.8.3. In some soils, jetting may lift adjacent structure or cause

undermining of nearby foundations. Pile shall not be jetted without
the written approval of the S.O.. Prior to jetting any pile, the
Contractor shall submit to the S.O. details of the equipment to be
used and the proposed method to be adopted.
5.2.9. Safety Precautions
The Contractor shall take safety precautions throughout the piling operation in
accordance with the requirements of the relevant laws and by-laws.
5.2.10. Records
The Contractor shall keep records of the installation of each pile and shall
submit two (2) signed copies of these records to the S.O. not later than the
next working day after the pile has been installed. The signed records shall
form part of the records for the Works. Any unexpected driving or boring
conditions shall be noted in the records.
5.2.11. As-built Locations Plan
The Contractor shall submit an As-built pile location plan certified by a

Licensed Surveyor to the S.O. within seven (7) working days of completion of
the last pile. Partial as-built plan may be submitted throughout construction of
the foundation for verification by the S.O..

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
5.3. Precast Reinforced Concrete Piles
5.3.1. Material
5.3.1.1. Reinforced Concrete
(i) The materials shall be as specified in Table C2 or as in MS

1314.
(ii) The materials and workmanship for concrete shall be as

specified under SECTION D: CONCRETING of this
Specification.
5.3.1.2. Pile Shoes
(i) The type of pile shoes to be used shall be as shown on the

Drawings and shall comply with MS 1314:
a) "Chilled-hardened" cast iron shoes as used for making

grey iron castings to BS EN 1561, Grade 10; or
b) Mild steel to BS EN 10025 or equivalent, Grade 50B; or
c) Cast steel to BS EN 10293, Grade A.
(ii) Mild steel straps cast into the shoes shall be as shown on
the Drawings. Rock shoes where required shall consist of
wrought iron shoes and mild steel straps cast into "Chilled-
hardened" cast iron blocks, as shown on the Drawings.
(iii) The shoes shall be truly coaxial and firmly embedded on to

end of the pile.
5.3.2. Supply and Delivery of Piles
The Contractor shall only use precast concrete piles supplied by approved
manufacturers. The Contractor shall produce the mill certificate and Perakuan
Pematuhan Standard (PPS) from CIDB to the S.O. for approval. No piles shall
be allowed for transportation before achieving concrete strength of 30N/mm 2.
5.3.3. Handling and Storage
5.3.3.1. The method and sequence of lifting, handling, transporting and

storing piles shall be such that piles are not damaged or having
crack width greater than 0.1mm. Only the designed lifting and
support points shall be used. During transport and storage, piles
shall be placed on adequate supports located under the lifting
points of the piles. Piles shall be stored and stacked on firm
ground not liable to settlement under the weight of piles. The
supports shall be vertically above one another. All piles within a
stack shall be in groups of the same length. Packings of uniform
thicknesses shall be provided between piles at the lifting points.
5.3.3.2. No pile shall be driven before the specified characteristic strength

of appropriate grade of concrete has been achieved.
5.3.4. Damage to Piles
5.3.4.1. The Contractor shall execute the work in such a manner so as to

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
minimise damage to piles.
5.3.4.2. All piles damaged during handling, transporting, pitching, and

driving or at any other time shall be replaced by the Contractor at
his own expense. All piles found damaged shall be taken out from
site.
5.3.5. Installation of Precast Reinforced Concrete Piles
5.3.5.1. Pitching of Piles
Piles shall be pitched accurately in the positions as shown on the

Drawings. At all stages during driving and until the pile has set or
been installed to the required length, all exposed piles shall be
adequately supported and restrained by means of leaders,
trestles, temporary supports or other guide arrangements to
maintain position and alignment and to prevent buckling and
damage to the piles.
5.3.5.2. Driving of Piles
(i) Each pile shall be installed continuously until the specified

set and/or depth has been reached, unless otherwise
approved by the S.O.. The installation equipment used shall
be of such type and capacity to the approval of the S.O.. A
follower (long dolly) shall not be used unless approved by
S.O., subject to the following requirements:
a) The first pile in each pile system and every tenth pile
driven thereafter shall be driven full length, without a
follower, to verify that adequate pile length is being
attained to develop the desired pile capacity.
b) The follower and pile shall be held and maintained in

equal and proper alignment during driving;
c) The follower shall be of such material and dimension to

permit the piles to be driven to the length determined
necessary from the driving of the full-length piles;
d) The final position and alignment of the first two (2) piles
installed with follower in each substructure unit shall be
verified to be in accordance with the location tolerances
specified in sub-section 2.1. before additional piles are
installed.
(ii) Follower shall not be used in driving of raked pile.
(iii) A detailed record of the driving resistance over the full length
of each pile shall be kept. The log shall record the number of
blows for every 0.3m of pile penetration. The Contractor
shall inform the S.O. without delay if an unexpected change
in driving characteristics is encountered. Where required by
the S.O. set shall be taken at approved intervals during the
driving to establish the behaviour of the piles.
(iv) A set shall be taken only in the presence of the S.O. unless
otherwise approved. The Contractor shall provide all
facilities to enable the S.O. to check driving resistances. The
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
final set of a pile other than as friction pile, shall be recorded

as the penetration in millimetres per 10 blows. The
temporary compression of the pile shall be recorded if
required.
(v) When a set is being measured, the following requirements

shall be met:
a) The pile shall be in good condition, without damage or

distortion;
b) The hammer blow shall be in line with the axis of the pile
and the impact surface shall be flat and perpendicular to
the hammer axis;
c) The hammer shall be in good condition, delivering the

required energy per blow and operating correctly;
d) The rebound shall be measured and recorded

accordingly.
(vi) When an acceptable resistance or set appears to have been

reached, the driving of pile should be suspended for an
interval sufficient to permit the soil to recover from the
disturbance of pile driving, and then resumed to determine
whether there is any increase or decrease in resistance.
(vii) In soils that dilate when disturbed e.g. silts and some shales,
negative pore pressure can be set up temporarily and the
driving resistance may fall as these pore pressure returns to
normal. In clays disturbance can cause positive pore
pressure to develop and the strength of the soil may
increase as these dissipate. The necessary time interval
before redriving may vary from one (1) hour to two (2) hours
for non-cohesive soils or two (2) days or more for clays.
(viii) The resistance at the start of redriving is more likely to be

representative of the true bearing value of the pile, and each
redriving result should be taken into consideration when
deciding the pile penetration length.
(ix) Piles shall be driven in an approved sequence to minimise

the detrimental effects of heave and lateral displacement of
the ground. When required, careful levelling from a datum
unaffected by the piling shall be made on the pile heads
already driven, before and after driving subsequent piles.
Piles which have been displaced vertically by more than 3
mm as a result of driving adjacent piles shall be redriven to
the required resistance.
5.3.5.3. Repair of Damaged Pile Heads
(i) If a pile is to be subjected to further driving, concrete in the

damaged pile head shall be cut off square at sound
concrete, and all loose particles shall be removed by wire
brushing, followed by washing with water. Care shall be
exercised to ensure that the reinforcement in the pile head is
not in any way damaged. Any damaged reinforcement shall
be made good to the satisfaction of the S.O.. The head shall

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
be replaced with concrete of similar grade or higher.
(ii) The new head shall be cast truly in line with the remainder of
the pile and be properly cured and allowed to harden
sufficiently to develop the strength necessary for further
driving. If a pile has been driven to the required set or depth
but the level of sound concrete of the pile is below cut-off
level, the pile shall be made good to the cut-off level as
described above so that the completed foundation will safely
withstand the specified ultimate load.
5.3.5.4. Lengthening of Piles
(i) Where piles have to be lengthened, other than by means of

welding of steel plates as detailed on the Drawings, the
reinforcement shall be stripped of all surrounding concrete
for a distance equal to forty (40) times the diameter of the
main reinforcement measured from the pile head for spliced
joints and 300mm for butt welded joints and all lateral
reinforcement shall be removed.
(ii) The new concrete shall be of the same grade or higher as

the original concrete on pile and shall be adequately
compacted.
(iii) The lengthening bars shall butt on the exposed bars in true
alignment and shall be butt welded as specified or shall be
spliced with bars of the same diameter as the main pile bars,
60 diameters in length and lapping the main bars for a
distance of 40 diameters above and below the joint and shall
be securely bound with 1.63mm soft annealed iron wire.
(iv) New binders of similar size shall be provided and spaced at

half the centres of the binders in the main body of the pile
and shall be securely bound with 1.63mm soft annealed iron
wire and the pile extended by concreting in properly
constructed mounds to the length required.
(v) Care shall be taken to form the joint between the old and
new concrete as specified hereinbefore. The old concrete
shall be adequately roughened, and all loose particles shall
be removed by wire brushing, followed by washing with
clean water. The extension shall be truly in line at all stages
of handling and driving with the remainder of the pile and be
properly cured and allowed to harden sufficiently to develop
the strength necessary for further driving.
5.3.5.5. Pile Joint
The bending strength test of pile joint shall be done for laterally
loaded pile only to determine the bending capacity at each
respective joint. The test shall be done as in sub-section 4.3.5.7.
provided that the joint is positioned at the centre of the span. The
bending capacity at the pile joint shall be greater than the bending
capacity of the pile body by 10%. The result shall be submitted to
S.O. for approval prior to driving of any pile.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
5.3.5.6. Pile Bending Strength Test
Pile bending strength test shall be performed in accordance with

Appendix C/1 of this Specification.
5.3.5.7. Cutting and Preparation of Pile Heads
(i) Piles shall be driven in an approved sequence to minimise

the detrimental effects of heave and lateral displacement of
the ground. When required, careful levelling from a datum
unaffected by the piling shall be made on the pile heads
already driven, before and after driving subsequent piles.
Piles which have been displaced vertically by more than 3
mm as a result of driving adjacent piles shall be redriven to
the required resistance.
(ii) When a pile has been driven to the required set or depth, the
head of the pile shall be cut off to the level specified or
shown on the Drawings. This shall be done carefully to avoid
shattering or otherwise damaging the rest of the pile. Any
cracked or defective concrete shall be cut away and made
good with new concrete properly bonded to the old. The
length of reinforcing bars projecting above this level shall be
as shown or specified on the Drawings. If the length of
reinforcing bars left projecting is insufficient, then they shall
be extended by either of the following methods:
a) Butt Welding
The extension bars shall butt on the projecting bars in

true alignment and shall be butt welded in accordance
with sub-section 5.6.3. of this Specification.
b) Splicing
The projecting bars shall be stripped of all surrounding

concrete as necessary to allow splices of length 60
diameters with extension bars. The extension bars shall
be securely bound to the projecting bars with 1.63mm
soft annealed iron wire. The concrete of the pile shall be
made good either before or together with the casting of
the pile cap, all to the satisfaction of the S.O.. Care shall
be taken to avoid cracking or otherwise damaging the
rest of the pile. Any cracked or defective concrete shall
be cut away and made good with new concrete properly
bonded to the old.
5.4. Prestressed Spun Concrete Piles
5.4.1. Material
5.4.1.1. Concrete
(i) The materials shall be as specified in Table C2 or as in

MS1314.
(ii) The materials and workmanship for concrete shall be as

Specification.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
5.4.1.2. Reinforcement
(i) The prestressing tendons and the non-prestressing

reinforcement of the piles including workmanship shall be as
Specification and as per manufacturer details and shall
comply with MS 1314.
(ii) Prestressing steel shall comply with JIS G3137 or BS 4486

or BS 5896 or ASTM A416 or equivalent.
(iii) A Certificate of Conformance is required for every delivery of

reinforcement.
5.4.1.3. End Plates
Details of end plates of each length of pile shall be as per

manufacturer details and shall comply with MS 1314. Each end
plate shall be machine-finished and provided with a chamfer to
accommodate the welding when two (2) lengths of pile are
jointed.
5.4.1.4. Pile Shoes
If specified, the type of pile shoes to be used shall be as per

manufacturer details and shall comply with MS 1314.
5.4.2. Supply and Delivery of Piles
The contractor shall only use Prestressed Spun Concrete piles supplied by
approved manufacturers. The Contractor shall produce the mill certificate and
Perakuan Pematuhan Standard (PPS) from CIDB to the S.O. for approval. No
piles shall be allowed for transportation before achieving concrete strength of
30N/mm2.
5.4.3. Handling and Storage
Handling, storing and transporting prestressed concrete pile shall be done in

such a manner as to avoid excessive bending stresses, cracking, spalling or
injurious result. Piles that are damaged during handling and transporting shall
be replaced by Contractor at his own expenses. All damaged and rejected
piles shall be removed from the site.
5.4.4. Installation of Prestressed Spun Concrete Piles
5.4.4.1. Pitching and Installation of Piles
Pitching and installation of piles shall be in accordance with sub-

sections 4.3.5.1. and 4.3.5.2.. Piles shall not be installed until the
concrete has achieved the specified characteristic strength.
Where lengthening of piles is required, the details of the joint shall

be as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with sub-section
5.6.3.. When two (2) lengths of pile are jointed, the end plates
shall bear over their complete areas. Shims for packing shall not
be accepted. For laterally loaded pile, the pile joint shall be in

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
accordance with sub-section 5.3.5.5..
When a pile has been driven to the required set or depth, the
head of the pile shall be cut off to the level specified or shown on
the Drawings using a diamond cutter. Pile heads shall be
constructed to details as per manufacturer details and shall
comply with MS 1314.
5.5. Steel H-Section Piles
5.5.1. Material
All steel H- section piles including the cast steel shoe shall comply with the
requirement of BS EN 10025 and/ or BS EN 10029, BS EN 10210, BS EN
10113, BS EN 10293, BS 7668 or JIS A5526. The profile and grade to be
used are as specified or as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall
provide mill certificate of the manufactured H-section pile as may be
requested by S.O..
5.5.2. Manufacture and Storage of Steel H-Section Piles
5.5.2.1. Manufacturing Tolerances
(i) All piles shall be of the type and cross-sectional dimensions

as designed. For standard rolled sections the dimensional
tolerances and weight shall comply with the relevant
established standard. Length tolerance of H-section steel
bearing piles shall be ± 50mm in accordance with BS EN
10034.
(ii) The rolling or proprietary tolerances for H-section steel

bearing piles shall be such that the actual weight of the
section does not differ from the theoretical weight by more
than ± 2.5%.
5.5.2.2. Straightness of Sections

10034.
(ii) For standard rolled sections the deviation from straightness

shall be within the compliance provisions of BS EN 10034.
When two (2) or more rolled sections are joined by butt-
jointing, the deviation from straightness shall not exceed
1/600 of the overall length of the pile.
(iii) For proprietary sections made up from rolled sections and

for tubular piles the deviation from straightness on any
longitudinal face shall not exceed 1/600 of the length of the
pile nor 5mm in any 3m length.
(iv) Based on the results of pile driving resistance and/or load

tests carried out on piles driven on the Site, the S.O. may,

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
from time to time, instruct the lengths of piles to be modified.
5.5.2.3. Strengthening of Piles
Unless otherwise approved by the S.O., the strengthening of the

toe of the pile in lieu of a shoe, or the strengthening of the head of
a pile, shall be made from material of the same grade or strength
class as the pile and to the details as shown on the Drawings.
5.5.2.4. Marking of Piles
Each pile shall be clearly marked with white undeletable marking

at the flanged head showing its reference number and overall
length. In addition, each pile shall be marked at intervals of
500mm along its length before being driven. The length of piles to
be supplied shall be as shown on the Drawings subject to revision
by the S.O..
5.5.2.5. Handling and Storage

10034.
(ii) All operations such as handling and transporting of piles

shall be carried out in such a manner that damage to piles
and their coatings is minimized. Piles that are damaged
during handling and transporting shall be replaced by the
Contractor at his own expense. All damaged and rejected
piles shall be removed from the Site forthwith.
(iii) Piles within a stack shall be in groups of the same length

and on approved supports.
5.5.3. Installation of Steel H-Section Piles
5.5.3.1. Pitching and Driving of Piles
Pitching and driving of piles shall be in accordance with sub-

sections 4.3.5.1. and 4.3.5.2..
(i) Where lengthening of piles is required, the piles shall be

joined by butt welding. Butt welded joints shall be stiffened
with plates fillet welded on all four (4) sides as detailed on
the Drawings. All welding shall be continuous and complying
with BS 638, BS EN 1011-1 and BS EN 1011-2 and BS EN
1993 for arc welding and BS EN ISO 4577 for resistance
welding as appropriate. All welding procedures shall comply
to BS EN ISO 15607, BS EN ISO 15609-1, BS EN ISO
15613 and BS EN ISO 15614-1. The type and size of weld
shall be as detailed on the Drawings. The Contractor shall
make available full details of the welding procedure and
electrodes with drawings and schedule as requested by
S.O..

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
(ii) Weld tests shall be performed by radiographic or ultrasonic

methods as specified. Provided that satisfactory results are
being obtained, one (1) test of a length of 300mm shall be
made for 10% or more of the number of welded splices.
(i) When a pile has been driven to the required set or depth and
before encasing in concrete, the piles shall be cut to within
20mm tolerance of the levels shown on the Drawings. Pile
heads shall be constructed to the details as shown on the
Drawings.
(ii) The remaining section which can be reused for lengthening

of piles shall be stored and protected as directed by the
S.O..
5.6. Steel Pipe Piles
5.6.1. Materials
All steel pipes shall comply with BS EN 10296, BS EN 10297 and BS EN

10305 with regard to sectional dimensions and the steel shall comply with the
requirements of BS EN 10113 or BS EN 10025. Mill certificates shall be
provided to the S.O. prior to pile installation.
5.6.2. Manufacture and Storage of Steel Pipe Piles
5.6.2.1. Fabrication of Piles
(i) Pile lengths shall be set up so that the differences in

dimensions are matched as evenly as possible. The length
of piles to be supplied shall be as shown on the Drawings
and subject to revision by the S.O..
(ii) Based on the results of pile driving resistance and/or load

tests carried out on piles driven on the Site, the S.O. may,
from time to time, order the lengths of piles to be modified.
(iii) For tubular piles where the load will be carried by the wall of
the pile, and if the pile will be subjected to loads that induce
reversal of stress during or after construction, the external
diameter at any section as measured by using a steel tape
on the circumference shall not differ from the theoretical
diameter by more than ± 1%.
(iv) The ends of all tubular piles as manufactured shall be within

a tolerance on ovality of ± 1% as measured by a ring gauge
for a distance of 100mm at each end of the pile length.
(v) The root edges or root faces of lengths of piles that are to be
shop butt-welded shall not differ by more than 25% of the
thickness of pile walls not exceeding 12mm thick or by more
than 3mm for piles where the wall is thicker than 12mm.
When piles of unequal wall thickness are to be butt-welded,
the thickness of the thinner material shall be the criterion.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
5.6.2.2. Matching of Pile Lengths
Longitudinal seam welds and spiral seam welds of lengths of pipe

piles forming a completed pile shall, whenever possible, be
evenly staggered. However, if in order to obtain a satisfactory
match of the ends of piles or the specified straightness, where the
longitudinal seams or spiral seams are brought closely to one (1)
alignment at the joint, then they shall be staggered by at least
100mm.
5.6.2.3. Straightness of Piles
The deviation of pile from straightness shall be within the

compliance provisions of BS EN 10034 and in accordance with
sub-section 5.5.2.3..
5.6.2.4. Fabrication of Piles on Site
When pile lengths are to be made up on Site, all test procedures

and dimensional tolerances shall conform to the Specification for
the supply of pipe materials. Adequate facilities shall be provided
for supporting and aligning the lengths of pile.
5.6.2.5. Handling and Storage
All piles within a stack shall be in groups of the same length and
on approved supports. All operations such as handling,
transporting and pitching of piles shall be carried out in a manner
such that no damage occurs to piles and their coatings. Piles that
are damaged during handling and transporting shall be replaced
by the Contractor at his own expense. All damaged and rejected
piles shall be removed from the Site forthwith.
5.6.2.6. Marking of Piles
Each pile shall be clearly marked with white undeletable marking

near the pile head showing its reference number and overall
length. In addition, for pile installation monitoring purposes, each
pile shall be marked at intervals of 300mm along its length before
being driven.
5.6.3. Workmanship
5.6.3.1. Welding Procedures
(i) The Contractor shall submit for approval, full details of the
welding procedures and electrodes with Drawings and
schedules as may be necessary. Tests shall be undertaken
as may be required by the S.O. and shall be in accordance
with the requirements of BS EN 288
(ii) All welding procedures shall have been qualified to BS EN

ISO 15607, BS EN ISO 15609-1, BS EN ISO 15613 and BS
EN ISO 15614-1 and the Contractor shall make available full
details of the welding procedures and electrodes, with
Drawings and schedules as may be necessary. Tests shall
be undertaken as may be required by the S.O..

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
5.6.3.2. Weld Tests
(i) During production of welded tube piles, at least one (1)

radiograph or ultrasonic test approximately 300mm long
shall be required on each end of a length as a spot check on
weld quality. This shall be taken on a circumferential or
longitudinal weld and its position shall be as directed by the
S.O..
(ii) For spirally welded piles, one (1) of the following tests shall
be carried out:
a) For tubes of wall thickness 12mm or less, three (3) spot

check radiographs, one (1) at each end of each length of
the tube as manufactured and one (1) at a position to be
chosen at the time of testing by the S.O. and spot check
radiographs as required by the S.O. on the weld joints
between strip lengths;
b) For tubes of any wall thickness, continuous ultra-sonic

examination over the whole weld, supplemented where
necessary by radiographs to investigate defects
revealed by the ultrasonic examination.
Weld tests shall be performed by radiographic or

ultrasonic methods as specified. Provided that
satisfactory results are being obtained, one (1) test of a
length of 300mm shall be made for 10% or more of the
number of welded splices in the case where the load will
be carried by the wall or section of the pile will not
normally exceed 10%. Results shall be made available
to the S.O. within ten (10) days of completion of the
tests.
5.6.3.3. Standards for Welds
(i) Longitudinal Welds in Tubular Piles
For piles of longitudinal or spiral weld manufactured where

the load will be carried by the wall of the pile, and if the pile
will be subject to loads which induce reversal of stress
during or after construction other than driving stresses, the
standard for interpretation of non-destructive testing shall be
the American Petroleum Institute Specification 5L. The
maximum permissible height of weld reinforcement shall not
exceed 3.2mm for wall thicknesses not exceeding 12.7mm
and 4.8mm for wall thicknesses greater than 12.7mm.
(ii) Circumferential Welds
a) For circumferential welds in tubular piles the same

maximum height of weld reinforcement as specified
above for longitudinal welds in tubular piles shall apply,
the standard for interpretation of non-destructive testing
shall be the American Petroleum Institute Specification
5L.
b) If the results of any weld test do not conform to the

specified requirements, two (2) additional specimens

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
from the same length of pile shall be tested. In the case

of failure of one (1) or both of these additional tests, the
length of pile covered by the test shall be rejected.
5.6.4. Protective Coatings
The term ‘coating’ shall include the primer and the coats specified. If
protective coatings are specified, the preparation of surfaces and the
application of the coatings shall be carried out by skilled labour having
experience in the preparation of the coatings specified.
Corrosion protection of permanent steel structure in accordance with

environment classified as C4 according to BS EN ISO 12944-2 shall require
durability resistance of 25 years.
The protective coating system shall comply with BS EN ISO 12944-5 and
shall comprise of at least:
5.6.4.1. First Coating or Prime Coat Zinc Epoxy 0.08mm thick
5.6.4.2. Two (2) layers of Intermediate coating 0.08mm thick epoxy for
each layer
5.6.4.3. Top coating of Polyurethane 0.08mm thick
5.6.4.4. Surface Preparation
(i) All surfaces to be coated shall be clean and dry
(ii) Surface preparation to cleanliness SA 2 ½ in accordance

with BS EN ISO 12944-4 and BS EN ISO 8501-1.
(iii) Blast-cleaning shall be done after fabrication. Unless an

instantaneous-recovery blasting machine is used, the
cleaned steel surface shall be air-blasted with clean dry air
and vacuum-cleaned or otherwise freed from abrasive
residues and dust immediately after cleaning.
5.6.4.5. Application and Type of Primer
(i) Immediately after surface preparation, the surface shall be

coated with an approved primer or the specified coating to
avoid recontamination. No primer coat shall be applied to a
metal surface which is not thoroughly dry. Within 4 hours
after surface preparation, before visible deterioration takes
place, the surface shall be coated with an appropriate primer
or the specified coating.
(ii) The primer shall be compatible with the specified coating

and shall be such that if subsequent welding or cutting is to
be carried out it shall not emit noxious fumes or be
detrimental to the welding.
5.6.4.6. Control of Humidity during Coating
(i) No coating shall be applied when the surface metal

temperature is less than 3°C above the dew point
temperature or when the humidity could have an adverse
effect on the coat.
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
(ii) When heating or ventilation is used to secure suitable

conditions to allow coating to proceed, care shall be taken to
ensure the heating or ventilation of a local surface does not
have an adverse effect on adjacent surfaces or work already
done.
5.6.4.7. Part to Be Welded
The coating within 200mm of a weld shall be applied after

welding. The method of application shall comply with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
5.6.4.8. Thickness, Number and Colour of Coats
(i) The minimum dry film thickness of the finished coating,

including the minimum dry film thickness of each coat and
the minimum number of coats that are to be applied, shall be
as specified and shown on the Drawings. Coatings shall be
applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
(ii) The nominal thickness of the finished coating and each coat
shall be as specified. The average coat or finished coating
thickness shall be equal to or greater than the specified
nominal thickness. In no case shall any coat or finished
coating be less than 75% of the nominal thickness. Each
coat shall be applied only after an interval that ensures the
proper hardening or curing of the previous coat.
(iii) Where more than one (1) coat is applied to a surface, each
coat shall be different colour from the previous coat. The
colour sequence and final coating colour shall be
established prior to application of coatings.
5.6.4.9. Inspection of Coatings and Acceptability
(i) The finished coating shall be generally smooth, of a dense

and uniform texture and free from sharp protuberances or
pin holes.
(ii) Any coat damaged by subsequent processes or which has

deteriorated to an extent such that proper adhesion of the
coating may not be obtained or maintained, shall be
recleaned to the original standard and recoated with the
specified sequence of coats.
(iii) The completed coating shall be checked for thickness and

continuity by an approved magnetic gauge or detector.
Areas where the thickness is less than that specified shall
receive approved additional treatment.
(iv) When specified, the completed coating shall be checked for

adhesion by means of an adhesion test to BS EN ISO 2409,
BS 3900-E6, carried out on 10% of the piles. The adhesion
of any completed coating shall not be worse than
Classification 2. If adhesion tests on the initial batch are
satisfactory, then on further batches only 1% of the piles
shall be tested. Adhesion tests shall not be carried out until
seven (7) days after coating.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
5.6.5. Installation of Steel Pipe Piles
5.6.5.1. Pitching and Driving of Piles
Pitching and driving of piles shall be in accordance with sub-

sections 4.3.5.1. and 4.3.5.2..
Unless otherwise approved, where lengthening of piles is

required, the piles shall be joined by butt welding along the entire
periphery as detailed on the Drawings. All procedures shall be in
accordance with sub-sections 4.5.3.2..
When a pile has been driven to the required set or depth and
before encasing in concrete, the pile shall be cut to within 20mm
of the levels shown on the Drawings and protective coatings shall
be removed from the surfaces of the pile head 100mm above the
soffit of the concrete. Pile heads shall be constructed to details as
shown on the Drawings. If a steel structure is to be welded to
piles, the piles shall be cut square and to within +/- 5mm.
5.6.5.4. Concreting of Pile Shaft
(i) If concreting is specified or shown on the Drawings after the

pile has been cut off to the specified level, the shaft shall be
filled with concrete in a continuous operation. The method of
placing shall be approved by the S.O..
(ii) The reinforcement cage in the pile shall be made sufficiently

rigid and kept in its correct position during concreting.
(iii) The length of the reinforcing bars projecting above the pile
cut-off level shall be as shown on the Drawings.
(iv) Mixing and placing concrete infill shall be done in

accordance to sub-section 5.7.4..
5.7. Bored Cast-In-Situ Piles
5.7.1. Materials
5.7.1.1. Concrete
The materials and workmanship for concrete shall be as specified

under SECTION D: CONCRETING of this Specification. The
grade of the concrete shall be as shown on the Drawings.

CONCRETING of this Specification. The details of the steel
reinforcement shall be as shown on the Drawings.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
5.7.2. Boring Operations
5.7.2.1. Diameter of Piles
(i) The diameter of piles shall not be less than the specified
designed diameter at any level throughout its length.
(ii) The auger width shall be checked as necessary and

recorded for each pile to ensure the specified diameter is
achieved. A tolerance of 0% to +5% on the auger width is
permissible.
5.7.2.2. Boring
(i) Boring shall be carried down to the depth as required and

directed by the S.O.. When deemed necessary by the S.O.,
the Contractor shall take soil samples while the pile is being
bored. The samples shall be taken to an approved
Laboratory for testing, if necessary or as directed by the
S.O..
(ii) Sampling and all subsequent handling and testing shall be

carried out in accordance with BS EN ISO 1997, BS EN ISO
14688, BS EN ISO 14689, BS EN ISO 22475 and BS EN
ISO 22476.
(iii) Piles shall not be bored at a distance less than three (3)
times diameter close to other piles which have been cast
less than 24 hours or contain unset concrete.
5.7.2.3. Coring in Rock
(i) The Contactor shall submit a method statement when coring

in rock. Chiselling of rock may cause micro cracks in
surrounding rock and is not allowed. Rock coring shall mean
coring of sound bedrock using a coring bucket or any other
approved method. Confirmatory test to verify sound rock
shall be carried out by the Contractor.
(ii) Definition of coring in rock shall fulfil all two (2) criteria
below:
a) Change of tools to rock coring tools, and
b) The rock materials shall be verified by carrying out point

load test on at least five (5) rock samples to achieve
minimum corrected point load strength index Is(50) of
2.0 MPa on samples not less than 30mm and not more
than 85mm with the preferred dimension about 50mm
based on ASTM D5731. The Minimum five (5) samples
shall be taken for every 1m depth of rock coring.
c) Any coring/boring in other materials that do not fulfil the

definition of rock coring mentioned above shall be
considered as boring in soils.
d) The provision of point load test equipment at site for the

above-mentioned testing shall be by Contractor’s own
cost and time. The point load test equipment shall be
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
calibrated, and a valid calibration certificate shall be

made available to the S.O. upon requested.
5.7.2.4. Socketing in rock to fulfil design criteria
The socketed length shall be as specified in the Drawing or as

directed by the S.O.. The starting of the socketing length may not
be the same as the coring depth of rock. Rock socket length shall
be measured from the flattened horizontal bedrock surface. This
flat horizontal surface shall be proved using Kelly bar or steel bar
at a minimum of five positions over the borehole.
5.7.2.5. Permanent Casing
Permanent casings which form part of the designed pile shall be

as specified on the Drawings.
5.7.2.6. Temporary Casing
(i) Temporary casings of approved quality or an approved

alternative method shall be used to maintain the stability of
pile excavations which might otherwise collapse.
(ii) Temporary casings shall be free from significant distortion.

They shall be of uniform cross-section throughout each
continuous length. During concreting they shall be free from
internal projections and encrusted concrete which might
prevent the proper formation of the piles being cast.
(iii) If a temporary casing is required to stabilise the borehole, it

shall be extended beyond the unstable strata for one (1)
metre or more to prevent the inflow of soil and the formation
of cavities in the surrounding ground.
5.7.2.7. Stability of Piling Excavations Using Support Fluid
(i) Where the use of support fluid or a column of water is

approved for maintaining the stability of boring, the level of
fluid or column of water in the excavation shall be
maintained such that the fluid pressure always exceeds the
pressure exerted by the soil and external ground water. The
fluid water level shall be maintained at a level not less than
1m above the level of the external ground water.
(ii) An adequate temporary casing shall be used in conjunction

with the method to ensure the stability of the strata near
ground level until concrete has been placed.
(iii) In the event of a rapid loss of bentonite suspension,

polymeric fluids or water from the piling excavation, the
excavation shall be backfilled with lean concrete or well
compacted sand as specified in SECTION D:CONCRETING
of this Specification without delay and the instructions of the
S.O. shall be obtained prior to resuming boring at that
location.
5.7.2.8. Support Fluid
(i) Support fluid material, bentonite, shall comply with the

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
manufacturer’s certificate and mix proportion. A certificate

shall be obtained by the Contractor from the manufacturer of
the bentonite powder, showing the properties of each
consignment delivered to the site. This certificate shall be
made available to the S.O.. Test should be carried out at
regular interval to ensure consistency of the batching
process.
(ii) Polymer can be used as an alternative to bentonite to

maintain stability of the bores with the approval of the S.O..
(iii) Bentonite or polymer shall be mixed thoroughly with water

complying with MS 28 to make a suspension which will
maintain the stability of the pile excavation for the period
necessary to place concrete and complete construction.
Preparation of the suspension shall comply with the
manufacturer's instructions.
(iv) Where saline or chemically contaminated ground water

occurs, special precautions shall be taken to modify the
bentonite suspension or pre-hydrate the bentonite in fresh
water to render it suitable in all aspects for the construction
of piles.
(v) Minimum frequency of testing are as follows:
a) Fresh drilling fluid
b) Drilling fluid shall be tested before concreting
c) Recycle drilling fluid taken from desanding machine
d) Drilling fluid left in the bored hole for more than 12 hours
(vi) The frequency of testing drilling fluid and the method and
procedure of sampling shall be proposed by the Contractor
and agreed by the S.O. before the commencement of the
work. The frequency may subsequently be varied with the
approval of the S.O.. Control tests for density shall be
carried out daily on the drilling fluid using suitable apparatus.
The measuring device shall be calibrated to read within
0.01g/ml. The results shall be within the ranges stated in
Table C6 for bentonite and Table C7 for polymer drilling
fluids.
(vii) All reasonable steps shall be taken to prevent the spillage of

drilling fluid on the site. Discarded drilling fluid shall be
removed from the site without delay and such removal shall
comply with the regulations of the relevant Authorities.
(viii) If sand content is more than 5%, the Contractor shall carry
out desanding to screen out sand from drilling fluid before
concreting.
5.7.2.9. Spillage and Disposal
(i) All reasonable steps shall be taken to prevent the spillage of

bentonite suspension or water on the site in areas outside
the immediate vicinity of the boring operations. Discarded
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
bentonite water shall be removed from the site without delay.

The disposal of bentonite water shall comply with the
regulations of the Local Authorities and other related
Government Agencies.
(ii) Entrained solids shall be removed from the polymeric fluid

by use of flocculants before disposal of the remaining fluid to
the approved designated disposal sites by the Authorities.
5.7.2.10. Pumping of Boreholes
Pumping from the borehole shall not be permitted unless casings

have been placed into the stable stratum to prevent the further
ingress of water in significant quantities from other strata into the
borehole, or, unless it can be shown that pumping will not have a
detrimental effect on the surrounding soil or its properties.
5.7.2.11. Continuity of Construction
(i) A pile constructed in the stable soil, without the use of

temporary casings or other support, shall be bored and
concreted without delay to ensure that the soil
characteristics are not significantly altered. The time interval
between completion of boring and placing of concrete should
preferably be within six (6) hours. Where prolonged delay in
construction arises, the bore may have to be backfilled with
lean concrete as specified in SECTION D: CONCRETING of
this Specification or well compacted sand to minimise
deterioration of the shaft.
(ii) If the bored pile installation is carried out using permanent or

temporary casing, the time period between completion of
boring operation and completion of concreting is
recommended not to exceed twenty-four (24) hours.
5.7.2.12. Enlarged Pile Bases
The enlarged pile base shall not be smaller than the dimensions
specified and shall be concentric with the pile shaft to within 10%
of the shaft diameter. A sloping surface of the frustum forming the
enlargement shall make an angle to the horizontal of not less than
55º. At the specified diameter of the under ream at the perimeter
of the base there shall be a minimum height of 150mm.
5.7.2.13. Cleanliness of Pile Bases
On completion of boring, loose, disturbed or remoulded soil or

fragments of rock shall be removed from the base of the pile.
5.7.2.14. Inspection
For dry boreholes, each hole shall be inspected prior to the

placing of concrete in it. The inspection shall be carried out from
the ground surface in the case where the borehole diameter is
less than 1500mm. Where the borehole diameter exceeds
1500mm, adequate equipment shall be provided to enable the
Contractor and the S.O. to descend into the borehole for the
purpose of inspection. All works shall conform to the requirement
of BS 5573:1978 Safety Precaution in the Construction of Large

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
Diameter Borehole for Piling and Other Purposes. For wet

boreholes, i.e. holes filled with drilling fluid or water, a suitable
probe shall be provided to ascertain the evenness and
cleanliness of the pile base.
5.7.3. Placing of Reinforcement
5.7.3.1. Joints in Longitudinal Bars
Reinforcement shall be such that the full strength of the bar is

effective across the joint and the joint shall be made so that there
is no relative displacement of the reinforcement during the
construction of the pile and the spacing of the reinforcing bars
shall be maintained in such a way that proper concreting shall not
be impeded.
5.7.3.2. Positions of Reinforcement
Adequate spacer blocks, guide tubes, and lifting wires shall be

provided so as to maintain the reinforcing steel in the positions as
specified.
Where temporary casings are employed, the longitudinal

reinforcement shall extend at least 1m below the bottom of the
casing so that movement of the reinforcement during extraction of
the casing is minimised.
5.7.4. Concreting Operations
5.7.4.1. Placing Concrete
The method of placing and the workability of concrete shall be

such that a continuous monolithic concrete shaft of the full cross-
section is formed.
5.7.4.2. Workability of Concrete
The workability of the concrete shall be determined by the slump

test as described in M.S.26.
The suggested slump details for typical concreting situations shall

be as specified in Table C3 of this Specification. The slump shall
be measured at the time of discharge into the borehole.
5.7.4.3. Compaction
Internal vibrators shall not be used to compact concrete unless it

can be satisfied that they will not cause segregation or arching of
the concrete.
5.7.4.4. Placing Concrete in Dry Borings
(i) Approved measures shall be taken to avoid segregation and

bleeding and to ensure that the concrete at the bottom of the
pile is not deficient in grout.
(ii) Where piles are vertical, concrete may be poured through a

tremie so that the flow is directed and does not hit
reinforcement bars or the side of the hole. Chutes extending

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
to near the base shall be employed for raking piles of large

diameter.
5.7.4.5. Placing Concrete under Water or Support Fluid
(i) Concrete to be placed under water or support fluid shall be

placed by tremie unless otherwise approved and shall not be
discharged freely into the water or support fluid. Before
placing concrete, measures shall be taken to ensure that
there is no accumulation of silt or other material at the base
of the boring.
(ii) The hopper and pipe of the tremie shall be clean and
watertight throughout. The pipe shall extend to the base of
the boring and a sliding plug or barrier shall be placed in the
pipe to prevent direct contact between the first charge of
concrete in the pipe of the tremie and the water or support
fluid. The tremie pipe outlet shall be kept at least 1.5 metres
below the surface of the concrete at all stages in the pour.
The Contractor shall develop a system of level checks for
the concrete and pipe outlet to ensure that this requirement
is met. The tremie pipe shall be withdrawn upward gently
below the concrete level and shall not be subject to any
shock or violent movement either in dislodging the concrete
within the pipe or for any other reason.
(iii) At all times, a sufficient quantity of concrete shall be

maintained within the tremie pipe to ensure that the pressure
from it exceeds that from the water or support fluid. The
internal diameter of the tremie pipe shall not be less than
150mm for concrete made with 20mm aggregate and not
less than 200mm for concrete made with 40mm aggregate.
(iv) The tremie pipe shall be so designed that external

projections are minimised, allowing the tremie pipe to pass
through the reinforcing cage without causing damage or
uplifting. The internal face of the tremie pipe shall be free
from projections.
5.7.5. Extraction of Casing
5.7.5.1. Workability of Concrete
Temporary casings shall be extracted while the concrete within

them remains sufficiently workable to ensure that the concrete is
not lifted together with the casing.
5.7.5.2. Concrete Level
(i) When the casing is being extracted, a sufficient quantity of

concrete shall be maintained within it to ensure that the
pressure from external water, drilling fluid or soil is exceeded
and that the pile is neither reduced in section nor
contaminated.
(ii) No concrete shall be placed in the bore once the bottom of

the casing has been lifted above the top of the concrete. It
shall be placed continuously as the casing is extracted until
the desired head of concrete is obtained.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
(iii) The top of concrete level shall be brought to at least

1000mm or more as specified on the Drawings above the
cut-off level of the pile or the concrete be allowed to be
flushed out from the bore to permit all laitance and weak
concrete to be removed and thus ensure that it can be
properly keyed into the pile cap.
(iv) Adequate precautions shall be taken in all cases where

excess heads of water or drilling fluid could be a cause for
concern as the casing is withdrawn because of the
displacement of water or fluid by the concrete as it flows into
its final position against the wall of the pile shaft. Where
double casings are used in the boring, the proposed method
of working shall be with the approval of the S.O..
5.7.5.3. Vibrating Extractors
The use of vibrating extractors shall be permitted subject to S.O.’s

approval. The work shall be carried out in such a manner and
times to ensure the quality of concrete in the bore, minimise
nuisance and disturbance to the surrounding.
5.7.6. Construction of Pile Heads
5.7.6.1. Water Levels
In the event of the ground water level being higher than the
required pile head casting level shown on the Drawings, the
Contractor shall submit his proposals for approval prior to placing
concrete. The pile head shall not be left below the ground water
level unless approved precautions are taken.
Pile head shall be cut using handheld cutting equipment or

hydraulic splitters. Pile heads after cutting shall consist of sound
concrete and free from debris. Pile heads shall be constructed to
the details shown on the Drawings.
5.7.6.3. Temporary Backfilling Above Pile Casting Level
After each pile has been cast, any empty bore remaining shall be
protected and shall be carefully backfilled as soon as possible
with well compacted sand.
5.7.6.4. Piling Records
(i) Complete piling records shall be kept by the Contractor

during pile installation. The Contractor shall submit in
duplicate the following information to the S.O.:
a) Signed records of all piles as the work proceeds.

Individual pile record shall be submitted not later than
noon of the next working day after the pile was installed.
The signed records shall form record of the work. Any
unexpected installation condition shall be noted in the
record.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
b) Upon completion, compile a record of the work as

carried out and provide As-built Drawings. The Drawings
shall be prepared and endorsed by the Licensed
Surveyor.
(ii) The format of the record shall be approved by the S.O. and
shall contain, but not be limited to the following information
where applicable:
a) Date and time of boring, speed of boring for every

meter
b) Type of boring machine
c) Date and time of concreting
d) Depth of borehole, detail of soil/rock strata

penetrated, soil/rock samples taken, and in-situ tests
carried out
e) Concrete mix
f) Type of stabilizing fluids
g) Method of concreting
h) Standing ground water level
i) Length of temporary/permanent casing
j) Length and details of reinforcement.
k) Estimated and actual volume of concrete required to

form the pile shaft.
(iii) All record shall bear the names of person who records and
person who checks.
5.7.7. Pressure Grouting of Piles
5.7.7.1. Grouting of piles shall be done if encounter any unstable shaft or

base disturbance to ensure compatible performance of piles.
Method of grouting shall be carefully controlled to prevent pile
uplift and avoid other potential problems with prior approval of the
S.O..
5.7.7.2. Pressure grouting shall not be used to compensate for poor pile
construction practice.
5.8. Micropiles
5.8.1. Materials
The type of reinforcement to be used, the diameter and/or

thickness, grade, yield strength and working stress shall be as
specified or as shown on the Drawings.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
5.8.1.2. Grout
(i) Unless otherwise specified, the grout shall be non-shrink

cement grout. The grout mix design such as the water-
cement ratio, the minimum cement and grout strength at 7
and 28 days shall be as specified and shown on the
Drawings.
(ii) If admixtures are used, details of admixtures shall be

submitted to the S.O. for approval before commencement of
works. The use of the admixture shall fully comply with the
manufacturer's instructions.
5.8.2. Drilling Operation
5.8.2.1. Diameter of Piles
The diameter of piles shall not be less than the

specified/designed diameter at any level throughout its length and
shall be in accordance with sub-section 5.7.2.1..
5.8.2.2. Drilling
The Contractor shall submit to the S.O. details of drilling

equipment and drilling procedure for approval before
commencement of works. Drilling operations shall be carried out
in accordance with the relevant requirements of sub-section
5.7.2..
5.8.3. Grouting Operations
5.8.3.1. Mixing and Placing Grout
(i) The Contractor shall provide details of the method and

equipment used in grout mixing. Further information such as
grouting pressure, grouting procedure, grouting equipment
and techniques employed in grouting underwater shall also
be furnished for approval.
(ii) Grout shall be mixed on Site and shall be free from

segregation, slumping and bleeding. Grout shall be pumped
into its final position in one (1) continuous operation as soon
as possible and in no case more than half an hour after
mixing.
(iii) Micropile shall be grouted in one continuous process. If

there is significant loss of grout, the Contractor may choose
to carry out pre-grouting in stages as necessary to prevent
further loss of grout for the construction of micropile. Method
statement of pre-grouting including details of equipment,
materials and procedures have to be reviewed and approved
by the S.O.. If after the process of pre-grouting and re-
drilling of the hole is required, the Contractor has to bear the
cost and the time of the pre-grouting and re-drilling.
5.8.3.2. Testing Grout
(i) Grout shall be tested in accordance with BS EN 12390 and

BS EN 196.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
(ii) If the grout cube as tested fails to satisfy the criteria as

prescribed in the Specification and Drawings, the pile
constructed using this batch of grout shall be rejected. The
Contractor shall undertake all necessary additional and
consequential remedial works to the approval of the S.O..
5.8.4. Construction of Pile Heads
Where lengthening is required, the pile reinforcement unit shall be

connected on Site to the details as shown on the Drawings. Other
means of jointing reinforcement shall be to the approval of the
S.O..
Pile heads shall be constructed to the details as shown on the

Drawings.
5.8.5. Casing
Where permanent casing or temporary casing is specified or required upon

approval of S.O., the requirements shall be in accordance with sub-section
5.7.5..
5.9. Caisson
5.9.1. Materials
5.9.1.1. Concrete
The material and workmanship for concrete shall be as specified

under SECTION D: CONCRETING of this Specification. The
grade of the concrete shall be as shown on the Drawings.

CONCRETING of this Specification. The details of steel
reinforcement shall be as shown in the Drawings.
5.9.1.3. Permanent Liner
Lining shall be constructed sufficiently quickly after excavation

and in sufficiently short section to prevent inflow of soil or
excessive inflow of water. In-situ concrete tapered rings used as
permanent liners shall be at least 100mm thick and shall not
exceed 1m deep. The ring shall be constructed with well
compacted concrete. The concrete shall be cast tight up against
the side of excavation. The material and workmanship for
concrete shall be as specified under SECTION D: CONCRETING
of this Specification. The grade of the concrete shall be as shown
on the Drawings.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
5.9.2. Excavation operations
5.9.2.1. Diameter of piles
The effective diameters of the caisson shaft and bell out shall not
be less than those shown on the Drawings nor exceed the
specified dimension by more than 50mm at any level of the whole
shaft.
5.9.2.2. Depth of excavation
The anticipated depth of all caissons is as indicated in the

Drawings. All caissons shall be taken to a depth pre-determined
by the Drawings into the required bearing stratum over the full
area of the caisson base. The caisson base shall be levelled.
Where bell-outs are required they shall be formed entirely within
the bearing stratum
5.9.2.3. Method statement
The Contractor shall adopt a method of construction that will not

cause settlement or disturbance of any kind to adjacent
structures, pavement, public or private services. The Contractor
shall establish an approved monitoring system and take regular
readings and prepare and submit reports to the S.O. in the format
and quantity as requested. The Contractor shall modify the
method of construction if the effects of ground movement are
detected in any such structures, pavements and services.
5.9.2.4. Minimum clear working space
The minimum clear working space inside a caisson (i.e. excluding

the lining) shall not less than 1.8m. Caissons with enlarge base
shall not be used unless otherwise specified.
5.9.2.5. Method of excavation
Excavation for caissons shall be carried out using manual

methods or power tools. Blasting shall not be used unless agreed
by the S.O.. If blasting is adopted, the following have to be
adhered to;
(i) Obtain approval from relevant Authorities and comply with

the requirement of statutory Authorities,
(ii) The position of blast holes and the size of charges shall be
such that shattering of rock beyond the caisson is
minimized,
(iii) The rock face shall not be shattered within the toe-in or bell-
out zone at the bottom of the caissons, and
(iv) The caisson opening shall be covered to prevent the

projection of fragments of material.
5.9.2.6. Rock Proving
(i) Rock proving load test machine shall be provided at site for
testing of recovered rock sample for shaft and base selected
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
by S.O..
(ii) In addition, the rock below each shall be proved before

concreting by sinking minimum ‘N’ size drill holes, as
specified in MS1056, to a minimum of 5m below the
proposed caisson base or 3 times the bell out diameter of
the caisson whichever is the greater.
(iii) Socket length shall be measured from the flattened

horizontal bedrock surface.
5.9.2.7. Inspection and record of caisson shaft and base
(i) Each caisson base shall be inspected, logged and

photographed by qualified Engineer from the Contractor
before inspection and checking by the S.O.. CV of the
Engineer from the Contractor shall be submitted for review
and approved by the S.O..
(ii) The shaft of every caisson shall be properly logged,

especially one encountering rock surface during excavation.
(iii) Prior to any concreting works, the shaft and base (for rock
only) for the caisson shall be properly cleaned by using
water jet or other approved method so that no debris or soil
stains the shaft surface or base. The base of each
completed excavation shall be carefully trimmed and levelled
to the minimum required toe level. Approval of the base of
any caisson by the S.O. shall not relieve the Contractor of
his responsibilities and obligations under the terms of the
Contract.
(iv) Photographs at 4 sides of the shaft, i.e. 0o, 90o, 180o and
360o and rock base shall be taken by the Contractor after the
cleaning works and attached together with the inspection
forms for the S.O..
(v) The shaft and base of each caisson must be approved by

S.O. before any reinforcement and concreting works are
carried out.
5.9.2.8. Stability of the excavation
(i) The shaft and base of each caisson must be approved by

carried out.
(ii) The stability of excavations for caissons shall be maintained

where necessary by linings.
(iii) Shaft lining shall be placed as soon as practicable and not

more than 24hours after each increment of excavation is
complete.
(iv) Voids between the lining and face of excavation shall be

filled with concrete of the same grade as the lining or with
others material as agreed by the S.O..
(v) Any unstable layers of subsoil encountered shall be

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
stabilized by grouting or similar methods. No further

excavation will be permitted to proceed until the stabilization
works are completed.
5.9.2.9. Dewatering
(i) The shaft and base of each caisson must be approved by

carried out.
(ii) A comprehensive Method Statement on dewatering for

caisson construction shall be submitted by the Contractor for
approval.
(iii) As a minimum measure, individual caissons shall be kept

dry during excavation and inspection by pumping from a
sump or pilot hole within each caisson as necessary.
Submersible pumps shall be used and placed in a sump not
more than 0.6m deep and approximately 0.5m diameter
sunk in advance of the main excavation. Pump operation
shall be continuous until the caisson is concreted.
(iv) The Contractor shall at all times use, to a minimum degree,

of dewatering that is required for the works to proceed. It will
be the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that draw down
outside the site does not exceed the limits as specified by
the S.O.. The Contractor’s method statement shall include
details of measures proposed to meet this requirement. All
such measures shall be subject to approval by the S.O..
5.9.2.10. Water pumped from caissons
(i) The Contractor shall at all times use, to a minimum degree,

of dewatering that is required for the works to proceed. It will
be the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that draw down
outside the site does not exceed the limits as specified by
the S.O.. The Contractor’s method statement shall include
details of measures proposed to meet this requirement. All
such measures shall be subject to approval by the S.O..
(ii) Water sample pumped from caissons shall be screened

through sedimentation or settling tank and quantities of
sediment shall be monitored to ensure that excessive fines
are not removed from the soil. Should excessive fines be
observed from any caisson, pumping from that caisson shall
cease and the S.O. notified immediately.
(iii) When required by the S.O., the Contractor shall record the
rate of pumping from the individual caissons and shall
submit two copies of the records on the following day. The
Contractor shall report immediately to the S.O. any marked
change in the rate of flow of water from any caisson.
(iv) Water pumped from caissons or the ground shall not be

discharged directly onto the ground surface without suitable
and adequate provisions for drainage being made.
(v) The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all

necessary permissions from statutory authorities for

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
discharging water into the public drainage system.
5.9.2.11. Cessation of excavation
(i) If the excavation and pumping from caissons results in

settlement outside the site of more than 25mm, or as
otherwise specified by the S.O., caisson construction and
dewatering at the appropriate locations shall immediately
cease and the S.O. notified.
(ii) The Contractor shall not recommence caisson construction

or dewatering until the construction sequence has been
reviewed and measures taken to prevent further settlement
occurring. In all cases, work shall not be recommended to
proceed without the approval of the S.O..
(iii) The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage, and

any claims arising from such damage, which may result from
settlement caused by caisson construction. The Contractor
shall make good the damage as quickly as possible.
5.9.2.12. Emergencies
(i) The Contractor shall submit Emergency Response Plan

(ERP) for review and approval by the S.O..
(ii) If the sides of a caisson start to collapse or an emergency

arises which could lead to instability of the excavation, the
Contractor shall immediately inform the S.O. and implement
measures to preserve the stability of the caisson and of
neighbouring structures and services.
5.9.2.13. Disposal of spoil
Soil removed from the excavation shall be removed from the site
and disposed off in accordance with statutory requirements.
5.9.2.14. Sealing and Scaling of caissons
(i) The Contractor shall submit Emergency Response Plan

(ERP) for review and approval by the S.O..
(ii) Leakage of groundwater through liners or into unlined shafts

of hand-dug caissons shall be stopped by a method agreed
upon by the S.O..
(iii) Loose rock on the face of unlined shaft shall be scaled off
and removed before concreting.
(iv) On completion of excavation, spoils shall be removed from

the base of caisson before concreting.
5.9.2.15. Inspection of excavations
(i) Each hole shall be inspected prior to the placing of concrete

in it. Adequate equipment shall be provided to enable the
Contractor and the S.O. to descend into the hole for the
purpose of inspection. All works shall conform to the
requirement of BS 5573: Safety Precaution in the

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
Construction of Large Diameter Boreholes for Piling and

Other Purposes.
(ii) Prior to any concreting works, the shaft and base (for rock
only) for the caisson shall be properly cleaned by using
water jet or other approved methods so that no debris or soil
stains the shaft surface or base. The base of each
completed excavation shall be carefully trimmed and levelled
to the minimum required toe level and approved by the S.O..
5.9.3. Placing of reinforcement
5.9.3.1. Joints in longitudinal bars
Reinforcement shall be such that the full strength of the bar is

effective across the joint and the joint shall be made so that there
is no relative displacement of reinforcement during construction of
the pile and the spacing of the reinforcing bars shall be
maintained in such a way that proper concreting shall not be
impeded.
5.9.3.2. Positions of reinforcement
Adequate spacer blocks, guides tubes and lifting wires shall be

provided so as to maintain the reinforcing steel in the position as
specified.
5.9.4. Concreting operations
5.9.4.1. Placing concrete
(i) All subsoil and debris shall be removed from the caisson to
the satisfaction of S.O.. No concrete shall be placed without
(ii) The method of placing and the workability of concrete shall

be such that a continuous monolithic concrete shaft of the
full section is formed.
5.9.4.2. Workability of concrete
(i) The workability of the concrete shall be determined by the

slump test as described in M.S. 26.
(ii) The suggested slump details for typical concreting situations

shall be as specified in Table C3 of this Specification. The
slump shall be measured at the time of discharge into the
borehole.
5.9.4.3. Compaction
Internal vibrators shall not be used to compact concrete unless it

can be proven that they will not cause segregation or arching of
the concrete.
5.9.4.4. Placing concrete in dry borings
(i) Approved measures shall be taken to avoid segregation and

bleeding and to ensure that the concrete at the bottom of the

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
pile is not deficient in grout.
(ii) Concrete may be poured through a funnel with a length of

tube so that the flow is directed and does not hit
reinforcement bars or the side of the hole.
5.9.5. Construction of pile heads
5.9.5.1. Water levels
Water levels shall be in accordance with sub-sections 5.7.6.1..
5.9.5.2. Cutting and preparation of pile heads
Cutting and preparation of pile heads shall be in accordance with

sub-sections 5.7.6.2..
5.9.5.3. Temporary backfilling above pile casting level
Temporary backfilling above pile casting level shall be in

accordance with sub-sections 5.7.6.3..
5.9.6. Piling records
5.9.6.1. Complete piling records shall be kept by the Contractor during

pile installation. The Contractor shall submit in duplicate the
following information to the S.O.:
(i) Signed records of all piles as the work proceeds. Individual

pile record shall be submitted not later than noon of the next
working day after the pile is installed. The signed records
shall form documented record of the work. Any unexpected
installation condition shall be noted in the record.
(ii) Upon completion, compile a record of the work as carried

out and provide As-built Drawings. The Drawings shall be
prepared and endorsed by the Licensed Surveyor.
5.9.6.2. The format of the record shall be approved by the S.O. and shall
contain, but not limited to the following information where
applicable:
(i) Caisson number.
(ii) Level of top of concreted caisson shaft referred to Principal

Datum.
(iii) Level of top concrete lining referred to Principal Datum.
(iv) Depth to base of caisson from top of concreted shaft.
(v) Date(s) and time(s) of starts and finishes of excavations and

concreting.
(vi) Minimum internal diameter of caisson lining.
(vii) Full details of any bell-out and minimum diameter of caisson

base.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
(viii) Thickness and details of concrete lining.
(ix) Description of ground excavated, and methods employed.
(x) Length and details of reinforcement.
(xi) Estimated and actual volume of concrete required to form

the pile shaft
(xii) Details of all obstructions, delays and other interruptions.
(xiii) Complete record of bedrock proving test.
(xiv) Final log and photographic record of caisson base.
(xv) Results of core test.
(xvi) All tests made on materials used in the works.
5.9.6.3. All records shall bear the names of person who records and
person who checks.
5.9.7. Safety precaution
5.9.7.1. General
The Contractor shall at all times comply with the Government

regulations for safety on work sites. The working facilities
provided and the manner in which the works are conducted shall
conform to the requirements of BS 5573: Safety Precaution in the
Construction of Large Diameter Boreholes for Piling and Other
Purposes.
5.9.7.2. Electrical Equipment
All electrical equipment shall be wired in accordance with

‘Regulations for the Electrical Equipment of Buildings’, Latest
Edition, published by the Institution of Electrical Engineers.
5.9.7.3. Caisson Shafts
(i) The Contractor shall ensure that construction of the concrete

caisson lining follows the excavation sufficiently closely to
ensure the stability of the works.
(ii) The Contractor shall ensure that the concrete caisson lining
extends a minimum of 0.25m above and adjacent
surrounding ground at all times.
(iii) The Contractor shall keep all caissons not being worked
covered at all times by a stout safety cover capable of
supporting a uniformly distributed load of 1.5kN/m2 and
preventing entry of water into the caisson. The cover shall
be attached rigidly to the top of the concrete lining to fully
cover the caisson.
(iv) If an access platform is provided at the top of the caisson the

hole through which access to the caisson is gained shall be
equipped with a stout 150mm high kicker board around the
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
full perimeter. The area adjacent to the kicker board shall be

kept clear at all times of all loose rubble, tools or other
objects which may be knocked into the caisson.
(v) The Contractor shall at all times ensure that there is a

hessian rope of minimum diameter 20mm securely fixed at
ground level and passing over a block on the frame above
the caisson and reaching the bottom of the caisson.
5.9.7.4. Ventilation
(i) The Contractor shall provide sufficient compressors, air

pumps, etc. including an adequate number of standby
spares, in order to ensure complete ventilation of all shafts
whilst work is in progress and prevent the build-up of
noxious gases or de-oxygenation.
(ii) Exhaust pipes from boring machines, winches and other

equipment shall be so positioned that no exhaust gas enters
the caisson or the intake of the air compressors supplying
the fresh air to the base of the caisson.
5.9.7.5. Lighting
The Contractor shall maintain adequate artificial lighting at all

times in all caisson shafts being worked.
5.9.7.6. Water in Caisson Shafts
The Contractor shall provide suitable methods approved by the

S.O. to ensure the safety of the works.
5.9.7.7. Access and Communications
The Contractor shall provide access to all levels of shafts at all

times whilst work is in progress and a means of communication
with workmen in the shafts of a type that gives immediate notice
to and from the surface of hazards which directly affects safety in
the shaft.
5.9.7.8. Removal of Persons from Caisson Shafts
The Contractor shall provide a means whereby persons, including

those semi-conscious or unconscious, may be removed rapidly
and safely from caissons.
5.9.7.9. Oxygen
The Contractor shall provide at all times equipment and spares to

enable oxygen to be administered to persons in an asphyxiated
condition. The Contractor shall ensure the permanent presence
on site during hours of work of an operator fully trained in the use
of this equipment.
5.10. Static Pile Load Testing
5.10.1. General
5.10.1.1. To verify the working load, the Contractor shall carry out pile load

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
test as shown on the Drawings and / or as instructed by the S.O..
5.10.1.2. The design and construction of the load application system shall
be satisfactory for the required test. These details shall be made
available prior to the commencement of testing.
5.10.2. Construction of Pile to Be Tested
5.10.2.1. Notice of Construction
The Contractor shall give at least 48 hours’ notice of

commencement of construction of any preliminary pile which is to
be tested.
5.10.2.2. Method of Construction
Each preliminary test pile shall be constructed in a manner similar

to that to be used for the construction of the working piles and by
the use of similar equipment and material. Extra reinforcement
and concrete of increased strength will be permitted in the shafts
of preliminary piles where necessary and agreed by the S.O. for
carrying out the testing.
5.10.2.3. Boring or Driving Record
For each preliminary pile which is to be tested, a detailed record

of the conditions experienced during boring or of the progress
during driving, shall be made available daily, not later than noon
on the next working day. Where soil samples are required to be
taken or in-situ tests to be made, the Contractor shall present the
results without delay.
5.10.2.4. Concrete Test Cube
Three (3) test cubes shall be made from the concrete used in the
preliminary test pile and from the concrete used for building up
the working pile. If the concrete pile is extended or capped for the
purpose of testing, a further three (3) cubes shall be made from
the corresponding batch of concrete. The cube shall be made and
tested in accordance with SECTION D: CONCRETING of this
Specification.
5.10.2.5. Cut-Off Level
(i) The cut-off level for the preliminary test pile/working piles
shall be as specified on the Drawings or as directed by the
S.O..
(ii) Where the cut-off level of working piles is below the ground
level at the time of pile installation and where it is required to
carry out a load test from that installation level, either
allowance shall be made in the determination of the twice
working load for friction which may be developed between
the cut-off level and the existing ground level, or the piling
may be sleeved appropriately or otherwise protected to
eliminate friction which can develop over the extended
length.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
5.10.2.6. Preparation for Pile Head for Testing
(i) For a pile that is tested in compression, the pile head or cap
shall be formed to give the plane surface which is normal to
the axis of the pile, sufficiently large area to accommodate
the loading and settlement measuring equipment and
adequately reinforced or protected to prevent damage from
the concentrated application of load from the loading
equipment.
(ii) For a pile that is tested in tension, means it shall be provided

for transmitting the test load axially without inducing
moments in the pile. The connection between the pile and
the loading equipment shall be constructed in such a
manner as to provide strength equal to the maximum load
which is to be applied to the pile during the test with an
appropriate factor of safety on the structural design.
5.10.2.7. Supervision
(i) The setting up of pile testing equipment shall be carried out

under competent supervision and the equipment shall be
checked to ensure that the setting-up is satisfactory before
the commencement of load test.
(ii) All tests shall be carried out only under the direction of an
experienced and competent supervisor conversant with the
test equipment and test procedures. All personnel operating
the test equipment shall have been trained in its use. The
Curriculum Vitae (CV) of Tester(s) shall be submitted 48
hours prior to testing works being carried out.
5.10.2.8. Notice of Test
The Contractor shall give at least 24 hours’ notice of the

commencement of the test. No load shall be applied to the test
pile before the commencement of the specified test procedure.
5.10.3. Protection of Testing Equipment
5.10.3.1. Protection from Weather
Throughout the test period, all equipment for measuring load and
movement and beams shall be protected from adverse effects of
sun, wind and precipitation. Temperature readings shall be taken
at the start, end and at the maximum load of each loading cycle.
5.10.3.2. Prevention of Disturbance
Construction activities and persons who are not involved in the

testing processes shall be kept at a sufficient distance from the
test location to avoid disturbance.
5.10.4. Method of Loading
5.10.4.1. Test Load
(i) The test load shall be applied in one (1) of the following
ways:

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
a) By means of a jack which obtains its reaction from

kentledge heavier than the required load.
b) By means of a jack which obtains its reaction from

tension piles or other suitable anchors.
c) By means of a jack which obtains its reaction through bi-

directional axial load from the top and bottom section of
the tested pile.
(ii) In all cases, the reaction load or its supports shall be placed
sufficiently far from the proposed test position to reduce the
influence on the results to a tolerable level. Care shall be
taken to ensure that the reaction load remains stable
throughout the test without the possibility of load tilting or
collapsing.
(iii) In addition to the reaction load, it shall be necessary to

provide a loading frame, a bearing plate, a loading column
and a hydraulic jack or other appropriate type of load
measuring device. The loading column shall be of sufficient
strength to prevent undue buckling under the maximum load.
The total weight of the kentledge or reaction force provided
shall be at least 1.2 times the maximum test load.
(iv) In all cases the Contractor shall ensure that when the
hydraulic jack and load measuring device are mounted on
the pile head, the entire system shall be stable up to the
maximum load to be applied.
(v) If in the course of carrying out a test, any unforeseen

occurrence should take place, further loading shall not be
applied until a proper engineering assessment of the
prevailing conditions has been made and steps taken to
rectify any fault.
(vi) Where an inadequacy in any part of the system might

constitute a hazard, means shall be provided to enable the
test to be controlled from a position clear of the kentledge
stack or test frame.
(vii) Where method (a) or (b) is used; The hydraulic jack, pump,
hoses, pipes, couplings and other apparatus (jack assembly)
to be operated under hydraulic pressure shall be capable to
withstand a pressure of 1.5 times the maximum pressure
used in the test without leaking. For method (c), the rated
nominal capacity of jack assembly shall exceed the
maximum anticipated jack load by at least 10%. Test
certificate shall be submitted before carrying the test.
(viii) The maximum test load expressed as a reading on the

gauge in use shall be displayed and all operators shall be
made aware of this limit.
(ix) When method (a) is used, care shall be taken to ensure that
the centre of gravity of the kentledge is on the axis of the
pile. The nearest edge of the crib supporting the kentledge
stack shall not be closer than 1300mm to the surface of the
test pile. Kentledge shall not be used for testing raked
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
pilesRefer Figure 10.1 for typical set up requirement.
(x) When method (b) is used, all anchor piles shall be at a

distance of at least three (3) pile shaft diameters from the
test pile, centre to centre, and in no case, shall they be less
than 2000mm from the test pile.
(xi) If the anchor piles are to be permanent working piles, their

levels shall be observed during application of the test load to
ensure no residual uplift occurs.
(xii) When method (c) is used,
a) Bi-directional axial compression test shall be carried out

in compliance with ASTM D8169-18 unless otherwise
approved by S.O..
b) The test shall be carried out only under the direction of

an experienced and competent supervisor conversant
with the test equipment and test procedures. All
personnel operating the test equipment shall have been
trained in its use. The Curriculum Vitae (CV) of Tester(s)
shall be submitted 48 hours prior testing works.
c) The method consists of bi-directional pile load test; the

jack load unit is installed within the pile body and bi-
directional base load test; the jack load unit is installed
at the pile base.
d) The jack load unit shall be placed in plane surface which

is normal to the axis of the pile. The elevation of the load
unit shall be located at the approved calculated
equilibrium geotechnical capacity of upper and lower
segments of the test pile as verified by a Professional
Engineer.
e) The steel bearing plates, stiffeners or equivalent as

needed to distribute the jack load evenly over the pile
cross-section.
f) The upper displacement tell-tale shall be fixed in

sufficient distance at the top section of the tested pile.
g) The lower displacement tell-tale for bi-directional pile

load test shall be fixed in sufficient distance at the
bottom section of the tested pile. Whereas the lower
displacement tell-tale for bi-directional base load test
shall be fixed at the bottom of the pile base plate.
h) The connection in between the top and bottom section of

the tested pile to the jack load unit shall be allowed for
opening mechanism at the split zone for the purpose of
testing.
i) Tell-tale or any other tests to the pile such as sonic

logging, the instrumentation pipes or cabling which is
located at the jack load unit shall be in such extendable
during the split zone gap opening during pressurizations.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
j) The protection measures such as funnel rebar or other

methods as approved by the S.O. shall be fixed to the
main rebar cage to protect the jack load unit from
damages during concreting.
k) The jack load unit shall be fully welded together with the
upper steel rebar cage. The bearing plates shall be spot-
welded with the load unit. The plate shall be made to
receive uniform load distribution prior to testing.
l) Minimum two (2) grouting pipes shall be installed

together with the jack load unit. The pipes shall be pre-
cut at the split zone of the load unit to enable the pipes
to split and allow the cement grout to flow and grouting
takes place. The sonic logging pipes may also be
treated as grouting pipes.
m) Post grouting shall be done to fill up the gap at the split

zone. Clean water shall be initially pumped to remove
the debris left at the split zone after testing. Grouting
shall start when the water returned to the nearby
grouting pipe becomes clean. Grouting operation shall
be terminated when the returned cement grout is most
likely similar to previous grout applied.
n) The test result shall be plotted as load versus

displacement curves for the upward and downward
displacement independently. The two (2) component
curves shall be utilized to construct an equivalent pile-
top load versus displacement curve.
o) To simulate compressive load, established correction

factor for shaft resistance and reduction of pile weight
shall be considered at the pile top section which is
formally subjected to tension load behaviour during bi-
directional testing. In addition, established correction
factor and elastic shortening shall be considered at the
pile top section for settlement computation due to the
load.
p) The test report shall be endorsed by a Professional

Engineer with Practicing Certificate prior to submission
to the S.O..
(xiii) Alternatively, the Contractor may propose the use of other

types, patented or otherwise, in which case the requirements
as below shall be fully complied with.
5.10.4.2. Contractor’s Load Test System
The Contractor may propose to use other different types from

those specified. The proposal shall be submitted to the S.O. at
least 90 days before the date of testing. The suitability or
adequacy of any system shall be determined by the S.O.. In the
event that the testing system proposed by the Contractor is
acceptable, the Contractor shall obtain a Professional Engineer’s
endorsement on load settlement results.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
5.10.4.3. Measurement of Load
(i) The test load shall be measured by calibrated load cell(s) or

proving ring calibrated in divisions not exceeding 1% of the
maximum load to be applied. If an electronic transducer is
used, each reading shall be immediately saved so that in
case of power failure the readings are not lost.
(ii) The load cell or proving ring to be accepted for use shall be
calibrated within the test load range without extrapolation
and certificate of calibration within a validity of 6 months
shall be made available before the load test commences.
(iii) All increments of load shall be maintained to within 1% of the

specified load.
(iv) A spherical seating or pivot bearing of appropriate size shall

be used to avoid eccentric loading. Care shall be taken to
avoid any risk of buckling of the load application and
measuring system. Load measuring and application devices
shall be in short axial length in order to secure stability. The
Contractor shall ensure that axial loading is maintained.
(v) The loading equipment shall enable the load to be increased

or decreased smoothly or to be held constant at any
required value.
5.10.4.4. Measurement of Settlement
(i) The Contractor shall provide apparatus for measuring

settlement consisting of a primary system, at least one (1)
auxiliary system for pile head and reference frame scale.
Minimum one (1) independent temporary benchmark at least
15m (unless otherwise approved by the S.O. that nearer
undisturbed and stable temporary benchmark can be
established) from the test site to monitor the settlement
reference point, shall be established. If desired, the auxiliary
system may also be referenced to these benchmarks.
(ii) All measuring devices, scales and reference points with

numbers or letters to ensure accurate data recording shall
be clearly identified.
(iii) Settlements shall be measured by use of a reference beam

supported independently of the load test pile, reaction pile or
piles supporting reaction loads. Settlements shall be
measured to the nearest 0.1mm accuracy. The reference
beams shall be protected from the effects of temperature
changes
5.10.4.5. Primary System
Reference Beams and Displacement Measuring Devices
(i) At least four (4) Linear Voltage Displacement Transducers

(LVDT) and a Readout Unit are to be used for measuring the
displacement. DC/DC–type displacement transducer having
at least 75mm of travel and a linearity of 0.5% or less shall
be used. A Readout Unit having a minimum display of three

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
(3) digits, capable of monitoring output from DC/DC – Type

LVDT shall be provided.
(ii) The measurement devices parallel to the longitudinal axis of

the test pile and the axis of load application shall be aligned.
(iii) An independent reference beam or beams shall be set up to

enable measurement of the movement of the pile to be
made to the required accuracy and shall not be interfered by
the load application system.
(iv) Reference beam supports shall be embedded securely and

firmly into the ground, at a horizontal distance of not less
than 2m from the closest face of the test pile, or 1.5m from
the nearest corner of the support crib or platform/reaction
pile, whichever is greater.
(v) A clear distance of 150mm to 300mm from the test pile to

the reference beam or any projection used to support LVDT
shall be maintained. The beam and projections should be at
about the same elevation as the attachments to the pile on
which the measuring devices will bear.
(vi) The LVDT supports to reference beam shall be attached so

as to allow the stem of each device to rest on an attachment
to the pile sides.
(vii) Hardware and pile attachment for LVDT devices shall be

mounted using materials such as brass, aluminium or 303
series stainless steel, to avoid magnetic interference which
the instruments. The pile attachments are angles, about
75mm x 100mm with the 100mm dimension projecting from
the pile. For round pile, these attachments shall be placed
on the perimeter of the pile at 120 degrees and an equal
radial distance. For pile of other cross section, the
attachments shall be placed at a convenient location as
(viii) Surfaces on which the gauge stems bear should have a

smooth finish, such as glass or sheet acrylic, attached by an
epoxy or other suitable material approved by the S.O..
(ix) Observation of any movements of the reference beam or

beams shall be made and checking of the movement of the
pile head relative to a remote reference datum shall be
made and stopped at maximum load for each loading.
Refer Figure C1 for typical set up requirement.
5.10.4.6. Auxiliary Systems
This measuring system shall consist of one (1) or more of the

following: wire, mirror and scale; surveyor’s level and target road;
or, as alternatives, electrical or optical levels.
(i) Wire, Mirror and Scale
Pile movement shall be determined by means of a single strand

of wire drawn in front of graduated scale mounted on a mirror.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
This scale, at least 150mm long and machine-divided in

graduations of 250µm, is mounted on a 75mm x 150mm mirror
with metal and glass bonding adhesive or electrical tape. The
mirror shall be attached directly to the pile oriented so that the
mirror face is parallel to the reference beam. The mirror shall be
mounted to the wire between the ends of the reference beam,
with one (1) end fixed and the other is placed over a pulley with
a weight in order to maintain tension. The wire shall be located
so that it is level and within 20mm of the mirror face.
(ii) Surveyor's Level and Target Rod
Use a level and levelling rod with a Vernier target that can
be read to 0.5mm. Determine deflections by readings on
the two fixed independent benchmarks, and on an
established scale or fixed point on the pile top.
(iii) Alternative Systems
Any other type of electrical or optical gauge yielding a

precision equivalent to the primary system is acceptable as
an alternative, provided prior written approval is obtained
from the S.O..
5.10.4.7. Tell-tale Strain Measurements
(i) When specify, strain measurements on the pile to determine

elastic shortening of the pile shall be obtained by tell-tale
strain measuring devices.
(ii) Tell-tales extensometer or vibrating strain gauges or other

suitable measuring system shall be installed according to the
drawing shown or as directed by the S.O..
5.10.5. Testing Procedure
5.10.5.1. General
Prior to the performance of any load test, the Contractor shall

submit to the S.O. for his approval, working Drawings showing
the method and equipment he proposes to use in the
performance of the load test and the measurement of
settlements. Such submission shall include design calculations
of lateral supports or other methods to be used in ensuring
against buckling. Horizontal supports to ensure bucking stability
shall be provided to the pile to be loaded whenever the ratio of
the unsupported height to the least cross-sectional dimension is
20 or more. Horizontal supports shall provide full support without
restraining the vertical movement of the pile in any way.
5.10.5.2. Maintained Load Test
The Maintained Load Test shall be carried out as follows:
(i) The Full Test Load (FTL) on a pile shall be twice the
Working Load (WL) noted on the Drawings unless otherwise
stated, or directed by S.O..
(ii) The test shall be carried out in two (2) cycles, with first cycle

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
test up to working load and second cycle test up to full test

load as specified in Table C4 of this Specification.
(iii) The load shall be applied in increment of 25% of the working

load. Each increment of load shall be applied as smoothly
and as expeditiously as possible. Settlement readings and
time observations shall be taken before and after each new
load increment.
(iv) The minimum period for maintaining a load at each

increment before reaching the working load or test load is 30
minutes. A further increment of load shall be applied when
rate of settlement is less than 0.05mm in 15 minutes.
(v) Time-settlement readings shall be taken at 2, 8, 15 and 30

minutes, and at 15 minutes interval thereafter. A time-
settlement graph shall be plotted to indicate when the rate of
settlement of 0.05mm in 15 minutes is reached before load
increment is applied.
(vi) The working load shall be decreased in two (2) equal stages,
and time-settlement readings shall be as specified a
foresaid, until the rate of settlement is less than 0.05mm in
15 minutes. At least 30 minutes interval shall be allowed
between the unloading decrements while minimum one (1)
hour shall be allowed when unloading to zero load.
(vii) The maximum working load in first cycle shall be maintained

for a minimum of 6 hours and time-settlement readings shall
be taken at regular intervals of every 15 minutes for the first
two (2) hours and every hour thereafter.
(viii) The maximum test load shall then be maintained for a

minimum of 24 hours, and time-settlement readings shall be
taken at regular intervals for every 15 minutes for the first
two (2) hours and every hour thereafter.
(ix) The maximum test load shall be decreased in four (4) equal
stages, and time-settlement readings shall be as specified a
foresaid, until the rate of settlement is less than 0.05mm in
15 minutes. At least 30 minutes interval shall be allowed
between the unloading decrements while minimum one (1)
hour shall be allowed when unloading to zero load.
(x) If large discrepancies occur between different measurement

system in sub-section 5.10.4.5. and 5.10.4.6. the test shall
be halted and the cause for the discrepancy corrected. The
test shall be restarted from the beginning in this instance.
(xi) Settlement readings shall be taken immediately after and

before every load increment is applied or removed.
Refer Table C4 for Load Increments and Minimum Holding

Time.
Full test data, complete field test records and results from the readout unit
shall be jointly signed by the S.O.’s representative and the Contractor’s

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
authorised agent and submit to the S.O. immediately upon completion of the
load test. The submission shall also consist of the following:
(i) Stage of Loading
(ii) Period for which the load was held
(iii) Final load and load increment
(iv) Maximum settlement
These are to be plotted as load versus settlement and load - settlement

versus time graphs.
5.10.6.1. Interpretation of Test Results
The S.O.’s interpretation and conclusions on the test results

shall be final. Unless otherwise specified, the pile so tested shall
be deemed to have failed if:
(i) The total settlement under the Working Load exceeds

12.50mm; or
(ii) The total settlement under twice the Working Load exceeds
38.0mm, or 10% of pile diameter / width whichever is the
lower value, or
(iii) The residual settlement after removal of the test load at

working load exceeds [(diameter of pile or diagonal width for
non-circular pile / 120) + 4]mm or 12.50mm whichever is the
lower value; or
(iv) For pile longer than 30m, the limit for maximum allowable
settlement (i) and (ii) above can be increased by 2.2% for
every meter length of pile beyond 30m.
5.10.7. Completion of a Test
5.10.7.1. Removal of Test Equipment
(i) On completion of a test, all measuring equipment and load

application devices shall be dismantled and checked. All
other test equipment, including kentledge, beams and
supporting structures shall be removed from the test pile
location. Measuring and other demountable equipment shall
be stored in a safe manner so that it is available for further
tests, if required, or removed from site.
(ii) Temporary tension piles and ground anchorages shall be cut

off below ground level and all cut-off materials removed from
the site. The ground shall be made good to the original
commencing surface level.
5.10.7.2. Preliminary Test Pile Head
Unless otherwise specified, the head of each preliminary test pile

shall be cut off below ground level, and all cut-off materials
removed from the site. The ground shall be made good to the
original commencing surface level.
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
5.11. High Strain Dynamic Pile Testing
5.11.1. General
5.11.1.1. The Dynamic pile testing using Pile Driving Analyzer (PDA)
equipment is a high strain non-destructive load test method which
can be performed during initial pile driving and during pile restrike
to provide dynamic analyses using Case Pile Wave Analysis
Program (CAPWAP) or equivalent and Wave Equation analyses
programs approved by S.O.. The analyses programs shall be
performed for the purposes of obtaining ultimate pile bearing
capacity, pile stresses, pile integrity, and pile driving system
performance. PDA testing is undertaken in conformance with
latest ASTM Standard D-4945.
5.11.1.2. The Contractor shall supply all material, equipment, and labour to
perform the dynamic monitoring. The Contractor shall obtain the
dynamic measurements with the PDA of monitor piles and furnish
the necessary dynamic data to the S.O..
5.11.2. Construction of Pile Head to be Tested
5.11.2.1. Driven Concrete piles
For a concrete pile subjected to PDA testing, the original pile

head is to be used. For a damaged pile head, it shall be cut off
square at sound concrete, and all loose particles shall be
removed by wire brushing, followed by washing with water. Care
shall be exercised to ensure that the reinforcement in the pile
head is not in any way damaged. Any damaged reinforcement
shall be made good to the satisfaction of the S.O.. The head shall
be replaced with concrete of similar grade or higher.
5.11.2.2. Cast In-Situ Piles
(i) For cast in-situ piles, a spiral welded steel casing of at least
6mm thickness, same diameter as the cast in-situ pile and
one diameter in depth is used to prepare the pile head for
testing. Concrete of the same quality or better is used to
build up the pile head with the finished level just above the
steel casing (with the steel casing forming part of the pile
head). Care should be taken so that there is no cold joint
between the build up pile head and the pile.
(ii) The completed pile surface shall be flat and perpendicular to

the applied force.
5.11.2.3. Steel pile
The pile top shall be flat.
5.11.3. Method of Testing
5.11.3.1. Equipment and Personnel Qualification
(i) The dynamic monitoring shall be performed using a Pile

Driving Analyzer (PDA) system or equivalent approved by
S.O.. All equipment necessary for the dynamic monitoring
such as sensors, cables or wireless transmitters, etc., shall

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
be furnished by Contractor and well calibrated at the time of

testing. The equipment shall conform to the requirements of
the latest ASTM D-4945.
(ii) Dynamic testing shall be performed by an independent

specialist firm approved by S.O..
5.11.3.2. Preconstruction Wave Equation Analysis
(i) Wave Equation Analysis shall be carried out to access the

ability of the proposed driving system to install the pile to the
required capacity and desired penetration depth within the
allowable driving stresses.
(ii) Ten working days prior to testing, the Contractor shall submit
the Wave Equation Summary Report and the report shall be
endorsed by Professional Engineer with Practicing
Certificate and submitted to the S.O. for review and
approval.
(iii) The output shall be:
a) In the form of a relationship between pile capacity and

driving behaviour
b) An estimate of final set (mm/blow)
c) Relationship between driving stresses in the pile and

penetration resistance.
(iv) Approval of the proposed driving system by the S.O. shall be

based upon the wave equation analyses indicating that the
proposed driving system can develop a pile capacity of twice
the pile design load at driving resistance. The hammer
should also be sized or adjustable such that the penetration
per 10 blows at the required ultimate capacity does not
exceed 25mm.
(v) A new pile driving system, modifications to existing system,

or new pile installation procedures shall be proposed by the
Contractor if the pile installation stresses calculated by Wave
Equation Analysis or derived from the PDA measurements
exceed the maximum values specified by the S.O. or shown
in Table C5.
5.11.3.3. Apparatus for Applying Impact Force
(i) The driving apparatus shall be positioned so that the impact

is applied axially to the head of the pile and concentric with
the pile. The device used to apply the impact force should
provide sufficient energy to cause pile penetration during the
impact event adequate to mobilize the desired capacity.
(ii) Conventional pile driving hammer, drop weight, or similar

impact device based on predictive dynamic analysis,
experience, or both shall be approved by S.O.. The impact
shall not result in dynamic stresses that will damage the pile.
The S.O may require cushions, variable control of the impact
energy (drop height, stroke, fuel settings, hydraulic pressure,
etc.), or both, to prevent excessive stress in the pile during
all phases of pile testing.
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
5.11.3.4. Gauges for Obtaining Dynamic Measurement
(i) Dynamic measurement shall be carried out by attaching at

least two strain transducers and two accelerometers for pile
sizes less than 1000mm and at least four strain transducers
and four accelerometers for pile larger than 1000mm
diameter.
(ii) Care shall be taken to ensure that the gauges are securely
attached at least 1.5 pile diameter from the pile head for pile
diameter less than 1000mm and at least 1 pile diameter for
pile exceeding 1000mm. The gauges shall be attached
above the existing ground level and at opposite sides for a
pair of gauges and at every quarter of pile circumference for
two (2) pairs of gauges.
(iii) The gauges shall be calibrated to an accuracy of 2%

throughout the applicable measurement range. The
frequency of calibration is as per stated in the latest ASTM
D-4945. If damage is suspected during use, the gauges shall
be replaced.
5.11.3.5. Apparatus for Recording, Processing and Displaying Data
(i) The Contractor shall provide apparatus for measuring the

acceleration and strain of the pile head and the energy
transferred to the pile. The signals from the transducers
during the impact event, shall be transmitted to the PDA to
allow determination of the force and velocity versus time.
(ii) A cable or wireless transmission which connects the sensors

near the pile head with the PDA shall be located at safe
distance from the pile, but not more than 100m from the pile.
(iii) The PDA shall include a screen for displaying the force and
velocity, a hard disk for obtaining a record for future
analysis, and a means to process the data.
(iv) The apparatus shall have the capability of making an internal

calibration check of force, velocity and time scales. No error
shall exceed 2% of the maximum signal expected.
5.11.4. Testing Procedures
5.11.4.1. General
(i) Dynamic Test shall be conducted on test piles as selected

by the S.O.. The test shall be carried out in accordance with
sub-section 6.1.4.2..
(ii) Prior to the performance of any dynamic test, the Contractor

shall submit the specialist testing firm company profile and
working drawings showing the method statement and
equipment proposed to be used in the performance of
conducting the test together with all relevant calibration
certificates to the S.O. for approval. The S.O. may request
additional piles to be dynamically tested if the hammer
and/or driving system is replaced or modified, the pile type
or installation procedures are modified, the pile capacity

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
requirements are changed, unusual blow counts or

penetrations are observed, or any other piling behaviour
differing from normal installation. The Contractor shall bear
the cost and time for all necessary additional test.
5.11.4.2. Dynamic Load Test
The Dynamic Load Test shall be carried out as follows:
(i) Driven Piles
a) Continuous pile monitoring as indicated in the Drawing

or as requested by the S.O..
b) Dynamic pile test shall be conducted on piled

foundations at the end of driving or at restrike for
selected piles.
c) The pile shall to be at least 3 diameters or 100mm

above the ground level. The Contractor shall drill and
prepare holes for sensor attachment near the pile top
after the pile has been driven to the penetration depths
as specified on Drawing.
d) The Contractor shall supply and operate the piling

hammer to induce a driving force on to the pile. Dynamic
measurement of force and velocity shall be processed
by the PDA to give immediate visual and permanent
record on-site.
(ii) Cast In-Situ Piles
a) Dynamic pile test shall be conducted on cast in-situ piles

at 28 days after pile concreting. Piles which are to be
tested prior the 28 days shall be proven that it has
achieved the required concrete compressive strength
and subjected to approval by the S.O.. However, no
testing shall be allowed for piles less than 14 days after
concreting.
b) The pile shall be casted so as to leave a height of at

least one (1) diameter above the ground or excavated
level.
c) Contractor shall supply and operate the drop hammer to

induce a driving force on to the pile. Dynamic
measurement of force and velocity shall be processed
by the PDA to give immediate visual and permanent
record on-site. The proposed hammer weight shall be at
least 1% to 2% of the maximum test load.
5.11.5.1. Full test data, complete field test records and results from the
readout unit shall be jointly signed by the S.O.’s representative
and the Contractor’s authorised agent and submit to the S.O.
immediately upon completion of the Dynamic Test.
5.11.5.2. The Contractor shall submit preliminary results within three (3)
days after completion of the test to the S.O..
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
5.11.5.3. The Contractor shall also submit the raw data file (W01) or
equivalent, upon completion of the test at the site.
5.11.5.4. For all testing, CAPWAP analysis or equivalent shall be carried

out. The S.O.'s acceptance of the interpretation and conclusion
based on the results submitted shall be final.
5.11.6. CAPWAP Computer Analysis Programme and Final Report
5.11.6.1. The final analysis and report shall consist of matches of forces
and velocities, resistance distribution, static simulation and
complete tables of numeric values. The Final Report shall be
submitted to the S.O. within at least 7 working days upon
completion of field testing. The specialist Contractor shall
complete and provide the following:
(i) Static Capacity of pile including the toe resistance and shaft
friction
(ii) Hammer Efficiency
(iii) Integrity of Pile
(iv) Case Damping Factor
(v) Predicted Load Vs Settlement Plots
(vi) Match Quality
(vii) Slack Value, efficiency & location (if used)
(viii) Force Wave Traces of measured and computed
(ix) Shaft Resistance Distribution
5.11.6.2. A PDA plot indicating all the gauges used for the testing and all
the output of the field results and the subsequent signal matching
on the same blow for all the piles are to be included in the Test
Report. These reports should only be prepared by an engineer
who has achieved Advanced Level or higher.
5.11.6.3. The report shall contain complete analysis, results and their
interpretation with Professional Engineer with Practicing
Certificate’s endorsement.
5.11.7.1. On completion of a test, all measuring equipment and load

application devices shall be dismantled and removed from the
test pile.
5.11.7.2. Unless otherwise specified, the head of each test pile shall be cut
off below ground level, and cut-off materials removed from the
site. The ground shall be made good to the original commencing
surface level.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
6. Subterranean Termites Treatment
6.1. The Contractor shall only appoint termite management company (TMC) that has
adequate equipment, competency and skilled workers to perform expeditiously. The
Contractor shall also ensure that the TMC engage workers who are licensed to apply
the termiticide by the relevant authorities.
6.2. All methods of application and chemicals to be used for the treatment of subterranean
termite infestation shall be in accordance to MS 8215: Protection of Buildings against
Subterranean Termites - CP for Prevention, Detection and Treatment of Infestation.
6.3. The Contractor shall submit a termite management programme and provide the
following in writing:
6.3.1. A termite infestation report;
6.3.2. Details of methods proposed and termiticides to be used.
6.4. The Contractor’s termite management company shall submit the above proposal with
the Material Safety Data Sheet, product label and brochure indicating the termiticide to
be used to the S.O.’s for approval.
6.5. Termiticide chemicals shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendation and label instructions prior to the pouring of concrete to construct the
ground slab or for binding. Notwithstanding the manufacturer’s recommendation, the
minimum surface application rate shall be five (5) litres/m 2 on all ground floor built-up
areas including apron areas, and also on all areas extending one (1) m beyond the
perimeter drain all around the building. In addition, termiticide chemical shall be
sprayed on interfaces between the concrete ground beam and the hardcore at a
minimum rate of one (1) litre/m.
6.6. Treatment shall not be performed just before or after heavy rain, unless the area to be
treated can be physically protected to avoid leaching and runoff before the termiticide
chemical has bound to the soil.
6.7. Immediately after spraying the chemical, all surfaces exposed to direct sunlight or rain
shall be covered with an impervious black PVC sheet of minimum thickness of 0.08
mm to reduce the loss of chemical by UV light, alkaline wet concrete, leaching and
runoff caused by rain on exposed treated soil. In the case of areas receiving blinding,
the coverings shall be removed immediately prior to the placement of the blinding
concrete.
6.8. As soon as practicable after the completion of anti-termite treatment and prior to the
issuance of the Certificate of Practical Completion, the Contractor shall submit to the
S.O., the anti-termite treatment specialist’s Guarantee against any termite attack to
the Works which may arise during a period of two (2) years from the date of Practical
Completion of Works due to any defect, fault or ineffective anti-termite treatment. The
terms of the Guarantee shall be such as shall be approved by the S.O..
6.9. The Contractor shall verify the ground-water table before soil treatment. For this
purpose, the Contractor shall excavate trial holes of not less than 0.5 meter deep
measured from the level below the level of the soil to be treated. The restriction to soil
treatment by virtue of this requirement shall not in any way affect or diminish the
Contractor from any indemnity against termite attacks.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
7. Damp Proof Membrane (DPM)
7.1. DPM shall be installed below the ground concrete floor level or as shown on the
Drawings to prevent the rise of moisture or damp through the structure flooring.
7.2. Unless otherwise specified in the Drawings, the DPM shall be extruded polythene film
with a nominal thickness of 0.5mm. The nominal weight shall not be less than
0.45kg/m² and the tensile strength shall be not less than 44MPa in accordance with
ISO 527.
7.3. Unless the application surface is smooth it shall be blinded with compacted soft sand
to guarantee a soft bed, free from any objects that may puncture the membrane
during the installation or when concrete is applied.
7.4. When laying two (2) sheets of DPM, a minimum of 150mm overlap shall be provided
between each of the sheets and sealed with 100mm wide jointing tape.
7.5. Any punctures in the membrane shall be patched with sheets of identical thickness
lapped at least 150mm away from the perforation edge and sealed with double sided
pressure sensitive tape.
7.6. The DPM shall be covered with a protective layer or screed as soon as possible after
the membrane has been installed. Care shall be taken when applying concrete or
screed on top the DPM to avoid stretching or the DPM being displaced.
8. Damp Proof Course (DPC)
DPC shall comply with BS 8215: CP for design and installation of DPC in masonry
construction and as specified in SECTION E: WALL SYSTEM.
9. Filling Under Floors, Aprons Etc.
Filling shall be provided and laid under floors, aprons, etc. where required. Filling shall be of
suitable material as specified hereinbefore, deposited in layers not exceeding 155mm loose
thickness, and each layer well watered where necessary, rammed and compacted. No clay
shall be used for filling under floors and aprons.
10. Hardcore
Where shown and required, approved hardcore consisting of good, sound broken bricks or
stones shall be provided and laid to the thickness shown on the Drawings, well rammed,
compacted and blinded with sand. All hardcore shall be well watered immediately prior to
the depositing of concrete thereon.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
Table C1. Plate Bearing Test – Load Increments and Minimum Holding Time
No. Load (% of Time No. Load (% of Time

working Interval working Interval
load) (minute) load) (minute)
1. 20 15 20. 200 120
2. 40 15 21. 160 15
3. 60 15 22. 120 15
4. 80 15 23. 80 15
5. 100 120 24. 40 15
6. 80 15 25. 0 15
7. 60 15 26. 40 15
8. 40 15 27. 80 15
9. 20 15 28. 120 15
10. 0 15 29. 160 15
11. 20 15 30. 180 15
12. 40 15 31. 240 15
13. 60 15 32. 280 15
14. 80 15 33. 300 120
15. 100 15 34. 240 15
16. 120 15 35. 160 15
17. 140 15 36. 80 15
18. 160 15 37. 0 15
19. 180 15
Note: The rate of settlement for each load increment should be based on the preliminary test

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
Table C2. Specification of Precast Concrete Piles (after MS1314)
Minimum Minimum
Piles Method of
Concrete Cement
Minimum Longitudinal Reinforcement Installatio
Strength Content
Type Class n
(N/mm2) (kg/m3)
Hammer
M 45 1.2 % of cross sectional area 400
driven
RC
Hammer
J 45 1.0 % of cross sectional area 400
driven
Minimum effective prestressed of 4 Hammer
A 60 420
Spun N/mm2 driven
pile Minimum effective prestressed of 5 Hammer
B 60 420
N/mm2 driven
C 60 420
N/mm2 driven
X 60 420
N/mm2 driven
PC
Y 60 420
N/mm2 driven
Minimum effective prestressed of 3.5 Hammer
1 60 420
N/mm2 driven
PCS
Minimum effective prestressed of 3.5
2 55 420 Jacked-in
N/mm2
RCS Hammer
1 45 1.0 % of cross sectional area 400
driven
2 45 0.8 % of cross sectional area 400 Jacked-in
NOTES:
Concrete strength means characteristic compressive strength at 28 days.
The nominal sizes and length for each class of piles are specified in Parts 3, 4, 5 or 6 of Malaysian Standard, whichever
relevant.
Definitions:
Precast reinforced concrete square pile (RC pile)
A pile made of concrete cast in a uniform four-sided cross section before driving into the ground. It shall be suitably
reinforced mainly with steel bars.
Precast prestressed concrete square pile (PC pile)
A pile described in definition No. 1 but suitably reinforced mainly with prestressing steel.
Precast pretensioned spun concrete pile (Spun pile)
A hollow cylindrical pile made of concrete cast by centrifugal spinning before driving into the ground. It shall be suitably
reinforced mainly with pretensioned prestressing steel.
Small prestressed concrete square pile (PCS pile)
A small PC pile for sizes 200 mm and less.
Small reinforced concrete square pile (RCS pile)
A small RC pile for sizes less than 200 mm.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
Table C3. Slump Range for Typical Concreting Situations
Slump Range
Typical Conditions of Use
(mm)
Placed into water-free unlined bore. Widely spaced reinforcement leaving
75 to 125
room for free movement between bars.
Where reinforcement is not spaced widely enough to give free movement
between bars.
Where casting level of concrete is within the casing. 100 to 175
Where pile diameter is less than 600 mm.
150 to
Where concrete is to be placed by tremie under water or drilling fluid.
collapse
Table C4. Static Load Test – Load Increments and Minimum Holding Time
LOAD INCREMENTS AND MINIMUM PERIODS OF OBSERVATION

Load Cycles Load Increment (% WL) Minimum Holding Time
0
25 30 minutes*
50 30 minutes
1st cycle
75 30 minutes
100 6 Hours**
50 30 minutes
0 60 minutes
25 30 minutes
50 30 minutes
75 30 minutes
100 30 minutes
125 30 minutes
2nd cycle 150 30 minutes
175 30 minutes
200 24 Hours***
150 30 minutes
100 30 minutes
50 30 minutes
0 60 minutes
NOTES
* Time-settlement readings shall be taken at 2, 8, 15 and 30 minutes, and at 15 minutes interval thereafter.
**Time-settlement readings shall be taken at regular intervals of every 15 minutes for the first 2 hours and
every hour thereafter during load holding time at working load.
***Time-settlement readings shall be taken at regular intervals for every 15 minutes for the first 2 hours and
every hour thereafter during load holding time at test load.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
Table C5. Typical Allowable Driving Stresses
Tension Stress
Pile Material Compression Stress Tension Stress (psi)
(MPa)
Steel 0.9 Fy 0.9 Fy 0.9 Fy
Prestressed Concrete 0.85 f'c - fpe 3 (f'c )1/2 + fpe 0.25 (f'c )1/2 + fpe
Precast Concrete* 0.85 f'c 0.70 fy (As / Ac) 0.70 fy (As / Ac)
Timber 3 σa 3 σa 3 σa
*Allows for tension cracks; for uncracked section allow prestressed concrete tension stress with f pe = 0.
Fy = Steel Yield Strength
f'c = Concrete Compressive Strength (MPa or psi)
fpe = Effective Prestress (after losses) (MPa or psi)
As = Reinforcement Steel Cross Sectional Area
Ac = Concrete Cross Sectional Area
fy = Reinforcement Steel Yield Strength
σa = Allowable Timber Design Stress
Table C6. Tests for Bentonite Drilling Fluids
Stages
Property Fresh Ready Before Test
Units
for re- concreting Equipment
use
Density g/ml < 1.10 < 1.25 < 1.15 Mud balance
Marsh viscosity
sec 32 to 50 32 to 60 32 to 50 Marsh funnel
(946 ml)
Fluid loss (30
ml < 30 < 50 NA Filter press
min)
pH 7 to 11 7 to 12 NA pH meter
Sand content % NA NA <4 Sand content set
Filter Cake mm <3 <6 NA Filter Press
Table C7. Tests for Polymer Drilling Fluids
Property Stages Test

Units
Before concreting Equipment
Density g/ml ≤ 1.1 Mud balance
Marsh viscosity
sec 32 to 140 Marsh funnel
(946 ml)
pH 7 to 12 pH meter
Sand content % ≤1 Sand content set

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
Figure C1. Plan View of Typical Pile Load Test Set Up

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
APPENDIX C/1
Bending Strength for Precast Concrete Piles
Pile Body Strength Test
General
Bending strength test on the pile body shall be done to determine the ability of the pile to
withstand the cracking bending moment (Mc) and the ultimate bending strength (Mu). The
bending strength test of pile body shall be made by the application of vertical load P to the
centre of the span, on the pile laid on two (2) supports which has a span equal to 3/5 of its
length.
The applied bending moment shall be calculated from the following equation: -
1 P  3L 
M= WL +  − 1
Where, 40 4 5 
M is the applied bending moment (kNm);
W is the weight of pile (kN);
L is the length of pile (m); and
P is the applied load (kN)
The cracking bending moment (Mc)

The pile shall be designed to withstand the cracking bending moment calculated based on the
maximum allowable crack width as shown in Table 1. The pile is considered to have passed the
requirement to withstand the cracking bending moment if when subjected to a test load equal to
the cracking load (Pc) corresponding to the appropriate Mc, no crack exceeding the values in
Table 1 occurs. The calculated values of Mc are given in Table 2, Table 3 and Table 4.
Table 1: Maximum Allowable Crack Width
Types of pile Maximum crack width (mm)

1 RC pile 0.20
2 Spun pile 0.05
3 PC and PCS pile 0.10
4 RCS pile 0.20
The ultimate bending moment (Mu)

The pile shall be tested to the largest applied load (Pmax) until the pile failure occurs or until the
applied load slightly exceeds the minimum ultimate load (Pmin-u) which corresponds to the
minimum ultimate bending strength, whichever comes first.
The minimum ultimate bending strength (Pmin-u) is obtained by multiplying the cracking bending
moment (Mc) by the factor ‘f’ as given in.
The pile is considered to have passed the bend test if the pile does not fail when subjected to
Pmin-u load.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
Testing
Apparatus setup
The pile manufacturer shall design and fabricate a suitable set-up for carrying out the bend test.
The test shall be carried out using any suitable equipment of sufficient capacity and capable of
applying the loads continuously and vertically.
The loading arrangement and the device for applying the loads shall consist of two supporting
rollers and two load-applying rollers as in Figure 1.
All rollers shall be manufactured from steel and shall have a circular cross-section with a
diameter of 20 mm to 120 mm; the rollers shall be at least 20 mm longer than the width of the
test specimen. All rollers except one shall be capable of rotating around their axes and of being
inclined in a plane normal to the longitudinal axis of the test specimen. All rollers shall be
adjusted in their correct positions with all distances having an accuracy of ± 5 mm. Suitable
safety precaution should be taken to ensure that the rollers do not fall off while adjustment is
made and during the testing.
Figure 1- Loading Method
Rate of loading
The load shall be applied at the rate of (0.06 ± 0.04) N/mm2s using suitable equipment which
shall be capable of applying the load uniformly without shock using manual or automatic
control.
Load pacers
If the equipment is not equipped with a device to maintain, automatically, the specified rate of
increase of load on the specimen, a load pacer shall be fitted or alternatively the control shall
be done by manual method to ensure the rate of loading as described in the paragraph above
is complied. If the pacer has a scale, this scale shall be basically linear such that 1 mm
represents not more than 100 N/s. Over the operating range of the scale the accuracy shall be
within ± 5 %.
NOTE. The pacer may incorporate a scale with an indicator or alternatively, it may be, for
example, a marked disc or pointer, which rotates at the rate at which, the load pointer should
move on the load scale being used. If the pacer is fitted with a variable speed control or has
preset speeds, then once the variable speed control has been set, or preset speed has been
chosen, the pacer speed shall remain within ± 5 % of the specified speed over the operating
range. Alternatively if the rate of loading is controlled manually then the manufacturer shall
prepare the table of loading application against time.
Load scale indicators or digital displays
The equipment shall be provided with either: -
a) Easily read dials or scales; or

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
b) Electrical load indicators, which shall include a visual display.

These load scale indicators or digital displays shall be calibrated by an accredited laboratory.
Test specimens
Test specimens shall be selected randomly from piles casted and results shall be properly
documented for inspection. The number of piles to be sampled is to be decided in accordance
with the agreement between the parties concerned.
Procedure
1. Prior to testing, select a suitable load and time increment for a selected loading rate for
particular hydraulic equipment such that it will facilitate inspection of the pile at the calculated
crack load and at the required minimum ultimate load.
2. Check the specimens thoroughly for initial crack before testing. Wipe clean the bearing
surfaces of the supporting and loading rollers.
3. Place the test specimen on the support rollers, correctly centred with the longitudinal axis of
the specimen at right angles to the rollers. The trowelled surface direction shall be normal to
the direction of loading and the moulded surface is in tension (see Figure 1). The moulded
surface may not therefore be orientated with its position in the structure. For Spun piles, the
test specimen can be placed at any surface position. Do not use packing between the
specimen and the rollers.
4. Place the loading equipment and the load applying rollers correctly in the testing setup. Do
not begin to apply the load until all loading and supporting rollers are in even contact with the
test specimen.
5. Apply the load steadily and without shock at a rate of (0.06 ± 0.04) N/mm2s. Choose the
lower loading rates for low strength concrete and the higher loading rates for high strength
concrete (i.e. for RC Piles, fcu more than 45 N/mm2).
6. Once the loading rate has been adjusted, maintain the rate of loading without change until
the applied crack load (Pc) corresponding to crack moment (Mc) from the respective tables 2, 3
and 4 as shown below is reached. Then hold the load for a sufficient time to inspect the pile for
possible cracking. If crack is present, it shall be checked by means of the test crack measuring
gauge and crack width and the location shall be recorded.
7. After step 5.6, continue the loading at the same uniform rate until failure occurs or when the
applied load is slightly greater than the minimum ultimate load (Pmin-u), whichever comes first.
The minimum ultimate load (Pmin-u) is a value corresponding to the value of Mc multiplied by
the factor f from the respective tables 2, 3 and 4 as shown below.
8. If pile failure comes first, the test specimen is considered fail. Record the maximum load
(Pmax) applied. Pmax is the maximum applied load (kN), if and when pile failure occurs during
the bend test.
9. If the pile does not fail, and when the applied load is slightly greater than Pmin-u is reached,
then hold the load for sufficient time to allow for inspection of pile body for cracking. If crack is
present, it shall be checked by means of the test crack-measuring gauge and crack width and
location shall be recorded.
10. For record purposes, record all the deflection of test specimen shown by dial gauge during
loading and unloading.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
Table 2 - Cracking Bending Moment (Mc) and Factor ‘f’ for Precast Reinforced Concrete
Square Piles (RC Piles)
Nominal Pile Size Cracking Bending Moment, Mc (kN-m) ‘f’

(mm x mm) Class M Class J Class M Class J
200 x 200 8.3 7.3
1.5
225 x 225 - -
250 x 250 13.1 11.6
1.8
275 x 275 - -
300 x 300 22.1 19.6
325 x 325 - -
350 x 350 33.7 29.8
2.0
375 x 375 - -
400 x 400 47.9 42.5
450 x 450 65.0 57.8
Table 3 - Cracking Bending Moment (Mc) And Factor ‘F’ For Precast Pretensioned Spun
Concrete Piles (Spun Piles)
Nominal Minimum Concrete Effective

Cracking Bending Factor
Diameter Class Strength Prestress
Moment (Mc) (kNm) 'f'
(mm) (N/mm2) (N/mm2)
250 B 60 12 1.5 5.0
300 A 60 17 1.5 4.0
B 60 20 1.5 5.0
350 A 60 26 1.5 4.0
B 60 30 1.5 5.0
400 A 60 38 1.5 4.0
B 60 43 1.5 5.0
C 60 54 1.8 7.0
450 A 60 53 1.5 4.0
B 60 60 1.5 5.0
C 60 76 1.8 7.0
500 A 60 74 1.5 4.0
B 60 84 1.5 5.0
C 60 106 1.8 7.0
600 A 60 123 1.5 4.0
B 60 141 1.5 5.0
C 60 177 1.8 7.0
700 A 60 191 1.5 4.0
B 60 218 1.5 5.0
C 60 273 1.8 7.0
800 A 60 278 1.5 4.0
B 60 318 1.5 5.0
C 60 399 1.8 7.0
900 A 60 390 1.5 4.0
B 60 445 1.5 5.0
C 60 558 1.8 7.0
1000 A 60 527 1.5 4.0
B 60 601 1.5 5.0
C 60 755 1.8 7.0
1200 A 60 853 1.5 4.0
B 60 973 1.5 5.0
C 60 1217 1.8 7.0

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
Table 4: Cracking Bending Moment (Mc) And Factor ‘F’ For Precast Prestressed
Concrete Square Piles –Class Pc-X, Class Pc-Y, Small Piles
Minimum Minimum
Size Cracking Bending
Class of Concrete Effective
(mm) Moment, Mc Factor 'f'
Pile Strength Prestress
(kNm)
(N/mm2) (N/mm2)
PCS-1 60 3.5 2.9 1.5
125
PCS-2 55 3.5 2.9 1.5
PCS-1 60 3.5 4.9 1.5

150
PCS-2 55 3.5 1.5 1.5
PCS-1 60 3.5 7.8 1.5

175
PCS-2 55 3.5 7.8 1.5
PCS-2 55 3.5 11.7 1.5
200 PC-X 60 5.0 13.7 1.5
PC-Y 60 7.0 16.4 1.7
PC-X 60 5.0 26.5 1.5

250
PC-Y 60 7.0 31.7 1.7
PC-X 60 5.0 45.2 1.5

300
PC-Y 60 7.0 54.2 1.7
PC-X 60 5.0 70.9 1.5

350
PC-Y 60 7.0 85.2 1.7
PC-X 60 5.0 104.5 1.5

400
PC-Y 60 7.0 125.9 1.7
PC-X 60 5.0 147.0 1.5

450
PC-Y 60 7.0 177.4 1.7

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION D: CONCRETING PAGE
1. General D/1
2. Material D/5
3. Concrete Conformity and Identity Testing D/8
4. Handling of Concrete D/15
5. Construction with Concrete D/20
6. Steel Reinforcement D/26
7. Formwork and Surface Finish for Structure D/29
8. Mass and Lean Concrete D/36
9. Building Accuracy D/36
10. Apparatus D/36
11. Precast Concrete Works D/37
12. Other Concrete Works D/39

~
No. Keluaran 01
SECTION D: CONCRETING No. Pindaan 00
JKR MALAYSIA Muka Surat D/1
1. General
This section shall apply to the construction of all structures or parts of structures to be
composed of concrete with or without steel reinforcement. The work shall be carried out
all in accordance with this specification and the lines, levels, grades, dimensions and
cross-sections shown on the Drawings and as required by the S.O ..
1.1. Classification of Concrete Mixes
Concrete mixes are classified into designed concrete, prescribed concrete and
proprietary concrete.
1.1.1. Designed Concrete
1.1.1.1. Designed concrete shall comply with MS EN 206, MS 523-2, MS

523-3 and the drawings. The exposure classes, durability
recommendations, minimum cement content and maximum free
water to cement ratio to be used shall be as shown on Table D9,
Table D10, Table D11 and Table D12. Durability
recommendation for buildings is specified in Table D9 and Table
D10.
1.1.1.2. Designed concrete may be produced at a certified concrete plant

or a non-certified concrete plant.
(i) A certified concrete plant is certified by an agency that is

accredited by Department of Standards Malaysia or
certification body complying with MS /SOI/EC 17065.
(ii) A non-certified concrete plant is not certified by an agency

that is accredited by Department of Standards Malaysia
or certification body complying with MS /SOI/EC 17065
due to its temporary set up based on the nature of the site.
1.1.1.3. The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements:
(i) Notify the S.O. the name of the supplier, location of the
plant, journey time taken to transport the concrete to the
site and production capacity of the plant.
(ii) Submit a designed concrete report covering all concrete

mixes to the S.O. for approval. The designed concrete shall
comply with the requirements specified in Table D9, Table
D10, Table D11 and Table D12 as stated in the drawings.
(iii) The Contractor shall ensure that the S.O. be permitted to

visit or station his representative at the plant at any stage
of the concrete production.
1.1.1.4. When other than CEM I cement is specified to be used, the

concrete mix shall be of designed concrete only.
1.1.2. Prescribed Concrete
1.1.2.1. Prescribed concrete shall conform to MS EN 206, MS 523-2 and

~
No. Keluaran 01
MS 523-3. Prescribed concrete shall be as detailed in Table D7

and Table D8. The result in Table D7 and Table D8 is achieved
without the use of admixture.
1.1.2.2. Prescribed concrete is not allowed for all structural works except
for remote sites prior approval of the S.O .. A site is considered
remote when the journey from the source of the concrete supply
is having difficult access by land.
1.1.2.3. Prescribed concrete shall only be produced at site as stated in

sub-section 1.2.4 ..
1.1.2.4. Only CEM 1 cement is specified to be used for prescribed

concrete.
1.1.3. Proprietary Concrete
1.1.3.1. Proprietary concrete shall conform to MS EN 206, MS 523-2 and

MS 523-3.
1.1.3.2. Where proprietary concrete is specified, the constituent material

and requirement of concrete shall comply with Item 2.
1.1.3.3. The Contractor shall provide the information of the proprietary

concrete to the approval of the S.O. as follows:
(i) Name of supplier and proprietary concrete.
(ii) The type and standard strength class.
(iii) Product warranty.
(iv) Any other identification deemed necessary.
1.1.3.4. The specification for proprietary concrete shall contain the

(i) Verification of product conformity by an agency that is

accredited by Department of Standards Malaysia or
certification body complying with MS /SOI/EC 17065, to
confirm that the proprietary concrete satisfies
performance requirement and the limiting value that are
specified or declared.
(ii) The proprietary concrete plant must be certified by an

agency that is accredited by the Department of Standards
Malaysia.
1.1.3.5. The Contractor shall verify the performance of the proprietary

concrete after completion of works as follows:
(i) Product warranty.
(ii) Testing result of product.

~
No. Keluaran 01
(iii) Non-Destructive Test such as Ultrasonic Pulse Velocity

(UPV) or Windsor Probe as when instructed by the S.O ..
(iv) Any other verification deemed necessary by the S.O ..
1.2. Production of Concrete
1.2.1. General
1.2.1.1. All concrete shall be subjected to production control under the

responsibility of the Contractor.
1.2.1.2. Production control comprises all measures necessary to

maintain the properties of concrete in conformity to specified
requirements. It includes:
(i) Selection of materials.
(ii) Concrete design.
(iii) Concrete production.
(iv) Inspection, sampling and testing.
(v) The use of the results of tests on constituent materials,

fresh and hardened concrete and equipment.
(vi) Inspection of equipment used in transporting for fresh

concrete.
1.2.2. Production Control System
Production Control System shall contain adequately documented

procedures and instructions. These procedures and instructions shall,
where relevant, be established in respect of the control requirement as
given in the Table D21, Table D22, Table D23 and Table D31.
1.2.3. Designed Concrete
1.2.3.1. Designed concrete shall comply with the requirements as stated

in the drawings, MS EN 206, MS 523-2 and MS 523-3.
1.2.3.2. Designed concrete is batched, either dry or wet. Wet batching is

the primary mixing of the concrete is performed in a plant mixer,
and the secondary mixing is done in the truck mixer before the
concrete is discharged from the truck mixer. Dry batching is the
primary mixing and secondary mixing of the concrete is
performed in a truck mixer before the concrete is discharged
from the truck mixer. No extra water or admixtures are allowing
to be added after the concrete left the plant.
1.2.3.3. Designed concrete delivered to the Site shall be accompanied

by delivery ticket and manufacturer's batching record stating the
details of mix proportions by weight, the grade of concrete, type
and size of aggregate, date and time of loading at plant, type
~
No. Keluaran 01
and dosage of chemical admixtures and other relevant

production details such as, but not limited to, details listed in
Table D31 in suitable format. If the Contractor fail to provide this
information, the S.O. or his representative shall immediately
reject the total load of the concrete. The S.O. or his
representative and the Contractor shall ensure the information

provided in the delivery tickets and the manufacturer's batching
record complies a requirement as in sub-section 1.1.1. before
discharging the concrete.
1.2.3.4. Rejected concrete shall be removed from the Site. The delivery
ticket shall be marked 'REJECTED'.
1.2.4. Prescribed Concrete
1.2.4.1. The quantities of cement, fine aggregate and various sizes of

coarse aggregate shall be measured by weight unless otherwise
approved by the S.O .. A separate weighing machine shall be
provided for weighing the cement. Alternatively, the cement may
be measured by using a whole number of bags in each batch.
The quantity of water shall be measured by volume or by weight.
Any solid admixtures to be added shall be measured by weight,
liquid or paste admixtures shall be measured by volume or
weight.
1.2.4.2. The batch weight of aggregate shall be adjusted to allow for the
moisture content of the aggregate being used. All measuring
equipment shall be calibrated on site or their calibration status
established by certificates from accredited laboratories.
1.2.4.3. The mixing time shall be not less than two minutes and not more
than five minutes or any other time recommended by the
concrete supplier after all the ingredients have been placed in
the mixer.
1.2.4.4. The mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned before any fresh concrete
is mixed.
1.2.4.5. The water content of each batch of concrete may be adjusted so

as to produce concrete of the workability required. However,
care shall be taken to ensure the free water - cement ratio is
maintained. The total amount of water added to the mix shall be
recorded.
1.2.5. Proprietary Concrete
1.2.5.1. Proprietary concrete is batched, either dry or wet, at a ready-

mixed plant and transported in purpose-made agitators
operating continuously or truck mixers to the Site.
1.2.5.2. Proprietary concrete shall comply with the requirements as

stated in the drawings, MS EN 206, MS 523-2 and MS 523-3. All
concrete materials, including water and admixtures shall be
mixed in the plant and delivered to Site in purpose made truck
mixers.
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION D: CONCRETING No. Pindaan : 00
Tarikh : 02 Januari 2020
JKR MALAYSIA Muka Surat : D/5
1.2.5.3. Proprietary concrete delivered to the Site shall be accompanied

by delivery ticket and manufacturer's batching record stating the
details of the grade of concrete, name of proprietary concrete,
date and time of loading at plant, and other relevant production
details. If the Contractor fails to provide the information, the S.O.,
or his representative shall immediately reject the total load of the
concrete. The S.O., or his representative, and the Contractor
shall ensure the information provided in the delivery tickets and

the manufacturer's batching record complies a requirement as
in sub-section 1.1.3. before discharging the concrete
2. Material
2.1. Cement
2.1.1. The cement to be used throughout the Work shall be cement obtained
from SIRIM-certified manufacturer. The cement shall be described and
complied with MS EN 197-1 as shown in Table D1 and Table D2.
2.1.2. Certificates of Test
2.1.2.1. Manufacturers' certificates of test shall in general be accepted

as proof of soundness. Additional tests shall be carried out on
any cement which appears to have deteriorated through age,
damage to containers, improper storage, or any other reason.
The test shall be carried out at any approved laboratory in
accordance with MS EN 196 at the expense of the Contractor.
Any batch of cement that has been sampled and tested and
found not to have complied with the requirements shall be
rejected and removed from the Site.
2.1.2.2. The S.O. may, without tests being made, order that any bag of
cement, a portion of the contents of which has hardened, or
which appears to be defective in any other way, be removed
from the Site.
2.1.3. Transportation and Storage
The cement shall be transported to the Site in covered vehicles adequately

protected against water. It shall be stored in a weatherproof cement store
to the approval of the S.O.. Cement stored in bags shall not be laid directly
on the ground. It shall be taken for use in the Work in the order of its
delivery into the store. Cement delivered in bulk shall be stored in
purposely built silos of an approved design.
2.2. Aggregates
2.2.1. Aggregates shall be naturally occurring sand or granite crushed or

uncrushed, except as otherwise specified, and shall comply with MS EN
12620. They shall be obtained from a source approved by the S.O.. Marine
aggregates shall not be used.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
2.2.2. Coarse Aggregates
Coarse aggregates shall comply with MS EN 12620 and tests shall be

carried out according to MS 30. For work below ground level, only crushed
granite shall be used. unless otherwise specified in the Drawings. The
property limits shall be as specified in Table D3. The maximum nominal
size of aggregate shall be as specified in the Drawings.
2.2.3. Fine Aggregates
Fine aggregates shall comply with MS EN 12620. In the context of MS EN

12620, the term 'sand' is used to means 'fine aggregate'. Unless otherwise
specified in the Drawings, tests shall be carried out in accordance with MS
30. The property limits shall be as specified in Table D3.
2.2.4. Grading
2.2.4.1. Coarse Aggregates
The grading of coarse aggregates shall be analysed as

described in MS 30 and shall be within the limits specified in
Table D4.
2.2.4.2. Fine Aggregates
The grading of fine aggregates shall be analysed as described

in MS 30 and shall be within the limits specified in Table D5.
However, for prescribed concrete Grading Limit M shall only be
used.
2.2.5. Sampling and Testing of Aggregates
Where site mixing is used, samples of fine and coarse aggregates

approved by the S.O. shall be kept on Site. These samples shall give a
fair indication of the general quality of the aggregates for comparison with
the aggregates delivered during the course of executing the work. Tests
shall be carried out on samples of the latter, taken at intervals as required
by the S.O., or whenever there is a change of source. The appropriate
method of sampling and testing shall be in accordance with the standards
as specified in Table D3. Any batch of aggregate rejected by the S.O. shall
be removed from the Site.
2.2.6. Storage of Aggregates
2.2.6.1. Separate storage facilities with adequate provision for drainage

shall be provided for each different size of aggregate used.
2.2.6.2. Aggregate shall be handled and stored to minimize segregation

and contamination.
2.3. Water
Water shall comply with the requirements of MS EN 1008. It shall be clean and free
from materials deleterious to concrete in the plastic and hardened state and shall
be from a source approved by the S.O.. The S.O. may instruct the Contractor to
carry out chemical tests at any approved laboratory at the expense of the
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
Contractor. The Contractor shall make adequate arrangement to supply and store
sufficient water at the Site for use in mixing and curing of concrete.
2.4. Admixtures
2.4.1. No admixtures to be allowed for use in prescribed concrete.
2.4.2. The admixtures, the sampling and testing of the admixtures and the
information to be provided with the admixture supplied shall comply with
MS EN 934 and requirements specified in Table D6.
2.4.3. All admixtures shall be used strictly in accordance to manufacturer's

recommendation.
2.4.4. For admixture to be used in design concrete, the Contractor shall carry out
initial test to verify the concrete mix as required in sub-section 3.1.2..
2.5. Requirements for Concrete
2.5.1. Concrete Grade
The grade of concrete to be used in the works shall be as stated in the

Drawings and/or in the Bill of Quantities. Normal concrete shall be
designated as C X/Y; light weight concrete shall be designated as LC X/Y,
where X is minimum characteristic cylinder strength (N/mm 2) and Y is
minimum characteristic cube strength in (N/mm 2). Prescribed concrete
shall be designated as YP where a suffix P shall be added after its
minimum characteristic cube strength (N/mm2).
2.5.2. Cement Content
2.5.2.1. Cement content in this specification shall refer to the total

quantities of cement as approved in sub-section 2.1., or the total
quantities of cementitious materials comprising CEM I and other
constituents complying to MS EN 197-1.
2.5.2.2. Minimum Cement Content
The minimum cement content shall be in accordance with Table

D9, Table D10 and Table D11, unless otherwise shown on the
Drawings.
2.5.3. Consistence
2.5.3.1. The consistency of the fresh concrete shall comply to MS EN

206 and suitability for the condition of handling and placing so
that after compaction, it surrounds all reinforcement, tendons
and ducts and completely fills the formwork. Consistency of the
concrete shall be within one of the following limits:
(i) Slump classes (Refer Table D13)
(ii) Compacting classes (Refer Table D14)
(iii) Vebe classes (Refer Table D15)

~
No. Keluaran 01
(iv) Flow classes (Refer Table D16)
2.5.3.2. Unless otherwise specified in the Drawings, consistency values

expressed as slump and flow classes appropriate to different
uses of concrete shall be as given in Table D17.
2.5.4. Total Chloride Content
The Total Chloride Content of the concrete mix arising from the aggregate
or any other source shall not in any circumstances exceed the limits in
Table D18 expressed as a percentage relationship between chloride ions
and weight of cement in the mix. The tests shall be carried out in
accordance with as 1881-124 for each grade of concrete, to demonstrate
that these limits are not exceeded.
2.5.5. Maximum Sulphate Content
The total estimated sulphate content of any mix, including that present in
the cement shall not exceed 4% by weight of cement in the mix. Where
necessary, tests shall be carried out in accordance with as 1881-124 for
each grade of concrete to demonstrate that this limit is not exceeded.
3. Concrete Conformity and Identity Testing
3.1. Evaluation of Conformity
3.1.1. General
3.1.1.1. The Contractor is responsible for the evaluation of conformity of

specified requirements of the concrete. For this purpose, the
Contractor shall refer to MS EN 206 to carry out the following
task:
(i) Initial test.
(ii) Production control including conformity control.
3.1.1.2. All tests shall refer to concrete compressive strength test (cube
or cylinder).
3.1.1.3. The designed concrete testing flow chart can refer in Figure D1.
3.1.2. Initial Test
3.1.2.1. Initial test is required for designed concrete only and the
Contractor shall be responsible for the test.
3.1.2.2. In the case of using a new concrete composition, initial test shall
be performed to provide a concrete that achieves the specified
properties or intended performance with a margin of 1.64 x
standard deviation.
3.1.2.3. The concrete composition shall be reviewed periodically to

provide assurance that all concrete designs are still in
accordance with the actual requirements, taking into account of
~
No. Keluaran 01
the chances in properties of the material and the result of testing.
3.1.2.4. Initial test shall be repeated if there has been a significant

change either in the constituent materials, admixtures or in the
specified requirements on which the previous test was based on.
3.1.2.5. Test Conditions
(i) In general, initial test shall be carried out on fresh concrete

with a temperature 27±3°C.
(ii) For the initial test of single concrete composition, at least

three (3) specimens from each of three (3) batches,
totalling nine (9) specimens shall be tested at 28 days.
(iii) The compressive strength of a concrete composition shall

be taken to be the average of the nine (9) specimens.
3.1.2.6. Criteria for Adoption of Initial Tests
(i) The compressive strength of the concrete with the

composition to be adopted for the actual case shall
exceed the values fck of Table D19 or Table D20. The
margin should be at least 6N/mm2 to 12N/mm2
depending on the production facilities, material and the
available background information about the variation. If
there are insufficient data, the margin for the initial mix
design shall be taken as 6N/mm 2 .
(ii) The consistency of the concrete shall be within the limits

of the consistency class as in Table D17, at the time at
which the concrete likely to be placed or delivered.
(iii) For assessing the properties of concrete, in particular

those of fresh concrete, the differences between the type
of mixer and mixing procedure applied during the initial
test and those applied during actual production shall be
taken into account.
(iv) For other properties that are specified, the concrete shall
meet the specified values with an appropriate margin.
3.1.3. Conformity Control for Designed Concrete
3.1.3.1. General
(i) For normal-weight and heavy-weight concrete of strength

classes from C8/10 to C55/67 or light-weight concrete
from LC8/9 to LCSS/60, sampling and testing shall be
performed on concrete compositions.

~
No. Keluaran 01
(ii) In the sampling and testing plan and the conformity

criteria of concrete compositions distinction is made
between initial production and continuous production,
where:
a) Initial production covers the production until at least

35 test results are available.
b) Continuous production is achieved when at least 35

test result are obtained over a period not exceeding
12 months.
(iii) If the production of a concrete composition has been

suspended more than 12 months, the criteria, sampling
and testing plan given for initial production shall be
adopted.
(iv) If the strength is specified for a different age, the

conformity is assessed on specimens tested at the
specified age.
(v) During continuous production, the sampling and testing

plan and the criteria for initial production may be adopted
if approved by the S.O ..
(vi) Identity testing shall be carried out in accordance to Item

3.3 in order to verify that a defined volume comes from a
conforming population.
3.1.3.2. Sampling and Testing
(i) Samples of concrete shall be randomly selected in

accordance with MS 26-1-1. The minimum rate of
sampling and testing of concrete shall be in accordance
with Table D21 at the rate that gives the highest number
of samples for initial or continuous production.
(ii) The samples shall be taken after any water or admixtures

are added to the concrete, but sampling before adding
plasticizer to adjust the consistence is permitted where
there is proof by initial testing that the plasticizer or super
plasticizer in quality to be used has no negative effect on
the strength of the concrete.
(iii) The test result shall be obtained from an individual

specimen or the average of the results when two or more
specimens made from one sample are tested at the same
age.
(iv) Where two or more specimens are made from one sample
and the range of the test values is more than 15% of the
mean, the result shall be disregarded.

~
No. Keluaran 01
3.1.3.3. Conformity Criteria for Compressive Strength
(i) Conformity assessment shall be made on test results

taken during an assessment period that shall not exceed
the last twelve (12) months.
(ii) Conformity of concrete compressive strength is assessed

on specimens tested at 28-days in accordance with:
a) Groups of n overlapping consecutive test results fem

(Criterion 1).
b) Each individual test result fc1 (Criterion 2).
(iii) Conformity is confirmed if both the criteria given in Table

D22 for either initial or continuous production are satisfied
(iv) Initially, the standard deviation (cr) shall be calculated from at

least 35 consecutive test results taken over a period exceeding
three (3) months and which is immediately prior to the production
period during which conformity is to be checked. This value shall
be taken as the estimate of the standard deviation (cr) of the
population. The validity of the adopted value shall be verified
during the subsequent production using Method 1 as stated
below. However, Method 2 may be used if approved by the S.O ..
a) Method 1
The initial value of standard deviation may be applied for

the subsequent period during which conformity is to be
checked, provided the standard deviation of the latest 15
results (s1s) does not deviate significantly from the adopted
standard deviation. This is considered valid provided:
Where the value of s1s lies outside these limits, a new

estimate of cr shall be determined from last available 35 test
results.
b) Method 2
The new value of standard deviation (cr) may be estimated

from a continuous system and this value is adopted. The
sensitivity of the system shall be at least that of Method 1.
3.1.4. Permeability Requirement
For marine structures, a Chloride Diffusion Test shall be carried out

according to standard test method for determining the apparent chloride
diffusion coefficient of cementitious mixtures by bulk diffusion (ASTM-
C1556-11 a). The chloride content of a concrete, expressed as the
percentage of chloride ions by mass of cement, shall not exceed the value
for the selected class given in Table D18 according to MS EN 206.

~
No. Keluaran 01
3.2. Identity Test
3.2.1. General
3.2.1.1. Identity testing indicates whether the defined volume of concrete

under review belongs to the same population as that verified as
conforming with the characteristic strength via conformity
assessment.
3.2.1.2. Identity testing is conducted at the Site upon the delivery of

concrete.
3.2.2. Sampling and Testing
3.2.2.1. Designed Concrete
(i) The sampling rate for identity testing specified in Table

D24.
(ii) A sample is made up of three (3) specimens.
(iii) Samples shall be taken from different batches in

accordance with MS 26-1-1. Test specimens shall be
prepared and cured in accordance with MS EN 12390-2.
The compressive strength of the specimens shall be
determined in accordance with MS EN 12390-3.
(iv) One (1) specimen from the sample shall be tested for the
7-days compressive strength. The compressive strength
shall not fall below two-third (2/3) of the 28-days
compressive strength as given in Table D19 and Table
D20.
(v) The remaining two (2) specimens shall be tested at 28-

days. The compressive strength of the specimens shall be
obtained from the average of the results of the two
specimens.
(vi) For 28-days compressive strength test, if the difference

between the two (2) test result divided by their mean
exceed 15%, the test result, shall be deemed invalid.
3.2.2.2. Prescribed Concrete
(i) A sample is made up of three (3) specimens.
(ii) Samples shall be taken from different batches in

accordance with MS 26-1-1. Test specimens shall be
prepared and cured in accordance with MS EN 12390-2.
The compressive strength of the specimens shall be
determined in accordance with MS EN 12390-3.

~
No. Keluaran 01
(iii) One (1) specimen from the sample shall be tested for the
7-days compressive strength as given in Table D23.
(iv) The remaining two (2) specimens shall be tested for 28-
days. The compressive strength of the specimens shall be
obtained from the average of the results of the two
specimens.
(v) For 28-days compressive strength test, if the difference

between the two (2) test result divided by their mean
exceed 20%, the test result, shall be deemed invalid.
3.2.3. Conformance identity criteria for compressive strength
3.2.3.1. Concrete under production control certification
(i) Identity of concrete is assessed for each individual

strength test result and the average overlapping discrete
results as identified in Table D25.
(ii) Concrete is deemed to come from a conforming

population if both the criteria in Table D25 are satisfied for
n results derived from strength tests on samples taken
from the defined volume of concrete.
3.2.3.2. Concrete not under production control certification
(i) At least three (3) samples shall be taken for testing from
the defined volume of concrete.
(ii) Concrete is deemed to come from a conforming

population if both the criteria in Table D26 are satisfied for
n results derived from strength tests on samples taken
from the defined volume of concrete.
3.2.3.3. Prescribed concrete
(i) A sample is made up of three (3) specimens.
(ii) One ( 1) specimen from each sample shall be tested for 7-

days cube compressive strength. The test result shall not
fall below the corresponding values given in Table D23.
(iii) The remaining two (2) specimens from the sample shall
be tested for the 28-days cube compressive strength. The
strength requirement shall be considered complied if at
least one of the following conditions is satisfied with:
a) None of the two test cubes is below the specified

compressive strength as specified in Table D23.
b) The average strength of the two test cubes is not less

than the specified compressive strength.

~
No. Keluaran 01
3.2.4. Identity Testing for Slump and Flow
3.2.4.1. Sampling and Testing
(i) Sampling fresh concrete using a spot sample obtained

from the initial discharge, if concrete is delivered in a truck
mixer or agitating equipment. The spot sample shall be
taken after a discharge of approximately 0.3 m3 by taking
six increments from the moving stream of the concrete.
Take at least 1.5 times the quantity estimated required for
the tests in accordance to MS 26-1-1.
(ii) The sample shall be remixed on a non-absorbent surface

before carrying out the test.
(iii) For slump test, the test is only valid if it yields a true slump.
The slump value (h) is measured in accordance to MS 26-
1-2 and shown in Figure D2.
(iv) For flow test, the maximum dimension of the concrete

spread shall be measured in the two direction as shown
in Figure D3. The flow value (f) is the average dimension
of the two direction in accordance to MS 26-1-5.
3.2.5. Conformance Identity Criteria for The Slump and Flow of an Individual
Batch
3.2.5.1. If the measured slump meets the requirements specified in

Table D27 or is within the tolerance specified in Table D28, the
identity test confirms that the batch conforms to MS EN 523-2
with respect to its consistency.
3.2.5.2. If the measured flow meets the requirements specified in Table

D29 or is within the tolerance specified in Table D30, the identity
test confirms that the batch conforms to MS EN 523-2 with
respect to its consistency.
3.3. Action to be Taken for Non-Conformity of the Product
3.3.1. The following actions shall be taken by the Contractor in the event of non-
conformity:
3.3.1.1. Check test results and if invalid, take action to eliminate errors
3.3.1.2. If non-conformity is confirmed e.g. by retesting, take corrective

actions including a management review of relevant production
control procedures.
3.3.1.3. Where there is confirmed non-conformity with the specification

that was not obvious at delivery, notice shall be given to the S.O.
in order to avoid any consequential damage.
3.3.1.4. Record actions on the items above.
3.3.2. In the event that the compressive strength results of the test do not meet

~
No. Keluaran 01
the specified requirements mentioned in sub-section 3.2., the S.O. shall

determine the action to be taken:
3.3.2.1. If the 7-days concrete strength is less than the specified strength
requirements (2/3 of characteristic strength), no more concrete
shall be placed on the suspect concrete and no removal of
propping on the affected area shall be allowed until the 28-days
strength result compliance is available, or unless otherwise
approved by the S.O. in writing.
3.3.2.2. For non-compliance of 28- days compressive strength, the S.O.

may direct other measures to be taken to make the work secure.
3.3.2.3. The S.O. may instruct the additional tests be carried out on the
hardened concrete to determine the quality of the suspected
concrete. The test may include non-destructive and destructive
tests. All methods of testing shall conform to MS EN 12504 and
results shall be assessed according to MS EN 13791 and MS
1242.
3.3.2.4. If the results from the additional test did not meet the
requirements, the S.O. may instruct the Contractor the following
actions:
(i) The section which fail the test shall be removed; or
(ii) The Contractor shall submit the recommendations for

repair and strengthening the suspected concrete. All the
recommendations shall certify by a Professional
Engineer.
3.3.3. All works instructed under this item shall be at the Contractor's expense
and no extension of time shall be granted for such works.
4. Handling of Concrete
4.1. Supervision
The Contractor shall ensure the required standard of control over materials and
workmanship. The S.O. shall be afforded all reasonable opportunities and facilities
to inspect the constituent materials and the production of concrete and to take
samples for testing.
4.2. Transporting
Concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the formwork as rapidly as

practicable by methods, which will prevent segregation or loss of any constituents
or ingress of foreign matter or water and maintain the required workability. It shall
be deposited as near as practicable in its final position to avoid rehandling or moving
the concrete horizontally by vibration. The concrete shall be conveyed by chutes or
concrete pumps only with permission from the S.O ..
4.3. Placement
4.3.1. Placement of Concrete in Dry Condition

~
No. Keluaran 01
4.3.1.1. For all concrete whether mixed on or off the site of the Work,
each batch shall be placed and compacted within two (2) hours
of adding the cement to the dry aggregates and within 45
minutes (or any other period of time based on the initial test as
sub-section 2.4. and sub-section 3.1.2. and approved by the
S.O. if an admixture is used) of adding water to the cement and
aggregate. Concrete shall not be placed in any part of the
structure until the approval of the S.O. has been obtained. If
concreting is not started within 24 hours of approval given,
approval shall again be obtained from the S.O ..
4.3.1.2. All formwork and reinforcement contained in it shall be clean and

free from standing water immediately before the placing of
concrete. Concreting shall be carried out continuously between
and up to predetermined construction joints in one sequence of
operation. It shall be thoroughly compacted by either hand
tamping or mechanical vibration or both and shall be thoroughly
worked into the corners. After tamping into place, the concrete
shall not be subjected to disturbance other than such as
incidental to compaction by vibration. In the event of unavoidable
stoppage in positions not predetermined, the concreting shall be
terminated on a horizontal plane and against vertical surfaces
using stop boards. The location for termination shall be
subjected to the approval of the S.O ..
4.3.1.3. Fresh concrete shall not be placed against in-situ concrete which
has been in position for more than 45 minutes unless a
construction joint is formed in accordance with sub-section 5.1 ..
When in-situ concrete has been in place for four hours, no
further concrete shall be placed against it for a further 20 hours.
Where retarding admixture has been used, the S.O. may
approve variation to this limit.
4.3.1.4. Except where otherwise approved by the S.O., concrete shall be

deposited in horizontal layers to a compacted depth not
exceeding 450mm when internal vibrators are used or 300mm
in all other cases. The surface of the concrete shall be
maintained reasonably level during placing.
4.3.1.5. Concrete shall not be dropped into place from a height

exceeding 1.5m. However, higher drops may be allowed
provided the mix has been well designed and proportioned.
When trunking or chutes are used, they shall be kept clean and
used in such a manner as to avoid segregation.
4.3.1.6. The Contractor shall maintain an experienced steel fixer at the

site of reinforced concrete works during the placing of concrete
to reposition any reinforcement which may be displaced.
4.3.2. Placement of Concrete Under Water
4.3.2.1. No concrete shall be placed in flowing water. Underwater

concrete if deemed unavoidable, shall be placed in position by
Tremie pipes from the mixer. During and after concreting under
water, pumping or dewatering operations in the immediate
vicinity shall be suspended until the S.O. permits them to
~
No. Keluaran 01
continue. Where the concrete is placed by a Tremie pipe, the

following requirements shall be applicable:
(i) The hopper and Tremie pipe shall be a closed system.

The bottom of the Tremie pipe shall be kept as far as
practicable beneath the surface of the placed concrete.
(ii) The Tremie pipe shall be large enough with due regard to
the size of aggregate. For 20mm aggregates, the Tremie
pipe shall be of a diameter not less than 150mm and for
larger aggregates, a bigger diameter Tremie pipe
approved by the S.O. shall be used.
(iii) Unless otherwise agreed by the S.O., the first charge of

concrete shall be placed with a sliding plug pushed down
the Tremie pipe ahead of it to prevent mixing of concrete
and water.
(iv) The Tremie pipe shall always penetrate well into the
concrete with an adequate margin of safety against
accidental withdrawal if the pipe is surged to discharge
the concrete.
(v) The concrete shall be deposited wholly by Tremie pipe

and the method of deposition shall not be changed part
way up to prevent the laitance from being entrapped
within the structure.
(vi) All Tremie pipes shall be properly cleaned after use.
4.4. Placement Temperature
4.4.1. Placement temperature shall comply with MS 523-3 to prevent premature

setting and loss of water during placing of concrete in the formwork.
4.4.2. At the time of placing, no part of the fresh concrete shall have a
temperature exceeding 36°C.
4.4.3. After placement of the concrete, the temperature of the concrete shall not
be more than ?o 0c.
4.4.4. The procedure used to measure the temperature of the fresh concrete
shall be as follows:
4.4.4.1. Within 2 min of taking the sample at delivery, insert a Type A

100mm immersion thermometer having a range of -5°C to
+110°C, graduated in intervals of 1°C and conforming to BS
1704, in the sample to a depth of not less than 100mm. When
steady conditions have been maintained for 1 min, record the
temperature to the nearest 1°C; and
4.4.4.2. Use an alternative form of temperature measurement device

with a precision at least that of a thermometer conforming to BS
1704, to record the steady-state temperature to the nearest 1°C.

~
No. Keluaran 01
4.4.5. Freshly placed concrete shall be protected from direct sunlight and from
loss of moisture by covering, shading or other means.
4.4.6. The Contractor shall provide the method statement for temperature control
in the case of large volume or continuously concrete pour exceeding
100m 3 or as deemed necessary by the S.O. for approval before
commencement of works.
4.5. Compaction
4.5.1. Unless otherwise approved by the S.O., concrete shall be thoroughly

compacted by vibration and thoroughly worked around the reinforcement,
tendons or duct formers, around embedded fixtures and into corners of
the formwork to form a dense, homogenous mass, free from voids and
which will have the required surface finish when the formwork is removed.
Vibration shall be applied continuously during the placing of each batch of
concrete until the expulsion of air has practically ceased and in a manner,
which does not promote segregation of the ingredients.
4.5.2. The concrete maintained between the two walls of formwork shall be
compacted by internal or external vibrators. Concrete in slabs with no
formwork on its upper surface shall be compacted either by vibrators of
the pan type or by a vibrating screen.
4.5.3. The internal vibrators shall be inserted and withdrawn slowly and at a
uniform pace of approximately 100mm per second. Compaction shall be
deemed to be completed when cement mortar appears in an annulus
around the vibrator. Over vibration leading to segregation of the mix must
be avoided. The internal vibrators shall be inserted at points judged by the
area of mortar showing after compaction, with a certain allowance made
for overlapping and they shall not be allowed to come into contact with the
formwork or the reinforcement and shall be inserted at a distance of not
less than 75mm from the formwork.
4.5.4. The pan vibrator shall be placed on the surface of the concrete, which
shall have previously been tamped and levelled leaving an allowance in
height for compaction until the cement mortar appears under the pan. The
vibrator shall then be lifted and placed on the adjoining surface and this
operation shall be repeated until the whole surface has been compacted.
Alternatively, a vibrating screen spanning the full width of the surface may
also be used.
4.5.5. Whenever vibration must be applied externally, the design of formwork

and disposition of vibration shall receive special consideration to ensure
efficient compaction and to avoid surface blemishes. The vibration shall
be such that there will be no excess water on the top surface on
completion of compaction.
4.5.6. External vibrators shall be firmly secured to the formwork which must be
sufficiently rigid to transmit the vibration and strong enough not to be
damaged by it. Internal vibrators shall be capable of operating at not less
than 10,000 cycles per minute and external vibrators at not less than 3,000
cycles per minute. Sufficient vibrators in serviceable condition shall be on
Site so that spare equipment is always available in the event of
breakdowns. Vibrators shall be operated by workmen skilled in their use.

~
No. Keluaran 01
4.5.7. Concrete shall not be subjected to any disturbance within 24 hours after
compaction. No standing or flowing water shall be allowed to come into
contact with exposed concrete surfaces during the first two (2) hours after
placing and compaction of the concrete.
4.5.8. In the event where inadequate or improper compaction is suspected, the

S.O. has the right to inspect and to carry out further tests. The tests may
include non-destructive and destructive methods. All expenses incurred in
carrying out such sampling, testing and remedial works shall be borne by
the Contractor irrespective of whether the tests prove the structure to be
sound or otherwise.
4.6. Curing and Protection
4.6.1. All concrete work shall be cured for the full period of curing which shall not
be less than five (5) days for F1, F2, F3 and F4 surfaces, but not less than
three (3) days for F11, F12, F13, F14 and F15 surfaces.
4.6.2. Curing and protection shall start immediately after compaction of the
concrete to protect it from:
4.6.2.1. Impact damage such as shock, overloading or falling earth which

may disrupt the concrete and interface with its bond to
reinforcements.
4.6.2.2. Premature drying out from direct sunlight and wind.
4.6.2.3. Leaching out by rain and flowing water.
4.6.2.4. High internal thermal gradients.
4.6.3. Normal Curing and Protection
4.6.3.1. Concrete, after it is placed and until the expiration of the curing
duration, shall not be allowed to dry out. Provision shall be made
for adequate protection against direct sunlight and wind to allow
the process of curing to complete within the specified period.
4.6.3.2. Curing and protection shall be accomplished by covering the

exposed concrete surface with an impermeable material such as
polyethylene sheet, which should be well sealed and fastened
and if required, this treatment can be continued efficiently
throughout the whole period of curing.
4.6.3.3. When the concrete has attained its final set, one of the following
curing methods shall be adopted:
(i) Water curing shall be accomplished by keeping the

surface of the concrete continuously wet by ponding with
water.

~
No. Keluaran 01
(ii) Curing may be accomplished by sealing in the water as

specified above by covering with an approved
waterproofed curing paper or plastic sheeting laid with
airtight joints. It must be securely positioned to prevent
displacement by wind and protected from tearing or other
injury.
4.6.3.4. The use of other methods of curing may be deemed necessary

when the concrete is subjected to high internal thermal gradient,
or with large exposed surface area. The Contractor shall submit
a method statement to the approval of the S.O ..
4.6.3.5. In the event where the Contractor does not do proper curing, the
S.O. has the right to inspect and to carry out further tests which
may include destructive methods. All expenses incurred in
carrying out such sampling, testing and remedial works shall be
borne by the Contractor irrespective of whether the tests proved
the structure to be sound or otherwise.
4.6.4. Accelerated Curing
4.6.4.1. Steam curing may be used for precast concrete element at the
factory.
4.6.4.2. After the completion of the placing of concrete, four (4) hours
shall elapse before its temperature is raised, unless the
Contractor is able to prove that curing can start earlier by
furnishing all the relevant supporting data to the S.O .. The rise
in temperature within any period of 30 minutes shall not exceed
10°C and maximum temperature attained shall not exceed 70°C
unless it can be proven that any deviation from this provision
shall not result in any detrimental effect to the concrete work.
The rate of subsequent cooling shall not exceed the rate of
heating.
4.6.4.3. The use of accelerated curing methods for concrete containing

other types of cement or any admixture or any additional
materials shall be to the approval of the S.O ..
5. Construction with Concrete
5.1. Construction Joints
5.1.1. Construction joints shall be made at the location as shown on the drawing
and concreting work shall be carried out continuously up to the
construction joints. If the position and detail of any construction joints is
not described in the drawings, the Contractor shall propose and obtain the
approval of the S.O. prior to commencement of concreting. The
construction joints shall be made as few as possible with reasonable
precautions against shrinkage. The joints shall be at right angles to the
general direction of the member and shall take due account of shear and
other stresses.
5.1.2. Concrete shall not be allowed to run to a feather edge and vertical joints
shall be formed against a stop end. The top surface of a layer of concrete
~
No. Keluaran 01
shall be level and flat unless design considerations make this undesirable.
Joint lines shall be so arranged that they coincide with features of the
finished work, wherever possible.
5.1.3. At horizontal construction joints, gauge strips about 25mm width shall be
placed inside the forms along all exposed surfaces to ensure a straight
joint on those surfaces. Where a kicker (that is a starter stub) is used for
the construction of walls and columns, it shall be at least 75mm high, to
be constructed monolithically with the base concrete.
5.1.4. Where vertical construction joints are necessary in mass concrete

structures, reinforcing bars shall be placed across the joints so as to make
the structure monolithic, all to the approval of the S.O ..
5.1.5. Prior to recommencement of concreting on a joint, the surface of the

concrete against which new concrete will be cast shall be free from
laitance and shall be roughened to the extent that the coarse aggregate is
exposed but not disturbed. Care shall be taken to avoid damaging the lines
of the joint. Care shall also be taken that the joint surface is clean and
damp but not wet and the exposed adjoining surfaces shall be of
consistent colour. Immediately before the fresh concrete is placed against
the joint, fresh rich cement mortar (1 :2) shall be applied to the exposed
surface.
5.1.6. Where the S.O. considers that special preparation is necessary, e.g. for
an in-situ structural connection, preparation shall be carried out, preferably
when the concrete has set but not hardened, by spraying with a fine spray
of air and water or brushing with a stiff brush sufficiently to remove the
outer mortar skin and expose the larger aggregates without disturbing
them. Where this treatment is impracticable, sand blasting or a needle gun
shall be used to remove the surface skin and laitance. Hardened surfaces
shall be chipped manually or mechanically to be free from laitance and
properly roughened to the extent that the coarse aggregates are being
exposed.
5.2. Fixing Blocks, Brackets, Built in Bolts, Holes, Chases, Et Cetera
5.2.1. All fixing blocks, brackets, built in bolts, holes, chases, et cetera shall be
accurately set out and formed and carefully sealed prior to the concrete
being placed. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain all such
information for these items of work and to obtain the approval of the S.O.
before incorporating such work prior to the concrete being placed.
5.2.2. Bolts and other inserts to be cast into the concrete shall be securely fixed
to the formwork in such a way that they are not displaced during the
concreting operations and that there is no loss of materials from the wet
concrete through holes in the formwork.
5.2.3. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or instructed by the S.O.,

reinforcement shall be locally moved so that the minimum specified cover
is maintained at the locations of inserts, holes, chases, et cetera. In the
event where the minimum cover cannot be maintained, the Contractor
shall take the necessary precautions to protect the reinforcements against
corrosion by applying an approved coating material to the reinforcements
and the concrete cover.

~
No. Keluaran 01
5.2.4. Temporary plugs shall be removed and the threads of built in bolts shall
be cleaned and greased before handing over any part of the Work.
5.3. Movement Joints.
5.3.1. Movement Joints, Expansion joints, contraction joints or other permanent

structure joints shall be provided in the positions and constructed and
sealed with waterproofing materials as detailed in the Drawings.
5.3.2. When forming movement joints, joint filler shall be fixed firmly to the first-
placed concrete. If more than one strip is used within a joint, it is essential
to butt the ends tightly or tape them together to prevent grout leakage
restricting the closure of the joint.
5.3.3. It is essential that the concrete on both sides of the joint, when placed, is
thoroughly compacted to form a dense uniform mass. Where stop ends
comprise more than one element, particular care is necessary to ensure
that joints between elements are sufficiently tight to allow no grout loss
through them during compaction of the concrete.
5.3.4. Where flexible water stops are used, they shall be fixed so as to ensure
that they are not displaced from their intended position during compaction
of the concrete and that the concrete surrounding them is fully compacted.
The design of the water stop should be practical and take account of the
problems often associated with integral water stop construction in difficult
placing conditions.
5.3.5. Water stops laid horizontally and located within the concrete mass shall
be avoided since they attract the greatest risk of local honeycombing.
5.3.6. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, all exposed expansion joints
shall be covered with 0.7mm thick aluminium cover strips fixed with
masonry nails at 300mm centres.
5.4. Sealants and Special Materials
5.4.1. General
The installation method and the selection, mixing, application and curing
of all joint waterproofing materials shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. The Contractor may propose to use
alternative joint waterproofing materials by submitting supporting technical
information, test reports and samples of the proposed waterproofing
materials to the S.O. for approval.
5.4.2. Waterproofing Materials
All waterproofing materials used at public access areas shall be protected

with non-shrink grout covering.
5.4.3. Water stops
5.4.3.1. The material for water stop can be made of rubber or flexible
plastics in accordance with MS 1292.
5.4.3.2. Water stops shall be as specified in the Drawings and shall be

installed in accordance with BS EN 1992-3 and the
~
No. Keluaran 01
manufacturer's recommendation to the approval of the S.O ..
5.4.3.3. Water stops shall be securely positioned in the formwork to

prevent displacement during concreting.
5.4.3.4. The selection and requirements of a water stops are as below:
(i) The overall width of water stops shall be greater than the
smallest structural concrete cast.
(ii) The distance between the surface of the concrete and the
water stops shall be greater than half the width of the
water stops.
(iii) The width of the water stops shall be more than 150 mm.
(iv) The distance between the water stops and steel

reinforcement shall be more than 50 mm.
5.4.4. Two-part Polysulphide or Two-part Polyurethane Sealant
5.4.4.1. Two-part Polysulphide or Two-part Polyurethane Sealant for

external use shall comply with the following requirements:
(i) Conformance to as 4254.

(ii) Minimum joint movement capacity of ± 27.5% of joint
width at 27.5°C;
(iii) Shore 'A' Hardness of 25 ± at 27 .5°C;
(iv) Resistance to dilute acids, alkali and all kind of fuel.
5.4.5. Preformed Flexible Strip Sealant
5.4.5.1. Preformed flexible strip sealant shall comply with the following
requirements:
(i) Shall only be used in horizontal joints and be subjected to

pressure.
(ii) Throughout its length;
(iii) Good adhesion.
(iv) Water resistant.
(v) Non-staining.
5.4.6. Bitumen/Rubber Cold Applied Membrane
5.4.6.1. Bitumen/rubber cold applied membrane shall comply with the


~
No. Keluaran 01
(i) Minimum joint movement capacity of ±10% of joint width

at 27.5°C.
(ii) 90% solid content;
(iii) Resistant to dilute acid and alkali.
5.4.7. Hot-Poured Rubber/Bitumen Sealing Compound.
5.4. 7 .1. Hot-poured rubber/bitumen sealing compound shall comply with

as 2499.
5.4.8. Bituminous Sheeting
5.4.8.1. Bituminous sheeting with non-asbestos fibre shall comply with

the following requirements:
(i) Resistant to lime water (no visual effect after two (2)
weeks immersion).
(ii) Maximum water absorption of 10% of dry weight.
(iii) Minimum tensile strength of 50kg/cm 2 .
(iv) Ozone and ultraviolet resistant.
5.4.9. Neoprene Bearing Pads
5.4.9.1. Neoprene bearing pads shall comply with the following

requirements:
(i) Shore 'A' Hardness of 60 ± 5 at 27.5°C.
(ii) Minimum rupture strength of 105kg/cm2 .
(iii) Minimum rupture elongation of 300%.
5.4.10. Polyurethane Foam Backing Rods
5.4.10.1. Polyurethane foam backing rods used as sealant stops in panel

joints shall have the following properties: -
(i) Minimum compressibility of 75% of original volume at

27.5°C.
(ii) Excellent resilient properties.
(iii) Density between 35kg/cm 3 and 45kg/cm 3 .
(iv) Total resistance to common acids, lubricants and

detergents.
(v) Total resistance to water infiltration by capillary action.

~
No. Keluaran 01
(vi) Suitability for up to 70°C.
5.5. Measurement of Concrete Cover
5.5.1. General
The Contractor shall ensure all concrete cover thickness to comply

with the requirement during the construction as stated in the drawing.
Measurement shall be done after removed of formwork and before
plastering works begins.
The nominal cover, Cnom shall be specified in the drawing and defined
as below:
Cnom = Cmin + flcdev
.: flcdev = 10mm
5.5.2. Tolerance
The allowable tolerance for minimum concrete cover (Cmin) shall be as

follows:
5.5.2.1. ±1 mm for cover depths ~ 40mm.
5.5.2.2. ±2mm, for cover depths > 40mm.
5.5.3. Frequency and Verification of Measurement
5.5.3.1. Definition of Stage
Stage is defined as a group of the elements casted or install

in the same day.
5.5.3.2. Definition of Element
Element is defined in two type which are individual element (one

type of the element) and group of elements which consist
different type of element (column, beam, slab, wall, footing). The
S.O. shall determine the total number of the element to be
measured.
5.5.3.3. The frequency of the measurement shall be in accordance to the

stages and measured as follows:
(i) For single storey building, the measurement shall be

conducted after the completion of construction of the
building elements.
(ii) For multiple storey building, the measurement shall be

conducted progressively after the completion of each floor
of the building.

~
No. Keluaran 01
5.5.3.4. Method of Measurement & Calibration of the Equipment
The measurement of concrete cover shall be done by using

Electromagnetic Cover Meter in accordance with BS 1881-
204. The cover meter must be fully calibrated by an
accredited certification body.
5.5.3.5. Measurement Location & Sampling
The location chosen to be measured shall consist of all

critical element such as beam, slab, column and wall. The
S.O. shall identify all critical elements before measurement
is done. The sampling of measurement for the elements shall
be as shown in Table D34.
5.5.4. Compliance Criteria
5.5.4.1. The compliance criteria shall be based on each stage measured.

All measurements are to be tabulated and to determine the
numbers of measurements lower than minimum concrete cover
(Cmin) and sample size, x and N respectively.
5.5.4.2. For compliance criteria, Figure D4 shall be referred. However,

the chosen compliance is dependent on the total number of
measurements per stage.
For N > 10, the 5th percentile shall be use

N s 10, the 1Oth percentile shall be use
5.5.5. Non-Compliance of the Product
5.5.5.1. The following actions shall be taken by the Contractor in the

event of non-compliance of sub-section 5.5.4.:
(i) Check test results and if invalid, take action to eliminate

errors.
(ii) If non-compliance is confirmed, take corrective actions.
(iii) Record actions on the items above.
5.5.5.2. The Contractor shall submit to the S.O. the recommendations

for repair corrective works to be done with the approval of the
S.O ..
5.5.5.3. All works instructed under subsection 5.5.5. shall be at the

Contractor's expense and no extension of time shall be granted
for such works.
6. Steel Reinforcement
6.1. General
The Work shall consist of furnishing and placing reinforcing steel in accordance with
this specification and in conformity with the Drawings or as directed by the S.O ..
~
No. Keluaran 01
6.2. Materials
6.2.1. Hot rolled mild steel and high yield bars shall comply with the requirements
of MS 146. Cold worked steel bars shall comply with the requirements of
as 4461. Hard drawn mild steel wire shall comply with the requirements
of MS 144.
6.2.2. Steel fabric reinforcement shall comply with the requirements of MS 145
and shall be delivered to the Site in flat sheets, unless otherwise specified.
6.2.3. Dowel bars shall be plain, round bars conforming to the requirements of
MS 146. They shall be free from burring or other deformations restricting
slippage in the concrete. Dowel bar sleeves used for debonding shall be
of approved synthetic material. The closed end of the sleeve shall be filled
with 25mm thick compressible foam fillers and the sleeve shall fit tightly
over the length of the bar to be debonded.
6.2.4. Before any reinforcement steel is brought to Site, the Contractor shall
furnish the mill certificates of tests and these shall be submitted for
acceptance by the S.O .. In addition, Contractor shall on request, furnish
the S.O. with a test sheet from approved laboratories for any batch of bars,
giving the results of each of the mechanical tests and/or chemical
composition analysis required under the MS or any equivalent
international standards approved by the S.O .. The specified characteristic
strength of steel reinforcement shall be as given in Table D32.
6.2.5. During the course of the work, any reinforcement found to be not in
accordance with the MS or BS may be rejected by the S.O.
notwithstanding any previous acceptance on the strength of the test
certificates. The S.O. may call for additional tests to be made at the
Contractor's expense on samples taken from the batch of the defective
reinforcement. If the samples do not comply with the MS or BS, then the
S.O. may reject the whole batch and instruct its removal from the Site.
6.2.6. Steel reinforcement shall be stored in clean and dry conditions. When
placed in the work it shall be clean and free from loose rust, mill scale, oil,
grease, paint, dirt or anything which may reduce its bond with concrete. If
directed by the S.O., the steel bars shall be brushed or otherwise cleaned
before use, at the Contractor's expense.
6.2.7. Binding wire shall be 1.6 mm diameter soft annealed steel wire complying
with the requirements of as 1052.
6.3. Construction Methods
6.3.1. Cutting and Bending of Reinforcement
6.3.1.1. Bars shall be of their correct lengths and bent to the exact
shapes required before being fixed in the work.
6.3.1.2. Bars shall be cut and bent cold by the application of slow, steady
pressure or in an approved bar-bending machine. Bending at
temperatures in excess of 100°C may only be carried out with
the S.O.'s approval and under his supervision. Except where
otherwise indicated in the Drawings, bars shall be bent and
measured in accordance with MS 1438.
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
6.3.1.3. Cold worked and hot rolled bars shall not be straightened or bent
again once having been bent. Where it is necessary to bend the
free end of mild steel reinforcement already cast in the concrete,
the internal radius of the bend shall not be less than twice the
diameter of the bar.
6.3.1.4. Special care shall be taken that the overall length of bars with
multiple bends is accurate and that after bending and fixing in
position the bars remain in place without wrap or twist.
6.3.2. Fixing of Reinforcement
6.3.2.1. The number, size, length, shape, type and position of all
reinforcing bars, links, spacer bars and other parts of the steel
reinforcement, shall be in accordance with the Drawings.
6.3.2.2. Reinforcements shall be secured against displacement. Unless

specified otherwise, the actual concrete cover shall be taken as
the distance between face of concrete and the nearest steel
surface. All intersecting bars shall be tied together with binding
wire and the ends of the wire shall be turned into the main body
of the concrete.
6.3.2.3. Reinforcement temporarily left projecting from the concrete at

construction or other joints shall not be bent out of position
during the periods in which concreting is suspended except with
the approval of the S.O..
6.3.2.4. The Contractor shall take particular care that the reinforcement
is laid out correctly in every aspect and temporarily suspended
by annealed wire or supported on concrete blocks or other
approved spacers in the forms to prevent displacement during
the placing and compacting of concrete. Links shall tightly
embrace the longitudinal reinforcement to which they shall be
securely wired or spot welded. The top reinforcement in slabs
shall be rigidly supported on mild steel 'chairs' or equivalent
spaced in each direction to prevent sagging during concreting.
6.3.2.5. No concrete shall be placed until the reinforcement has been

inspected and approved by the S.O..
6.3.3. Splicing
6.3.3.1. Joints to reinforcement bars shall be in accordance by lapping

of bars at positions shown in the Drawings. Where other types
of joints are to be used, it shall be strictly in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendation, at the positions approved by
the S.O..
6.3.3.2. Splicing or lapping of bar shall no impair the flow of concrete

surrounding the reinforcement bar including the concrete cover.
6.3.4. Supporting and Spacer Blocks
6.3.4.1. The size of supporting and spacer blocks required for ensuring
that the reinforcement is correctly positioned shall be not more
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
than 50mm x 50mm consistent with their purpose, of a shape

approved by the S.O., and designed so that they will not overturn
when the concrete is placed.
6.3.4.2. The nominal size of aggregates used shall be 10mm. The

concrete spacers shall be of at least the same strength and
material's source as the concrete to be poured. Wires cast in
these blocks for the purpose of tying them to the reinforcement
shall be free from any corrosion or any other elements that may
affect the integrity of the reinforcement bars.
6.3.4.3. Spacers left in situ shall not impair the desired appearance or
durability of the structure by causing spalling, rust staining or
allowing the passage of moisture.
6.3.4.4. Other types of spacers may be used only with the approval of
the S.O..
6.3.5. Welding of Reinforcement Bar
6.3.5.1. Welding workmanship, including welder qualification shall

comply with the Specification for Structural Steelworks JKR No.
20601-0191-12.
6.3.5.2. Reinforcement bar in structures shall not be welded except

where detailed in the Drawings or permitted in this specification.
6.3.5.3. Welding shall be carried out in accordance with BS EN 1011 and

BS EN 60974. Butt welds shall be of the double V type and two
butt weld bond tests shall be carried out on a specimen prepared
to represent each form of the butt welded joint used in welding
the reinforcement and for each position of welding. The method
of making butt weld tests shall be as laid down in BS EN 17637.
The specimen shall pass the test to the approval of the S.O.
before using the joint, which the specimen represents. Welded
joints shall not be made at bends in reinforcement. Unless
otherwise approved by the S.O., joints in parallel bars of the
principal tensile reinforcement shall be staggered in the
longitudinal direction at a distance not less than the end
anchorage length for the bar.
6.3.5.4. The S.O. shall be informed in advance of when welding is to be

carried out so that he may supervise and inspect the work.
Welding shall not be performed in the field during rain or other
adverse conditions.
7. Formwork and Surface Finish for Structure
7.1. Design and Construction
7.1.1. Description
7.1.1.1. Formwork shall include all temporary or permanent forms

required for forming the concrete, together with all temporary
construction required for their support.
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
7.1.1.2. The Contractor is deemed to have made a study of the Drawings

at tender stage and is aware of all areas of construction,
requiring heavy and specially designed propping to provide the
support and the necessary bracing for the stability of such
propping.
7.1.1.3. The design and construction of formwork shall be carried out by

a competent person. The Contractor shall identify all critical
formwork design and submit the strength and deflection
calculations and Drawings or the proposed design, certified by a
Professional Engineer to the S.O. for prior approval.
Notwithstanding any approval by the S.O. with respect to the
design submitted by the Contractor, the responsibility or the
adequacy and safety of the design shall remain with the
Contractor. The Contractor shall also appoint a competent
formwork coordinator whose duties would be similar to those
outlined in BS 5975.
7.1.1.4. When the use of proprietary type of formwork is proposed by the

Contractor, the design shall be certified by a Professional
Engineer.
7.1.1.5. The formwork shall be sufficiently rigid and tight to prevent loss
of grout or mortar from the concrete at all stages of construction
and shall be appropriate for the methods of placing and
compacting.
7.1.1.6. Formwork (including supports) shall be sufficiently rigid to

maintain the forms in their correct position, shape, profile and
dimensions. The supports shall be designed to withstand the
worst combination of forces due to self-weight, formwork weight,
formwork forces, reinforcement weight, wet concrete weight,
construction and wind loads, together with all incidental dynamic
effects caused by placing, vibrating and compacting the
concrete. Guidance on these loadings is given in The Concrete
Society Manual Formwork - Guide to good practice, and in CIRIA
Report 108, Concrete Pressure in Formwork, and in BS 5975.
Vertical propping to formwork shall be carried down sufficiently
far to provide the necessary support without overstressing the
completed concrete structure.
7.1.1.7. Metal ties may only be used with the prior approval of the S.O..
Where metal ties are permitted, the use of storey height steel
soldiers shall be used to reduce the number of tie bolts required.
Tie bolts with rubber or plastic cone against the form face are to
be used to prevent unsightly grout loss. No metal part of any
device for maintaining formwork in the correct location shall
remain permanently within the specified concrete cover to the
reinforcement. Except for ties used for anchoring void formers,
all ties shall be at least 1.2m apart and through bolts will not be
permitted on exposed form finished faces. All holes left by ties
shall be made good within one day of the removal of the
formwork using a mortar of the same strength as the cast
concrete. Metal ties which allow for holes through the concrete
being cast shall not be permitted to be used in concrete for
water-retaining structure, roof slabs and walls.
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
7.1.1.8. The formwork shall be so arranged as to be readily dismantled

and removed from the cast concrete without shock, disturbance
or damage. Where necessary, the formwork shall be so
arranged that the soffit form, properly supported, can be retained
in position for such period as may be required by the condition
of the maturing concrete or the specification. If a component is
to be prestressed whilst still resting on the soffit form, provision
shall be made to allow for elastic deformation and any variation
in weight distribution. As far as practicable, formwork joints shall
coincide with construction joints.
7.1.2. Form Lining
7.1.2.1. The type and treatment of any lining (plywood, metal, plastic,
Controlled Permeability Formwork liner, et cetera) of the forms
shall be appropriate to the concrete finish required.
7.1.2.2. The Controlled Permeability Formwork (CPF) liner shall have the
(i) The requirement for a special finish shall be as for

traditional formwork finishes except that the formwork
shall be covered by a CPF liner.
(ii) CPF liner shall be used on all surfaces as detailed on the

Drawings.
(iii) The CPF liner shall be a Water Bylaws Scheme -

Approved Product for use with potable water in
accordance with BS 6920.
(iv) The CPF liner shall have the following properties:
a) Compression of less than 10% under a pressure

200kPa.
b) Maximum pore size of less than 0.030mm.
c) Minimum water retention capacity of 0.35 l/m2.
d) Result in bleed water from the liner which is free from

cement and fine aggregate particles.
(v) The concrete cast against the CPF liner shall have an
even uniformly textured matt finish and shall be free of
blowholes and other surface blemishes. The use of the
CPF liner shall meet the following performance
requirements which should be demonstrated by the
supply of test certificate:

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
and made good to the approval of the S.O..
7.4.6. Following the removal of forms, no further loads shall be imposed upon
the concrete until at least after the completion of the curing period or until
such later time as in the opinion of the S.O. the concrete shall have
attained sufficient strength to safely withstand such loads. Full design
loads shall not be applied to any structure until all load bearing concrete
is at least 28 days old.
7.5. Inspection and Making Good
7.5.1. The surface of the concrete shall be inspected for defects and for
conformity to the surface finish specified and where appropriate, with
approved sample finishes.
7.5.2. Subject to the strength and durability of the concrete being unimpaired,
the making good of surface defects may be permitted but the level of
acceptance shall be appropriate to the type and quality of the finish
specified and ensure satisfactory permanence and durability.
7.5.3. Any remedial treatment of surfaces shall be approved by the S.O.

following inspection immediately after removing the formwork and shall be
carried out without delay.
8. Mass and Lean Concrete
Mass and lean concrete shall consist of cement, fine aggregate and coarse aggregate in
the nominal ratio by volume of 1:3:6 and 1:4:8 respectively. However, where a denser and
more workable concrete can be produced by a variation in the ratio of the fine aggregate
to that of coarse aggregate, this ratio may be varied within the limits (1:1½) and (1:3),
provided that the volumes of fine and coarse aggregate, each measured separately, shall
nevertheless equal the sum of the volumes of fine and coarse aggregate appropriate to
the nominal mix. The concrete shall be mixed as described for reinforced concrete.
9. Building Accuracy
After removal of formwork, the Contractor shall take measurements as directed by the S.O.
to check the deviation of the reinforced concrete works from specified dimensions shown
on the Drawings. All measurements shall be recorded and submitted to the S.O.. Any
deviation in building accuracy shall comply with BS EN 13670.
10. Apparatus
The Contractor shall provide the following apparatus for use on the Site at all times:
10.1. Concrete slump test apparatus and flow test apparatus complying with MS 26. One
set of the apparatus shall be provided for each concreting location.
10.2. At least twelve (12) numbers of steel or cast iron moulds for casting 150mm concrete
test cubes and six (6) numbers of prismatic specimen 40 x 40mm in cross section
and 160mm in length for mortar or grout test moulds in accordance to BS EN 445.
A minimum number shall be provided such that no stripping of cubes is required
prior to 24 hours setting and hardening period.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
Table D9. Durability Recommendations for Reinforced or Prestressed Elements of Structures

with an Intended Working Life of at Least 50 Years
Compressive strength class, maximum w/c ratio and minimum cement or combination content for normal-weight
Nominal concrete with 20 mm maximum aggregate size Cement/
cover combination
(mm) 15 +∆c 20 + ∆c 25 + ∆c 30 + ∆c 35 + ∆c 40 + ∆c 45 + ∆c 50 + ∆c 60 + ∆c 70 + ∆c 80 + ∆c types
Corrosion induced by carbonation (XC exposure classes)
C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25
All in Table
XC1
0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 D1
240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240
C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30

All in Table
XC2 - - 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 D1
260 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 260
All in Table
C40/50 C32/40 C28/35 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30
D1
-
0.45 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65
except IVB-V
XC3/4 340 300 280 260 260 260 260 260 260 260
C40/50 C32/40 C28/35 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30
- - 0.45 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 IVB-V
340 300 280 260 260 260 260 260 260
Corrosion induced by chlorides other than seawater (XD exposure classes) adequate for any associated carbonation induced corrosion (XC)
C40/50 C32/40 C28/35 C28/35 C28/35 C28/35 C28/35 C28/35 C28/35

All in Table
XD1 - -
0.45 0.55 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 D1
360 320 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
CEM I, IIA,
C40/50 C32/40 C28/35 C28/35 C28/35 C28/35 C28/35 C28/35
IIB-S,
- - -
0.40 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 CEM I-SR0,
380 340 320 320 320 320 320 320 CEM I-SR3
C35/45 C28/35 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30
XD2 - - - 0.40 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 IIB-V, IIIA
380 340 320 320 320 320 320 320
C32/40 C25/30 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25

- - - 0.40 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 IIIB, IVB-V
380 340 320 320 320 320 320 320
CEM I, IIA,
C45/55 C40/50 C35/45 C35/45 C35/45 C35/45
IIB-S
- - - - -
0.35 0.40 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 CEM I-SR0,
380 380 360 360 360 360 CEM I-SR3
C35/45 C32/40 C28/35 C28/35 C28/35 C28/35
XD3 - - - - - IIB-V, IIIA
0.40 0.45 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
380 360 340 340 340 340
C32/40 C28/35 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30
- - - - - 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 IIIB, IVB-V
380 360 340 340 340 340

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01

with an Intended Working Life of at Least 50 Years.
(continued)
Nominal Cement/
concrete with 20 mm maximum aggregate size
cover Combination
(mm) types
30 +∆c 35 +∆c 40 +∆c 45 + ∆c 50 +∆c 55 + ∆c 60 +∆c 65 + ∆c 70 +∆c 75 + ∆c 80 +∆c
Corrosion induced by chlorides from seawater (XS exposure classes) adequate for any associated carbonation induced corrosion (XC)
C45/55 C40/50 C35/45 C32/40 C28/35 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30

CEM I, IIA,
- - - 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 IIB-S
380 380 360 340 320 320 320 320
C40/50 C32/40 C28/35 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30
0.35 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 IIB-V, IIIA
380 360 340 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320
XS1
IIB-V ≥ 25 %
C35/45 C28/35 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30
fly ash,
0.40 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 IIIA ≥ 46 %
380 340 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 ggbs
C32/40 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30
0.40 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 IV-B, IIIB
380 340 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320
C45/55 C40/50 C40/50 C35/45 C32/40

CEM I, IIA,
- - - - - - 0.35 0.40 0.40 0.45 0.50 IIB-S
380 380 380 360 340
C35/45 C32/40 C28/35 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30
- - 0.35 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 IIB-V, IIIA
380 360 340 320 320 320 320 320 320
XS2 IIB-V ≥ 25 %
C40/50 C32/40 C28/35 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30
fly ash,
-
0.35 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 IIIA ≥ 46 %
380 360 340 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 ggbs
C35/45 C28/35 C25/30 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25
- 0.35 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 IV-B, IIIB
380 360 340 320 320 320 320 320 320 320
C45/50
CEM I, IIA,
- - - - - - - - - - 0.35 IIB-S
380
C40/50 C35/45 C32/40 C28/35 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30
- - - - 0.35 0.45 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.55 IIB-V, IIIA
380 380 360 340 320 320 320
XS3 IIB-V ≥ 25 %
C40/50 C32/40 C28/35 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C20/25
fly ash,
- - -
0.35 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 IIIA ≥ 46 %
380 360 340 320 320 320 320 320 ggbs
C35/45 C28/35 C25/30 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25

- - - 0.35 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 IV-B, IIIB
380 360 340 320 320 320 320 320

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01

with an Intended Life of at Least 100 Years
Compressive strength class, maximum w/c ratio and minimum cement or combination content for normal-weight concrete
Nominal with 20 mm maximum aggregate size Cement/
cover combination
(mm) 15 + ∆c 20 + ∆c 25 +∆c 30 +∆c 35 +∆c 40 + ∆c 45+ ∆c 50 +∆c 55 +∆c 60 +∆c 70 +∆c 80 +∆c types
Corrosion induced by carbonation (XC exposure classes)

C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25
All in Table
XC1 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 D1
240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240
C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30
All in Table
XC2 - - 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 D1
260 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 260
All in Table
C40/50 C35/45 C30/37 C28/35 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30
D1
- - -
0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 except IVB-
XC3/4 340 320 300 280 260 260 260 260 260 V
C40/50 C35/45 C30/37 C28/35 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30
- - - - 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 IVB-V
340 320 300 280 260 260 260 260
Corrosion induced by chlorides other than seawater (XD exposure classes) adequate for associated carbonation induced corrosion (XC)
C45/55 C40/50 C35/45 C32/40 C28/35 C28/35 C28/35 C28/35 C28/35
All in Table
XD1 - - - 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 D1
380 360 340 320 300 300 300 300 300
CEM I, IIA,
C35/45 C32/40 C28/35 C28/35 C28/35 C28/35 C28/35
IIB-S,
- - - - -
0.45 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 CEM I-SR0,
360 340 320 320 320 320 320 CEM I-SR3
C32/40 C28/35 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30
XD2 - - - - - 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 IIB-V, IIIA
360 340 320 320 320 320 320
C28/35 C25/30 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25
- - - - - 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 IIIB, IVB-V
360 340 320 320 320 320 320
CEM I, IIA,
C45/55 C40/50 C35/45 C35/45
IIB-S
- - - - - - - -
0.35 0.40 0.45 0.45 CEM I-SR0,
380 380 360 360 CEM I-SR3
C40/50 C35/45 C32/40 C28/35 C25/30 C25/30
XD3 - - - - - - 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.50 0.50 IIB-V, IIIA
380 380 360 340 320 320
C32/40 C28/35 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30
- - - - - - 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.50 0.55 0.55 IIIB, IVB-V
380 360 340 320 320 320

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01

with an Intended Life of at Least 100 Years
(continued)
Nominal concrete with 20 mm maximum aggregate size Cement/
cover combination
(mm) types
30 +∆c 35 + ∆c 40 +∆c 45 +∆c 50 + ∆c 55 +∆c 60+∆c 65 +∆c 70 +∆c 75 +∆c 80 +∆c
Corrosion induced by chlorides from seawater (XS exposure classes) adequate for associated carbonation induced corrosion (XC)
C45/55 C40/50 C35/45 C32/40

CEM I, IIA,
- - - - - - - 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50 IIB-S
380 380 360 340
C40/50 C40/50 C35/45 C32/40 C28/35 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30
- 0.35 0.35 0.45 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 IIB-V, IIIA
380 380 380 360 340 320 320 320 320 320
IIB-V ≥ 25 %
C35/45 C32/40 C28/35 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30
XS1 fly ash,
- -
0.40 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 IIIA ≥ 46 %
380 360 340 320 320 320 320 320 320 ggbs
C32/40 C28/35 C28/35 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30
- - 0.45 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55
380 360 340 320 320 320 320 320 320
C35/45 C30/37 C28/35 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30

- - 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 IVB-V
380 360 340 320 320 320 320 320 320
CEM I, IIA,
- - - - - - - - - - -
IIB-S
C40/50 C35/45 C32/40 C28/35 C28/35 C25/30 C25/30
- - - 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.50 0.55 0.55 IIB-V, IIIA
380 380 360 340 340 320 320
XS2 IIB-V ≥ 25 %
C40/50 C35/45 C32/40 C28/35 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30 C25/30
fly ash,
0.35 0.40 0.40 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 IIIA ≥ 46 %
380 380 360 340 320 320 320 320 ggbs
C35/45 C32/40 C28/35 C25/30 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25 C20/25
0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 IVB-V, IIIB
380 380 360 340 320 320 320 320
CEM I, IIA,
- - - - - - - - - - -
IIB-S
C40/50 C40/50 C35/45 C32/40 C28/35
- - - - - - 0.35 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50 IIB-V, IIIA
380 380 380 360 340
IIB-V ≥ 25 %
XS3 C40/50 C35/45 C32/40 C25/30 C25/30
fly ash,
- - - - - -
0.35 0.40 0.40 0.55 0.55 IIIA ≥ 46 %
380 380 360 320 320 ggbs
C35/45 C32/40 C28/35 C20/25 C20/25
- - - - - - 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.55 0.55 IVB-V, IIIB
380 380 360 320 320

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION H: TIMBER, JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY PAGE
1. General H/1
2. Timber Grades And Size Tolerances H/1
3. Treatment of Timber H/2
4. Moisture Content And Storage H/4
5. Structural Assemblies Of Timber H/4
6. Timber Joints H/5
7. Prefabricated Timber Roof Truss System H/7
8. Engineered Timber Product (ETP) for Structures H/9
9. Carpentry Works H/17
10. Joinery Works H/17
11. Timber Floor Finish H/18
12. Ceiling Timber Battens H/18
13. Timber Partitions H/18
14. Fascia And Barge Boards H/18
15. External Boarding H/18
16. Staircase And Balustrades H/19
17. Timber Solid Panel Doors H/19
18. PVC Doors H/20
19. Products And Materials H/20
20. Ironmongery H/22
21. Built-in Furniture H/22
©COPYRIGHT JKR MALAYSIA

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION H: TIMBER, JOINERY
No. Pindaan : 00
AND IRONMONGERY
JKR MALAYSIA Muka Surat : H/5
5.1.3. Bearing surfaces of notches and other cuttings shall be true and smooth
and in appropriate relation to the other surfaces of the piece.
5.2. Notches other than at the ends of beams shall be U-shaped formed by parallel
cuts to previously drilled holes. The diameter of the hole shall be equal to the width
of the required notch.
5.3. Where splitting is likely to have a deleterious effect, end sealing is recommended.
For timbers known to split and check especially after installation, the ends of the
boards and scantlings shall be protected with a coating designed to minimise end
checking and checking and splitting. In severe cases where the ends and sides of
heavy joists of timbers are liable to excessive split and check due to exposure to
windward slanting sunlight, appropriate skirting or cover with a thin timber board
shall be necessary.
6. Timber Joints
6.1. When solid timber members are to be jointed together using mechanical fasteners,
the workmanship and method of assembly shall be in accordance with MS 544:
Part 5. The mechanical fasteners are as listed below:
6.1.1. Nailed Joint
Where necessary to avoid splitting, nails shall be driven into pre-drilled

holes or diameter not greater than four-fifths of the diameter of the nails.
Care shall be taken to avoid placing nails in any end split.
6.1.2. Screwed Joint
Lead holes shall be used to ensure good workmanship in making

screwed joints. The diameter of the hole for the shank shall be equal to
the diameter of the shank, and for the threaded portion, the diameter of
the hole shall not be greater than seven-eighth of the diameter of the root
diameter of the screw thread adjacent to the shank. Care shall be taken
to avoid placing screws in any end split.
6.1.3. Bolted Joint
6.1.3.1. Bolt holes shall be drilled to diameters as close as

possible to the nominal diameter of the bolt and in no
case more than 2mm larger than the bolt diameter. Care
shall be taken to avoid placing a bolt in any end split. A
minimum of one complete thread shall protrude from the
nut.
6.1.3.2. A washer shall be fitted under the head of each bolt and
under each nut. The minimum sizes of washers are
shown in Table H7 as given in accordance with MS 544:
Part 6. Where joints using split-rings are to be used, as
shown in the Drawings, the members of the joints shall
be fitted together in their appropriate positions and
clamped or spiked together before drilling. Alternatively,
drilling jigs or multiple head boring machines may be
used, or individual members may be marked out from
the setting-out or by use of prepared templates.
6.1.3.3. If either of the latter methods is employed, sample

members (usually the first ones produced) shall be
carefully checked against the setting-out.
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
No. Pindaan : 00
AND IRONMONGERY
7.7.1.2. Maximum truss spacing of 1.2m with permitted deviation

of ±0.025m.
7.7.1.3. The minimum basic wind speed shall be 35 m/s.

However, the minimum basic wind speed shall be
increased to 41 m/s for lightweight roof covering.
7.7.1.4. Maximum roof pitch shall be of 45º.
7.8. Analysis, Design Report and Drawings Submission
7.8.1. The S.P. through the Contractor shall propose to the S.O. or his approval
a roof truss system which is safe, functional and conforming to design
standard. Submission of proposal shall include truss analysis, design
report, and construction drawings. The truss analysis shall indicate all
loads, load combinations, connections criteria, bracings and tie-down of
the truss. Design output of the truss members, battens, connections, tie-
down and wall plates, anchors, bracings, truss accessories, splicing and
stiffeners where related to the analysis shall be included in the design
report. (In accordance to Specification Pre-Fabricated Timber Roof Truss
- JKR 20601-0190-12).
7.8.2. All details in the construction drawings shall be sufficient to enable

checking against the analysis and design report, by specifying and
providing not limited to: the truss layout and configuration, timber grades,
section properties of members, length of members in each truss
configuration, properties of truss accessories, specification of fastener
and anchor, tie-down and anchoring details and all types of connection
details including the connection of all attachments to the trusses.
7.8.3. Technical specifications for fastener and anchor of which the design
refers to shall also be submitted. Verification test certificate from an
approved accredited laboratory on the technical parameter specified in
the technical specifications shall be submitted upon request by the S.O..
7.9. Warranty
7.9.1. When a refabricated timber roof truss system is used, the Contractor
shall submit to the S.O. a warranty from the S.P. certified by a P.E. with
the following provisions:
7.9.1.1. All roof truss components shall be manufactured only by

approved S.P. producing quality assured products and
services.
7.9.1.2. System Provider’s Warranty against any defects or

damages which may arise during a period of ten (10)
years from the Date of Practical Completion of Works
due to any defect, fault or insufficiency in design,
materials or workmanship or against any other failure
which an experienced Contractor may reasonably
contemplate but shall not include normal replacement
and maintenance. (In accordance to Specification Pre-
Fabricated Timber Roof - JKR 20601-0190-12 ).

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
No. Pindaan : 00
AND IRONMONGERY
19.4. Fibre Building Boards
19.4.1. All fibre building boards namely, Hard Board, Medium Board and Medium
Density Fibre Board (MDF) shall comply with MS 1429 and MS 1912.
The type and quality of Fibre building boards shall be as approved by the
S.O. Perforated hardboards shall be not less than 3.2mm thick with
maximum of 4.8mm perforation at 19mm centers unless otherwise stated
in the Drawings.
19.4.2. All fibre building boards shall be fixed strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instruction. Unless otherwise detailed in the drawings, the
ceiling boards shall be butt and `V’ jointed.
19.5. Composite Boards
19.5.1. The type and quality of composite boards shall be as approved by the
S.O. and shall be fixed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instruction.
19.5.2. Fixing of timber base composite boards shall comply with the
manufacturer’s instructions. Panels which are to be painted or varnished
shall be properly sanded down and holes and crevices filled with
approved wood putty or filler to the satisfaction of the S.O.. Panels which
are for wet prone area, shall comply with MS 1787.
19.6. Woodwool Slabs
Woodwool slab shall comply with MS 1036 and shall be of the type and quality as
approved by the S.O.. Unless otherwise specified in the Drawings, the slab shall
be laid with its length at right angles to support, fixed strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instruction.
19.7. Wood Cement Boards
19.7.1. Wood cement boards shall comply with the requirements of MS 934 or
MS 544: Part 4. In fixing, the board must be supported on all four edges
and at immediate positions at centres not exceeding 610mm. Joints
between boards shall occur on centers of supports. Minimum edge
distance shall be 20mm.
19.7.2. Boards which are to be painted shall be lightly sanded and any dust shall
be removed from the surface with a piece of clean coarse cloth. Any
filling compounds used shall be alkali-resistant. Fixing of the board shall
be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
19.8. High Pressure Laminate (HPL)
High Pressure Laminate is a thermoset paper/plastic composite, where decorative

papers impregnated with melamine are consolidated over phenolic-impregnated
craft papers at high temperature and pressure to form a homogenous laminate.
Unless otherwise specified, HPL shall comply with MS 1787: Part 1-15 for
durability.
19.9. Wood Plastic Composite (WPC)
WPC shall be made from minimum 70% rice husk and balance recycled HDPE.
WPC solid decking system shall be of 145mm (w) x 25mm (t) fixed onto 300mm
c/c on Suspended Leveling System with hot dipped zinc-aluminium alloy coated
steel with a minimum coating mass of AZ150 to AS/NZS 1397-2002 steel sheet
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION V: GROUND IMPROVEMENT PAGE
1. Description V/1
2. Removal and Replacement V/1
3. Surcharge V/1
4. Geosynthetics V/3
5. Prefabricated Vertical Drains (PVD) V/10
6. Stone Columns V/16
7. Deep Soil Mixing V/25
8. Dynamic Compaction V/32
9. Piled Embankment V/35
10. Geotechnical Instrumentation V/36

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
JKR MALAYSIA Muka Surat : V/1
1. Description
This work shall consist of numerous ground improvement technique and instrumentation
in regards with general requirement, method of installation and relevant testing to be
implemented during construction.
2. Removal and Replacement
2.1. General
This Section shall be read together with SECTION B: EXCAVATION AND

EARTHWORKS. Removal and replacement shall be used for ground improvement
purposes to increase the bearing capacity of the ground. The work involves removal
of unsuitable material and soft soil layer, hence replaced with suitable material as
shown in the Drawing. Unsuitable material and suitable material are as defined in
SECTION B: EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORKS.
2.2. Determination of Depth of Removal
2.2.1. The depth of removal shall be as shown on the Drawing or as determined

by trial pits or JKR/Mackintosh Probe test as approved by the S.O.. The
trial pits or probe test shall be carried out at locations as indicated in the
Drawing or as instructed by the S.O..
2.2.2. The apparatus used shall be the standard JKR probes or Mackintosh
probes. Procedure of works and details of the JKR probes and Mackintosh
probes are as per Standard Specification for Roadworks “SECTION 17:
SITE INVESTIGATION”.
2.3. Materials for Replacement
2.3.1. Where geotextile is specified, it shall be laid as shown in the Drawing

before commencement of filling works. The specification of geotextile shall
be in accordance to sub-section 4.4..
2.3.2. Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawing, suitable materials for fill and
method of compaction shall conform to SECTION B: EXCAVATION AND
EARTHWORKS.
2.3.3. For replacement of excavated material under standing water, the fill
material shall be granular material conforming to SECTION B:
EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORKS.
3. Surcharge
3.1. General
3.1.1. The execution of surcharging works shall be in accordance with this

Specification and details as shown in the Drawing.
3.1.2. The scope of works shall cover the following:
3.1.2.1. Spread, level and compact surcharging material in accordance

with SECTION B: EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORKS and
details as shown in the Drawing.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
3.1.2.2. Install geotechnical instrumentation to monitor and validate the

performance of the works.
3.1.2.3. Removal and disposal of excess material on completion of

specified surcharge period or as shown in Drawing or when
directed by the S.O..
3.1.2.4. Removal and disposal of excess material of the embankment to

the line, level and grade in accordance to details as shown in
the Drawing to complete the works.
3.1.3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of surcharge material
and the removal and disposal of excess material on completion of the
specified surcharge period or when directed by the S.O..
3.2. Materials
3.2.1. Materials for use in surcharging shall be suitable material conforming to

Standard Specification for Building Works SECTION B: EXCAVATION
AND EARTHWORKS.
3.2.2. The filling material shall be laid in layer and compacted as per SECTION
B: EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORKS.
3.3. Surcharge Load and Surcharge Period
The surcharge load shall be applied throughout the surcharge period. The
surcharge period specified in the Drawing is subjected to validation from field
monitoring results, which may be shortened or lengthened at the discretion of the
S.O. based on interpretation of field monitoring results.
3.4. Stability of Embankment
3.4.1. The height of the embankment including the surcharge shall at no time
exceed the specified height in the Drawing. The placement of the
surcharge materials shall be in uniform layers and care shall be given to
ensure stability of the embankment. The Contractor shall check at all times
the rate of placement and adjust accordingly in order to avoid instability.
Stockpiling of excess earth, machineries or any other materials shall not be
permitted on the embankment.
3.4.2. Where counterweight berm is designed to enhance the stability of the

embankment including the surcharge, the counterweight berm shall be
constructed first prior to placement of surcharge material.
3.4.3. The width, height and slope gradient of the counterweight berms shall be
constructed in accordance to details shown in the Drawing. Any remedial
works arising from non-compliance of the requirements of this section
which leads to embankment failure shall be borne by the Contractor at his
own cost and time.
3.5. Drainage Blanket
3.5.1. The drainage blanket layer shall consist of clean sand with less than 10%
of fine content passing the 75m sieve having grading within the
respective limits specified in SECTION B: EXCAVATION AND
EARTHWORKS, TABLE B1.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
3.5.2. The drainage material for depositing in water shall be deposited without the
associated use of a compaction plant.
3.5.3. The drainage blanket shall be built up evenly in horizontal layers, each not
more than 300mm thick up to the design thickness as specified in the
Drawing. Filling shall commence from the lowest level, and each layer shall
cover the full area of the intended total fill area at that level before
deposition of the subsequent layer commences.
3.5.4. The drainage system shall be regularly maintained throughout the

surcharge period to ensure smooth dissipation of water. The outlets of
water at the brinks of drainage blanket shall be cleared of any obstruction
at all times by way of regular maintenance.
3.6. Instrumentation
3.6.1. Surcharge monitoring shall be carried out to monitor stability, settlement,

deflection and pore water pressure of the embankment due to Surcharging.
The types and numbers of instruments and frequency of monitoring shall
be in accordance to the Drawing or as specified by the S.O.. Specification
for Instrumentation shall be in accordance with sub-section 10..
3.6.2. The monitoring results shall be submitted to the S.O. according to the
agreed frequency and shall form part of the surcharge control measures.
Evaluation and amendments to the surcharging design may be carried out
from time to time by the S.O. based on interpretations of the monitoring
results.
3.6.3. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall follow the instructions of
the manufacturer in the installation, calibration and testing of all measuring
instruments and equipment.
3.7. Removal of Surcharge Materials
3.7.1. Removal of surcharge materials shall only be carried out as instructed by

the S.O. upon completion of the specified surcharge period and validated
with field monitoring results.
3.7.2. There shall be no unauthorized removal of surcharge materials before the

completion of the specified surcharge period and any remedial works
arising from such unauthorized removal of surcharge shall be borne by the
Contractor at his own cost and time.
3.8. Use of Surcharging in Conjunction with Other Ground Improvement Methods
When surcharging is used in conjunction with other ground improvement methods

such as prefabricated vertical drains, the works shall conform to the requirements of
the associated ground improvement works.
4. Geosynthetics
4.1. General
4.1.1. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in the specification or on the

Drawing, geosynthetics for use in ground treatment shall conform to
requirement as specified herein.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
4.1.2. Geosynthetics used shall be manufactured by manufacturer that is ISO

9001 certified.
4.1.3. Geosynthetics shall be durable and resistant to naturally occurring

chemical, fungi and bacteria when in contact with soils or materials to be
treated. In addition, geosynthetics used shall be resistant against rotting,
mildew, insects, salts, alkali, solvent and other constituents of the ground
water.
4.1.4. The contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting-out of
the areas to which the geosynthetics are to be placed and provide all
necessary resources and equipment related to supply and laying of
geosynthetics to the correct level and dimension as shown in the Drawing
or as instructed by the S.O..
4.2. Packaging, Transportation and Storage
4.2.1. Geosynthetics shall be wrapped in heavy paper or similar heavy-duty

protection covering for transportation and storage. If no covered area is
available, geosynthetics shall be stored on raised platform and covered
with a waterproof canvas. Geosynthetics shall be protected from sunlight,
moisture, mud, dirt, dust, debris and other detrimental substances during
transportation and storage.
4.2.2. Each roll of geosynthetics delivered to site shall be clearly labelled with the
following:
4.2.2.1. Product brand name
4.2.2.2. Product type
4.2.2.3. Product grade
4.2.2.4. Date of manufacture or submission of mill certificate
4.2.2.5. Roll width and length
4.2.2.6. Batch serial number
4.2.3. The Contractor is solely responsible for the good condition of the
geosynthetics stored at the worksite and in the event of damages or
deterioration of the geosynthetics due to improper storage, the Contractor
shall be liable to replace the affected materials at his own cost when
4.2.4. All materials which are damaged during transportation, handling or storage
and do not meet the minimum requirements of the specification shall be
rejected by the S.O. and shall be immediately taken off the site. No
payment of any kind shall be made on the rejected product.
4.3. Quality Control and Testing
4.3.1. Submission of Material Test Report (MTR)
4.3.1.1. The contractor shall obtain the S.O.’s approval prior to

supplying the geosynthetics to the site. Prior to the procurement
of materials, the Contractor shall provide a sample and Material
Test Report (MTR) not more than two (2) years old from the
ISO/IEC 17025 accredited laboratory with the scope of
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
accreditation referring to geosynthetics, showing full compliance

of the proposed geosynthetics to all the specified property
values corresponding to their respective test methods for the
approval of the S.O.. The ISO/IEC 17025 accredited laboratory
shall be internationally recognized accredited laboratory or
higher learning institutions research laboratory.
4.3.1.2. The Contractor shall also submit technical data and samples to
verify the physical, mechanical and hydraulic properties of the
geosynthetics to be used for S.O.’s approval.
4.3.1.3. All tests shall be carried out in accordance with the Codes of
Practices and Test Standards provided within this Specification.
All cost associated with the tests and preparation of report shall
be borne solely by the Contractor.
4.3.2. Routine Sample Testing
4.3.2.1. Routine sample testing shall be carried out at factory or at an

accredited laboratory witnessed by the S.O.’s representative.
The Contractor shall submit test report after each routine test
showing compliance of the Specification.
4.3.2.2. Prior to installation and at the discretion of the S.O., test

samples shall be carried out at the frequency specified in Table
V1 and Table V2. Control testing shall be carried out for each
batch of geosynthetics in accordance with the provisions of
Table V1 and Table V2.
4.3.2.3. Individual sample shall not be less than two (2) meters in length
for non-woven geotextile and one (1) meter in length for high
strength woven geotextile and geogrid, times the full width of
the geosynthetics. Samples submitted for tests shall indicate
the linear meters of the geosynthetics and manufacturer’s
identifications represented by the sample.
4.3.2.4. Should any individual sample selected at random fail to meet

the Specification, then that roll shall be rejected, and two
additional samples shall be taken at random from two other rolls
representing the same batch. If either of these two additional
samples fails to comply with the Specification, then the entire
batch of geotextile represented by the samples shall be
rejected.
4.4. Geotextile
4.4.1. General
Geotextile shall be made of new synthetic polymeric fabric that are stable
or stabilized against ultra violet (UV) radiation such that three months
exposure to sunlight shall not reduce its specified strength to less than
70%.
4.4.2. Installation
4.4.2.1. Prior to the laying of geotextile, site clearance shall be carried

out in accordance with the Specification and Drawing or as
directed by the S.O.. All voids shall be filled with suitable
material and the area cleared of large stones and exposed tree
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
root systems or other such like protrusions. Geotextile fabric

shall be installed to the shape and requirements as specified
herein and in the Drawing.
4.4.2.2. Geotextile shall be placed just in advance of placement of the

specified overlying fill material. Geotextiles laid shall be covered
by the fill as soon as possible within seven (7) days of being
placed. The counting of this foresaid seven (7) days shall
commence immediately upon the geotextile being exposed from
its protective wrapping. Installation proposals and trials as
deemed required shall be carried out for approval by the S.O.
prior to the acceptance of the placement method for the main
works.
4.4.2.3. The geotextile shall be unrolled smoothly on the prepared

ground. In general, high strength woven geotextile shall be
placed transversely, across the direction of the road, or
otherwise as approved by the S.O.. The geotextile shall be laid
flat on the underlying surface with no wrinkles or folds and shall
extend far enough over the edges of the embankment for a
wrap-around as shown in the Drawing.
4.4.2.4. Adjacent geotextile rolls shall be overlapped or sewn in

accordance with this Specification. Overlapping of geotextile
without sewn connections shall only be allowed with the
approval of the S.O.. On curves and corners, geotextile may be
folded or cut to conform to the direction as approved by the
S.O.. The seaming of geotextile is as described in sub-section
4.4.3..
4.4.2.5. The specified overlying fill material properties and method of

compaction on the non-woven geotextile fabric shall be in
accordance with SECTION B: EXCAVATION AND
EARTHWORKS. Fill materials shall be deposited in layers in
accordance with SECTION B: EXCAVATION AND
EARTHWORKS and shall be spread simultaneously with the
dumping in a manner to prevent any localized distress or failure
of the ground.
4.4.2.6. No traffic shall travel directly on the non-woven geotextile and

there shall be no sudden stops, starts or turns on the fill
materials by the construction equipment or other such actions
which may cause damage to the geotextile.
4.4.2.7. In water logged or swampy areas, the non-woven geotextiles

shall be sunk after jointing by ballasting with sufficient
sandbags. To control the location of the mattress, buoys shall
be fixed with ropes on the edges of the non-woven geotextile or
using other method as approved by the S.O.. The mattress
shall be ballasted as soon as possible after positioning.
4.4.2.8. The contractor shall submit a detailed method statement on

installation of the non-woven geotextile to the S.O. for approval
prior to commencing installation works.
4.4.3. Jointing of Geotextile
4.4.3.1. In general, the joints are allowed for both machine direction
(MD) and cross direction (CD) of the non-woven or woven
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
geotextile used in separation and filtration application. Jointing

of reinforcement geosynthethics such as high strength woven
geotextile, geogrid, etc. is only allowed in the CD for reinforced
soil structures (reinforced soil wall/soil slope and mechanically
stabilized embankment).
4.4.3.2. Methods of Jointing
(i) There are two common methods to connect the geotextile,

which are by overlapping or seaming. The decision to use
an overlap or seam shall be based on the following: -
a) The weakness of the foundation soil upon which the

geotextile is directly placed with respect to the
potential for mud waving during the backfill operation;
b) the material and labour costs of deploying individual

geotextile panels with extra material required for the
overlap versus the material and labour costs of
seaming and installing large, fabricated panels; and
c) The feasibility of deploying individual geotextile panels

in poor access and/or adverse climatic conditions.
(ii) Table V3 provides a guide in determining overlap

requirements for separation/stabilization applications
based on sub grade strength. When the sub grade soils
upon which the geotextile is directly placed provides shear
strength less than CBR = 0.5, the adjacent geotextile
panels shall be seamed.
4.4.3.3. Sewn Seams
(i) The geotextile may be jointed using an approved

handheld sewing machine by sewing a double thread ‘lock
stitch’ with 'prayer' or ‘J’ or ‘butterfly’ seam (minimum lap
of 50mm) as shown in Figure V1. Typically, polyester
thread is used for seaming geotextiles. Minimum required
density of stitches during sewing of the geotextile is 3
stitches per 25mm. The thread shall have a breaking load
of not less than 200N.
(ii) The expected seam strength shall be more than 70% of

the original strength of the non-woven geotextile. For high
strength woven geotextiles, the expected seam strength
shall be more than 30% of the original strength. Samples
of such sewn seam assembly shall be tested in
accordance with ISO 10321 or ASTM D4884 as requested
by the S.O..
4.4.4. Non-Woven Geotextile
4.4.4.1. Non-woven geotextile described in this specification shall be for

separation and filtration application of the ground treatment.
4.4.4.2. Unless otherwise approved by the S.O., non-woven geotextile

shall be needle punched fibres of polypropylene or polyester
supplied by an approved manufacturer.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
4.4.4.3. The physical, mechanical and hydraulic properties of non-

woven geotextile shall meet the minimum requirement as given
in Table V4. Minimum roll width shall be 4.0 meters.
4.4.4.4. In addition to requirement given in sub-section 4.3., the

Contractor shall furnish test certificate from accredited
laboratory that includes the following:
(i) Wide width tensile strength
(ii) Elongation
(iii) CBR Puncture Resistance
(iv) Permeability
(v) Effective Opening Size, O90 or Apparent Opening Size,

O95
4.4.5. High Strength Woven Geotextile
4.4.5.1. High strength woven geotextile described in this specification

shall be for basal reinforcement application of the ground
treatment.
4.4.5.2. Unless otherwise approved by the S.O., high strength woven

geotextile shall comprise of woven yarns of high tenacity
polyester filaments with properties that meet the requirement as
given in Table V5. The edges of fabric shall be selvedge or
otherwise finished in such a way to prevent the outer yarn from
unravelling.
4.4.5.3. High strength woven geotextile shall be free of any flaws that
may have an adverse effect on its physical and mechanical
properties. Minimum roll width shall be 5.0 meters.
4.5. Geogrid
4.5.1. General
4.5.1.1. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in the specification or in

the Drawing, geogrid for use as geotechnical reinforcement and
in ground treatment shall conform to the requirements as
specified herein.
4.5.1.2. Geogrid shall be made of high tenacity polyester coated with

PVC that meets the requirements as given Table V6. The
geogrid shall be formed from cross-laid strips (geo-linear
elements) bonded at the cross-over points. The geo-linear
elements shall consist of continuous high tenacity polyester
fibres coated with PVC.
4.5.1.3. Bonding at the cross-over points shall be such that the

properties as required by the Contract are not affected. The
strength of the bond shall be such as to ensure the function of
the geogrid is achieved.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
4.5.1.4. The polyester fibres shall be:
(i) Coated with PVC to completely prevent ingress of

moisture;
(ii) All free ends shall be sealed to completely prevent ingress

of moisture;
4.5.1.5. The weft (referring to CD) elements shall be the same quality
material as the warp (referring to MD) elements.
4.5.2. Durability of Geogrid
4.5.2.1. Durability of the geogrid shall be such that a design life of 120
years is achieved. The geogrid shall not deteriorate from
exposure to sunlight and due to chemical action or
biodegradation when buried in wet soil.
4.5.2.2. Information relating to the durability of the geogrid shall be

submitted as required by the S.O. for his approval.
4.5.3. Method of Installation
4.5.3.1. Installation of geogrid shall be carried out by qualified and

experienced workers under the supervision of a competent
person. The geogrid shall be installed in compliance to
Manufacturer's instructions utilizing approved plants/equipment.
The fill to the lines and levels shall be well-graded granular, dry
cohesive soils or other engineered fill as shown in the Drawing.
4.5.3.2. All works related to earthwork shall be referred to SECTION B:

EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORKS.
4.5.3.3. Installation of Geogrid for Reinforced Slope
(i) At each level of geogrid reinforcement, backfill shall be

roughly levelled before placing the geogrid. Compaction
shall be carried out to the requirements of the
Specifications. During backfill placement, trucks and
heavy vehicles shall be kept back at least 1.0 meter from
the face of the Geogrid Reinforced Slope.
(ii) The deposition, spreading, levelling and compaction of the

fill shall be carried out generally in a direction parallel to
the facing and shall be executed in stages to alternate
with the placing and fixing of the reinforcing elements and
the facing. The geogrid shall be laid whereby machine
direction (MD) is in a direction perpendicular to the face of
reinforced wall or slope. The overlapping width of adjacent
panels of geogrid shall be minimum 150mm.
(iii) Care shall be taken to ensure that the reinforcing

elements and facing are not damaged or displaced during
deposition, spreading, levelling and compaction of the fill.
The program of filling shall be arranged so that no
machines or vehicles run on the reinforcing elements.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
(iv) The fill within 1.0 meter of the face of the Geogrid
Reinforced Slope shall be compacted using one of the
following:
a) Vibro tamper
b) Vibrating plate compacter having a mass not

exceeding 1000kg
c) Vibrating roller having a mass per metre width of not

more than 1300kg and a total mass of not more than
1000kg
(v) The rear of the Geogrid Reinforcing Slope shall be

adequately supported either by temporary shoring or by
phasing the work to ensure the contemporaneous
deposition of the retained fill material.
4.5.3.4. Protection of Completed Geogrid Reinforced Slopes from

Erosion
The Contractor, as specified in the Drawing or where instructed

by the S.O., shall carry out adequate erosion protection
measures such as vegetation, etc.
4.5.3.5. Drainage
The Contractor, as specified in the Drawing or where instructed

by the S.O., shall carry out adequate water discharge method
such as horizontal drain, cascade drain, etc to ensure the
drainage of impounding water on the slope and the surface
runoff.
5. Prefabricated Vertical Drains (PVD)
5.1. General
5.1.1. This specification covers the technical requirements for the supply and
installation of Prefabricated Vertical Drains (PVD) as described herein. All
materials used shall meet the requirements of this specification and all
works shall be executed in accordance with the details shown in the
Drawing and the procedures described herein.
5.1.2. The Contractor shall provide all necessary resources including materials,
skilled workers, and plant/equipment to execute and complete the works
related to supply and installation of PVD as shown in the Drawing.
5.1.3. All materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with the appropriate
British Standards current at the time of tender, including those listed in this
Specification, except where the requirements of British Standards conflict
with this Specification, the latter shall take precedence unless otherwise

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
5.1.4. The Contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting-out of
the areas to which the PVD is to be placed and for the correctness of the
lines, widths and levels.
5.2. Soil Investigation Report
A soil investigation report shall be made available at the S.O.’s office for the
Contractor’s information. The report is intended solely as a preliminary guide and
neither the completeness nor the accuracy of the information provided is
guaranteed. No responsibility is assumed by the S.O. for any opinion or conclusion
given in the soil report. The Contractor shall study the given soil report and make his
own interpretation of the information provided and to make due allowance for the
effect of site conditions on his construction operations.
5.2.1. Pre-Treatment Soil Investigation
Cone Penetration Test (CPT) may be carried out to verify the thickness of
sub-soil to be treated using PVD. CPT may be carried out if necessary.
The CPT results shall be submitted to the S.O. for design verification
purpose prior to the commencement of work.
5.3. Transportation and Storage
5.3.1. The PVD materials shall be labelled or tagged for sample identification and
other quality control purposes. Each pallet shall be identified by the
manufacturer’s name, lot number, individual roll number, roll length, date of
manufacture or mill certificate, manufacturer and product identification of
the jacket and core.
5.3.2. During transportation and storage, the PVD shall be wrapped in heavy
paper, burlap or similar heavy-duty protection covering. The PVD shall be
protected from sunlight, mud, dirt, dust, debris and other detrimental
substances during transport and on-site storage.
5.3.3. The Contractor shall ensure that the PVD is in good condition and properly
stored in a covered area at the worksite. If no covered area is available,
the PVD may be stored on raised platform and covered with a waterproof
canvas. In the event of damage or deterioration of the PVD due to
improper storage, the Contractor shall be liable to replace the affected
materials at his own cost.
5.4. Materials
5.4.1. Prefabricated Vertical Drains (PVD)
5.4.1.1. General Requirements
(i) Prefabricated Vertical Drains (PVD) shall be from an

approved manufacturer and consist of a polymer core
enclosed within an external non-woven filter jacket and
shall comply with the requirements as indicated in Table
V7. The PVD shall be produced by factory with ISO 9001
certification. The manufacturing process as well as the
relevant tests required shall be accredited. The filter
jacket shall be capable of resisting all bending,

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
puncturing and tensioning subjected during installation

and design life of the drain.
(ii) The core shall be made of continuous plastic material

fabricated to facilitate drainage along the axis of the
vertical drain.
(iii) The prefabricated vertical drain shall be resistant against

rotting, mildew, bacterial action, insect, salts, acids,
alkalis, solvent and other constituents in ground water.
5.4.1.2. Quality Control and Testing
(i) Submission of Material Test Report (MTR)
This section shall be in accordance with sub-section

4.3.1..
(ii) Routine Sample Testing
a) This section shall be in accordance with sub-section

4.3.2..
b) Prior to installation and at the discretion of the S.O.,

individual test sample shall be cut off from at least one
roll selected at random to represent each batch or the
first 100,000 meters, whichever is lesser. Individual
sample shall be not less than 15 meters in length.
Samples submitted for tests shall indicate the linear
meters of drain and manufacturer's identifications
represented by the sample.
5.4.2. Geotextile
This section shall be in accordance with sub-section 4.4..
5.4.3. Drainage Blanket
5.5. Installation
Proper method statement for installation shall be prepared and submitted to the
S.O. for approval before commencement of works. The method statement shall
include the use of all necessary resources such as materials, manpower,
machineries and equipments. Also, to include is the sequence of works with
diagrammatical illustrations where necessary, workmanship requirements as well as
the construction quality controls.
5.5.1. Procedure
The equipment used for the installation of the PVD shall have adequate
capacity to install the PVD to the required depth at one go without the need
for any withdrawal and re-insertion. The Contractor shall be responsible to
ensure that the working platform is stable and safe without risks to workers
and nearby buildings or structures.
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
5.5.2. Geotextile
The installation of geotextile section shall be carried out in accordance with

sub-section 4.4..
5.5.3. Drainage Blanket
5.5.4. Prefabricated Vertical Drain (PVD)
5.5.4.1. Equipment
(i) PVD shall be installed with approved equipment of a type

which will cause minimum disturbance to the sub-soil
during the installation and maintain the mandrel in a
vertical position.
(ii) PVD shall be inserted into the soil using a mandrel or

sleeve. The mandrel or sleeve shall protect the drain
material from tears, cuts and abrasion during installation
and shall be retracted after each drain is installed.
(iii) The size and shape of the mandrel or sleeve shall be as

close as possible to the size and shape of the drains to
minimize disturbance to the soil. The length of the mandrel
shall be not less than the maximum length of the drain.
The mandrel shall be capable of making a clean puncture
through any geotextile if necessary.
(iv) The mandrel or sleeve shall be provided with an anchor

plate or similar arrangement at the bottom to prevent the
soil from entering the bottom of the mandrel during the
installation of the drain and to anchor the drain tip at the
required depth at the time of mandrel withdrawal.
(v) The installation equipment of PVD shall come with a data

log that shows the details of each PVD installed which
includes, among others, the tag number and depth
depending on what is required by the S.O.. The data log
shall be converted into a file that is accessible and
readable to the S.O..
5.5.4.2. Method Statement
(i) Fourteen (14) working days before the commencement of

PVD installation, the Contractor shall submit full details of
the materials, equipment, sequence and method proposed
for PVD installation to the S.O. for review and approval.
Approval by the S.O. of installation sequence and
methods shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility to install drains in accordance with the
Drawing and specifications.
(ii) Approval by the S.O. of the method or equipment used to

install the drains shall not constitute, necessarily,
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
acceptance of the method for the remainder of the project.

If, at any time, the S.O. considers that the method of
installation does not produce satisfactory quality and
productivity as expected, the Contractor shall alter his
method and/or equipment as necessary to comply with
these specifications.
5.5.4.3. Setting Out
The intended positions of PVD shall be marked, numbered and

pegged by the Contractor using a baseline and benchmark
indicated by the S.O.. The Contractor shall take all reasonable
precautions to preserve the pegs and is responsible for any
necessary re-pegging.
5.5.4.4. Depth and Positioning
PVD shall be installed from the working surface to the depth

shown in the Drawing, or to such depth as directed by the S.O..
The Contractor shall furnish to the S.O. on the next working day
a summary of the PVD installed that day. The summary shall
include the PVD type, location and length of PVD installed at
each location.
5.5.4.5. Verticality
Equipment for installation PVD shall be plumbed prior to

installing each PVD and shall not deviate from the vertical more
than 1 in 50 during installing of any PVD.
5.5.4.6. Tolerances
The positions of installed PVD shall not vary by more than

150mm from the positions indicated in the Drawing. PVD
installed which deviated more than 150mm from design plan
positions or are damaged or improperly installed shall be
rejected and abandoned in place and replaced accordingly.
5.5.4.7. Installation
(i) PVD shall be installed using a continuous push using

static weight or vibration. Installation techniques using
driving will not be permitted.
(ii) The installation shall be performed, without any damage to

the PVD during advancement or retraction of the mandrel.
In no case will alternate raising or lowering of the mandrel
during advancement be permitted. Raising of the mandrel
will only be permitted after completion of an installation.
(iii) The completed PVD shall be cut off neatly 150mm above
the working grade, or as otherwise specified in the
contract Drawing.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
5.5.4.8. Instrumentation Damage
The Contractor shall observe precautions necessary for

protection of any field instrumentation devices. The Contractor
shall replace, at his own expense, any instrumentation or
equipment that has been damaged or become unreliable as a
result of his operations prior to continuing with PVD installation
or other construction activities.
5.5.4.9. Pre-Augering
(i) The Contractor shall be responsible for penetrating

overlying fill material as necessary to satisfactorily install
the PVD. Satisfactory installation may require clearing
obstructions defined as any man-made or natural object or
strata that prevents the proper insertion of the mandrel
and installation of the PVD.
(ii) Where obstructions are encountered below the working

surface which cannot be penetrated by the installation
equipment, the Contractor shall complete the drain from
the elevation of the working surface to the obstruction and
notify the S.O. prior to installing any more PVD.
(iii) At the direction of the S.O. and under his review, the
Contractor shall attempt to install a new PVD within
600mm horizontally from the obstructed PVD. A maximum
of two attempts shall be made as directed by the S.O.. If
the PVD still cannot be installed to the design tip
elevation, the PVD location shall be abandoned and the
installation equipment shall be moved to the next location,
or other action shall be taken as directed by the S.O..
(iv) The Contractor may use augering, spudding, or other

approved methods to loosen the soil and any obstructive
material prior to the installation of PVD. The obstruction
clearance procedure is subjected to the approval of the
S.O.; however, such, approval shall not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility to clear obstructions in
accordance with the specification.
(v) If augering is the selected method, the augers shall have a

minimum outside diameter equal to the largest horizontal
dimension of the mandrel, shoe or anchor, whichever is
greater.
5.5.4.10. Splicing
Splicing of PVD material shall be done by stapling in a

workmanlike manner and so as to ensure structural and
hydraulic continuity of the drain. At the splice, the minimum
overlap shall be 150mm and the lower portion of the jacket shall
be external to the upper portion. A maximum of 1 splice per
PVD installed will be permitted.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
5.5.5. Surcharge
This section shall be in accordance with sub-section 3..
5.6. As-Built Records
The Contractor shall submit to S.O. the daily installation record verified by S.O.
representative, specialist contractor and main contractor on the next working day.
The contractor shall submit as-built PVD treatment area plan certified by a Licensed
Surveyor within fourteen (14) working days of completion of the last PVD. The as-
built Drawing and records shall include the as-built position and depth of each PVD
point noting any deviation outside specified tolerances.
6. Stone Columns
6.1. General
The work shall consist of the supply of equipment, labour and materials for the
execution of stone column works for ground improvement. The stone column
described in this Specification shall be carried out by deep vibratory compaction
incorporating stone columns formed with imported granular backfill complying with
the requirements of the latest version of BS EN 14731. This section shall be also in
accordance with sub-section 5.1..
6.2. Soil investigation report
6.2.1. Pre-Treatment Soil Investigation
This section shall be in accordance with sub-section 5.2.1..
6.3.1. Two (2) weeks before the commencement of the works, the Contractor
shall submit to the S.O. a detailed method statement for the works. The
method statement shall contain the following:
6.3.1.1. A detailed construction sequence;
6.3.1.2. Shop drawing showing details of all special requirements for the
construction activities;
6.3.1.3. Design calculation of key temporary works endorsed by a P.E.;
6.3.1.4. Materials, plant and labour requirement at each construction

stage;
6.3.1.5. Rate of production output based on resources allocated;
6.3.1.6. Environmental Management Plan in related with the works;
6.3.1.7. Other information relevant to the works.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
6.3.2. If requested by the S.O., the Contractor shall submit additional information
pertaining to the method of construction.
6.3.3. The Contractor shall not change the methods which have been approved
by the S.O.’s Approval. of the Contractor’s proposed methods of
construction shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of any of his duties
or responsibilities under the contract.
The Contractor shall report immediately to the S.O. any circumstances which, in the
Contractor’s opinion, indicate ground conditions that may differ from those expected
by him from interpretation of the soil investigation report. The Contractor’s report
shall be in the form of written notice of which shall be given to the S.O. at the
earliest possible time after encountering such conditions and obstructions. The
report shall be accompanied by all information available to the Contractor which will
materially assist the S.O. in verifying the conditions reported.
6.5.1. The Contractor shall pay very careful attention to the construction
constraints imposed by adjacent structures. The Contractor shall exercise
extra care and implement adequate monitoring measures when carrying
out the works so as not to disturb or damage the existing adjacent
properties and foundations. The Contractor shall provide a proposal for
monitoring adjacent properties for any detrimental effects arising out in
execution of the works, so that appropriate and timely preventive action
can be taken to minimise damage. The Contractor’s proposal and
monitoring program shall be certified by his Professional Engineer and
approved by S.O..
6.5.2. The Contractor shall also carry out a condition survey of adjacent
properties to establish the condition of the existing structures and facilities
prior to commencement of work. Condition Survey shall be conducted by
competent personnel and the result of the survey shall be submitted to the
S.O. for record.
6.5.3. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall bear the cost of such
works and any claims of damage to adjacent structure and facilities
arising from his execution of the works.
Prior to commencement of works, services in the ground and overhead shall be

identified and clearly marked. The Contractor shall give all required notices to the
appropriate utility authorities before commencement of works. The Contractor shall
also locate existing services by piloting, protect existing services, rectify any
damage or interference to them and provide temporary support while repairs are
being carried out if so required.
6.7. Workmanship
6.7.1. The Contractor shall satisfy the S.O. regarding the suitability, efficiency
and adequacy of the equipment to be employed. The Contractor shall state
the type and number of rigs he intends to use.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
6.7.2. On completion of each area of stone column the Contractor shall grade
debris and surplus material arising from the stone column to leave a
reasonable firm and level working surface. On completion of the stone
columns to the satisfaction of the S.O., the Contractor shall remove from
the site all plant and unwanted material.
6.7.3. Installation of the stone columns shall be carried out by experienced

Specialist Contractor approved by S.O.. The Specialist Contractor shall
have the following experience and personnel: -
6.7.3.1. The Specialist Contractor shall employ personnel experienced

in the construction of stone columns for this part of the Works.
6.7.4. For both dry and wet methods, the depth vibrator shall be sufficiently
powerful to ensure:
6.7.4.1. The depth indicated in the Drawing may be reached; and
6.7.4.2. Adequate compaction of the stones can be achieved
6.7.5. For the avoidance of doubt, any equipment other than a depth vibrator as
specified in the latest version of BS EN 14731, is non-complying and
precluded.
6.8. Setting Out
Setting out shall be carried out by the Contractor from grid lines provided and
maintained by the Contractor. Immediately before installation, the column position
shall be marked with suitable identifiable pins, pegs or markers at least 300mm
length. The pins, pegs or markers should be driven to ground level and the location
marked with contrasting material.
6.9. Materials
6.9.1. Material used for forming stone columns shall consist of hard and durable
stone so as to remain stable during column construction and the working
life of stone columns. The material may be natural or crushed stones or
recycled material based on availability at site, and shall conform to the
6.9.1.1. The Aggregate Crushing Value (ACV) shall be not more than
30% (tested in accordance with latest version of MS 30 or
equivalent);
6.9.1.2. The Flakiness Index shall be not more than 30% (tested in
accordance with latest version of MS 30 or equivalent);
6.9.1.3. The average loss of weight in the sodium sulphate soundness

test (5 cycles), shall not be more than 10% (tested in
accordance with AASHTO Test Method T104 or equivalent);
(i) The gradation shall comply with Table V8 as appropriate.
The above tests shall be carried out on each of every source of material
supplied to site.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
6.9.2. Material shall be used with a grading appropriate for compaction to form a
dense column fully interlocking with surrounding ground. Material shall be
compatible with the vibro plant used and flow freely within bottom and
through feed delivery systems without arching, which may block these
systems.
6.9.3. Material with particle size falling in the range of 20-40mm size (dry method)
and 50-75mm size (wet method), its appropriate grading limit are as per
Table V8. Quarry dust and other fine stone chippings shall be limited to not
more than 5%. The material shall also be free of unsuitable material.
6.9.4. Prior to commencement of the works, the Specialist Contractor shall

submit samples of the stone backfill from proposed source of supply to the
S.O. for his approval.
6.9.5. Throughout the period of the works, when directed by the S.O., the
Specialist Contractor shall be required to substantiate that the output from
the approved sources of stone consistently conforms to the requirement of
the Specifications and any conditions stipulated during the initial approval.
6.10. Stone Column Construction
6.10.1. The construction method may either be the wet or dry process. Generally,
the wet process is suited for sites underlain by very soft to firm soils and a
high ground water table. For dry process, it is suitable for soils with
undrained shear strength of about 40-60kN/m2 with relatively low ground
water table. If the dry process is used it shall be demonstrated on site that
the hole made by the machine will remain open to enable the stone to be
placed cleanly to the bottom of the hole to form a continuous column to the
surface.
6.10.2. Working platforms shall be designed, prepared and maintained by the

Contractor in a manner suitable for the safe movement and working of the
vibro plant. Material used to provide working platforms shall be granular,
suitable for the ground conditions on which it is placed and shall not
prevent poker penetration. Minimum thickness of the working platforms
shall be at least 1000mm to ensure that stone compaction is effectively
carried out to the ground surface.
6.10.3. Site working levels for the stone column shall be maintained throughout the
duration of the Works. Where near surface obstructions occur, they shall
be broken out prior to the commencement of the vibro works and the
resulting voids shall be filled with granular material that can be penetrated
and compacted by the vibrating poker.
6.10.4. The stone column shall be formed to the working surface without inclusion
of clay or other unsuitable material preventing intergranular contact
between stone particles.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
6.10.5. When the dry top-feed process is being used, the vibrator may be removed
completely from the hole to allow access for the stone. Where the dry
bottom-feed process is used, the depth vibrator shall not be removed from
the ground during column construction. When the wet process is being
used, the vibrator shall be kept in the hole at all times in order to maintain
stability of the sides and to ensure that the stone shall reach the required
depth via the annular space around the vibrator.
6.10.6. The Contractor shall provide a supply of water if the wet process is
selected. The Contractor shall indicate the rate of water supply required
and be responsible for checking that this is available. The Contractor shall
be responsible for supplying any extra storage tanks and pumping as
required.
6.10.7. Any unnecessary excavation on the stone column construction shall be

avoided. Where this is not possible, excavation of the constructed stone
columns shall be carried out with prior approval from the S.O. and under
his strict supervision to minimize the disturbance on the constructed stone
columns. Compaction by rolling or tamping rammer shall be carried out
before foundation construction.
6.10.8. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposal of effluent from the works
and complying with the Environmental Law and Regulations. The
Contractor shall provide countermeasures as required by the
Environmental Management Plan (EMP) and maintain silt traps required.
On completion of the stone column the Contractor shall remove all such
equipment and backfill any pits.
6.10.9. In ground conditions where pre-boring is deemed necessary, it shall be

carried out by a method and to a sequence agreed by the S.O.. Pre-boring
shall be carried out immediately before, or as near as practicable, to stone
column construction to mitigate any safety issues associated with open
excavations and prevent unnecessary deterioration of the underlying
ground, for example due to water ingress.
6.10.10. Verticality
The maximum permitted deviation of the stone column from the vertical is
1 in 20.
6.10.11. Depth and Spacing
The depth and spacing of the stone columns shall be as shown in the
Drawing and neither the depth nor spacing shall be varied without the prior
agreement of the S.O.. Any variations in depth of stone columns due to
site conditions not anticipated in the design shall be reported immediately
to the S.O. who shall advise on any action to be taken.
6.10.12. Tolerances
All stone columns shall be located to within 150mm of the plan positions
shown on the stone column layout Drawing.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
6.11. Construction Records
6.11.1. The Contractor shall keep records each of the stone column carried out as
required by the S.O. and shall submit two signed copies of these records to
the S.O. not later than at noon of the next working day after the stone
column is completed. The duly signed records shall form part of the
records for the works. Any unexpected conditions shall be noted in the
records.
6.11.2. The Contractor shall ensure that the equipment to be used shall be
instrumented with sensors and the data processed by a micro-processing
unit to enable continuous monitoring and data capture of the following
parameters during the construction of each stone column:
6.11.2.1. The depth of vibrator and vibrator movements (depth of

penetration); and
6.11.2.2. Power consumption (compaction effort)
6.11.3. Data captured shall be continuously displayed on an LCD unit and

graphical output (plots of depths versus time and power consumption)
generated by an automated computerised recording device throughout the
process of the stone column installation. This shall be done for each point
and records shall be submitted to the S.O. by the next working day.
6.11.4. The records of each completed stone column shall contain but not limited
to the following information where applicable: -
6.11.4.1. Identification number and location of stone column point
6.11.4.2. Date and time
6.11.4.3. Method of treatment
6.11.4.4. Equipment and personnel in-charge
6.11.4.5. Depth of penetration
6.11.4.6. Time required to reach maximum depth and withdrawal
6.11.4.7. Vibrator power consumption during penetration and

compaction
6.11.4.8. Material consumption
6.11.5. Any observed ground heave or settlement during construction shall also be
recorded and reported to the S.O..
6.12. Preliminary Stone Columns
Prior to commencement of actual stone column works, the Contractor shall carry
out preliminary stone column as shown in the Drawing to establish the installation
criteria for the subsequent stone column and for confirming the adequacy of the
design, dimensions and working load through load test. The Contractor shall give
at least three (3) days’ notice of the commencement of construction of any
preliminary stone column.
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
6.13. Testing of Stone Column Works
6.13.1. To verify the design assumptions and working load, The Contractor shall
carry out load test on stone column as shown in the Drawing or as
instructed by S.O.. The testing procedures shall be submitted two (2)
weeks before the commencement of load test for S.O. approval. Loading
of a stone column shall not commence until seven (7) days have elapsed
after completion of its installation.
6.13.2. Load testing for stone column can be carried using plate test or zone test
as shown in the Drawing or as instructed by the S.O.
6.13.2.1. Plate test: A plate test is a loading test carried out using a plate
on treated ground essentially used as a control of
workmanship. It can be a single column plate load test or a
group of four columns plate load test.
6.13.2.2. Zone test: A zone test is a loading test carried out over a large
treated area, intended to test stone columns’ performance over
a wider and deeper zone than in the plate bearing test. A zone
test is usually carried out by placing earth fill to simulate
widespread loads, and the fill height will be determined to meet
the required test pressures.
6.13.3. During the progress of a test, the testing equipment and all records of
the test shall be available for inspection by the S.O..
6.13.4. Load Test Procedures
The plate load test shall be carried out in accordance with the latest
version of MS 2038.
6.13.5.1. Full test data and results shall be jointly signed in duplicate
by the S.O.’s representative witnessing the test and the
Contractor’s authorized personnel immediately upon
completion of the test. A copy of this records shall be kept by
the S.O..
6.13.5.2. Within seven (7) days of the completion of the test, a

complete test report inclusive of all necessary analysis shall
be submitted to the S.O. This shall be as specified below for
a plate bearing test or a zone test as appropriate.
6.13.5.3. Information on Tested Ground from Plate Tests
(i) The Contractor shall provide information about the tested

ground in accordance with the following schedule where
applicable:
a) General
i. Contract identification
ii. Date of test

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
b) Test area Details
i. Identification of area relative to site layout drawing

ii. Brief description of position in structure
iii. Ground level at test position
iv. Excavated test level
c) Treatment Details
i. Date and time of treatment

ii. Unexpected circumstances or difficulties
d) Stone Columns
i. Identification numbers of stone columns

ii. Diameter and depth of stone columns exposed
iii. Spacing of adjacent columns
iv. Depth
v. Stone consumption
e) Test Procedure
i. Approximate weight of kentledge

ii. Date and times of load application
f) Test Results
i. Load and settlement with time reported in tabular form,

and in graphical form, load and settlement being
plotted against time, and load against settlement.
6.13.5.4. Information on Tested Ground from Zone Tests
The Contractor shall provide information about the tested

ground in accordance with the following schedule where
applicable:
(i) General
a) Contract identification
b) Date Of tests
(ii) Test Area Details
a) Identification of area relative to site layout drawing

b) Size and position of area
c) Ground level at test position
d) Excavated test level
(iii) Treatment Details
a) Date and time of treatment

b) Unexpected circumstances or difficulties
c) Identification number of stone columns
d) Depth of treatment
e) Stone consumption
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
(iv) Test Details
a) Plan showing position and extent of zone test fill in

reference to the stone columns and instrumentation
layout
b) Method of load-measurement, if any (e.g. pressure

cells, or earth fill field density tests)
c) Fill height measurements versus time (e.g. rod

settlement gauges)
d) Dates and times of fill application, duration of

instrumentation
e) Other instrumentation measurements over time (e.g.

inclinometers, settlement markers)
(v) Test Results
a) Load and settlement with time reported in tabular

form, and in graphical form, load and settlement
being plotted against time, and load against
settlement
Upon completion of a test, all temporary structures used in the testing

(concrete slab or ground anchor etc.) shall be dismantled and removed
from site. The ground shall be made good to the original commencing
surface level.
6.14. As-Built Records
6.14.1. The Contractor shall submit an as-built stone column location plan certified
by a Licensed Surveyor to the S.O. within fourteen (14) working days after
the completion of the works. Partial as-built plan may be submitted
throughout construction of the works for verification by the S.O..
6.14.2. The as-built Drawing shall include the following information:
6.14.2.1. The stone column identification number and corresponding as-

built depth of each point;
6.14.2.2. Spatial coordinates of reference points delineating the

treatment; and where stone columns positions were deviated on
site due to obstructions or other reasons with the knowledge of
the S.O., the new position coordinates shall be included.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
7. Deep Soil Mixing
7.1. General
The work shall consist of the supply of equipment, labour and materials for the
execution of deep soil mixing (DSM) works. Deep soil mixing method shall comply
to BS EN 14679. This section shall also be in accordance with sub-section 5.1..
7.2.1. Pre-Treatment Soil Investigations
7.2.1.1. This section shall be in accordance with sub-section 5.2.1..
7.2.1.2. The Contractor shall carry out chemical test to determine the
types of chemical present in the soil for effective deep soil
mixing. The Contractor shall provide Material Safety Data
Sheet (MSDS) produced by the Manufacturer for the handling
and storage of chemicals used. The use of chemicals shall be
in accordance with Standard Specification for Roadworks
“SECTION 18: SOIL STABILISATION”.
7.3.1. This section shall be in accordance with sub-section 6.3.. The method
statement shall also include precautions against heave and settlement.
7.7. Specialist Contractors and Personnel
DSM works shall be carried out by experienced Specialist Contractor approved by

the S.O.. The Specialist Contractor shall have the following experience and
personnel:
7.7.1. Personnel experienced in the design, supervision and construction of DSM

columns
7.8. Setting Out

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
7.9. Material
7.9.1. Binder
7.9.1.1. Cementitious binders to be used shall be an approved variant of

Portland cement, complying with Standard Specification for
Building Works SECTION D: CONCRETING or as per BS EN
197-1. The cement shall be adequately protected from moisture
and contamination in storage on the job site. Reclaimed cement
containing lumps or deleterious matter shall not be used. Other
binders shall be acceptable if the project requirements can be
met with their use. Laboratory tests shall be required to verify
the suitability and dosage of the other binder variants.
7.9.1.2. If other chemicals are proposed, the material shall be in

accordance with Standard Specification for Roadworks
“SECTION 18: SOIL STABILISATION”.
7.9.2. Water
Freshwater, free of an excessive amount of deleterious substances that

adversely affect the properties of the binder shall be used. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor that the grout resulting from the water shall
always meet the requirements of this specification.
7.9.3. Grout suspension
Grout suspension shall be prepared on site using binder(s) as described in

sub-section 7.9.1. and other additives, wherever required, in water. The
grout shall be pumpable and workable with the DSM injection equipment.
7.9.4. Additives
7.9.4.1. Admixtures may be used to enhance the workability or final

properties of the treated soil. Conventional additives include
bentonite, fly ash, lime, sodium silicate, a set retarder, alkali
activator, etc. Additives may be added to the water or the grout.
Notwithstanding, the use of additives is subjected to the
7.9.4.2. The Contractor shall provide Material Safety Data Sheet

(MSDS) produced by the Manufacturer on the use of chemical
additives to ensure the safety of the material used. The
Contractor shall be made liable for any discrepancies that occur
during the application of chemical additives in the absence of
MSDS.
7.9.5. Soil Mixing Material
Soil-mixing material, resulting from the in-site mixing of soil with grout
suspension (mainly for a wet method of mixing), should have a
compressive strength as specified in the drawing. The factor of safety
concerning the maximum characteristic stress acting on a single column
shall be not less than 2.0.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
7.9.6. Steel Reinforcement
Steel reinforcement, if specified in the drawing shall comply with SECTION

D: CONCRETING, relevant specifications and Malaysian Standards.
7.10. DSM Column Installation
7.10.1. General
The Contractor shall satisfy the S.O. regarding the suitability, efficiency
and adequacy of the equipment to be employed based on soil conditions
and the requirements defined herein and in the design. The equipment
chosen for the installation of works shall be in full compliance with the
provision of the BS EN 14679.
7.10.2. Drilling Equipment
7.10.2.1. Deep soil mixing equipment shall be capable of rotating down to

the required depth or stiff layer through the weak soil and
withdrawing the mixing tool by simultaneous rotation and mixing
of the binder with in-situ soil.
7.10.2.2. Deep soil mixing machine shall have a single or multiple

shaft(s) with cutting/mixing blades at the lower end.
7.10.2.3. Deep soil mixing machine shall be able to operate at different

rotation and withdrawal rates within the required range as in the
design to complete the work and produce the required cement
columns, and as required by BS EN 14679.
7.10.2.4. The cutting/mixing blades shall have the minimum diameter as

per design. The size of the mixing tool shall define the column
diameter.
7.10.2.5. The mixing tools shall consist of a minimum of one nozzle for
the binder delivery but shall be demonstrated that it is
adequately sized to meet the binder dosage as required by
design.
7.10.2.6. Real-time measuring and recording devices shall be provided

throughout the mixing operation, to capture data e.g. column
number, time, depth, pressure, feed rates, rotation speed,
injection rate, injection volume, binder consumption, etc.
7.10.3. Binder Delivery Station
7.10.3.1. Dry Method
In the dry method, the deep soil mixing process shall be carried
out by mixing the binder in powder form. The medium of
transportation of binder is typically compressed air unless
otherwise approved by the S.O.. Binder storage tank(s)/ silo(s)
is generally on-board with the DSM machine or on a separate
self-propelled chassis connected to the DSM machine.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
7.10.3.2. Wet Method
In the wet method, the deep soil mixing process shall be carried
out by mixing the binder in slurry form. The medium of
transportation of binder usually is water unless otherwise
approved. The binder is generally prepared at the separate
mixing and holding tanks and pumping station shall be required
to deliver the binder to the DSM machine. The mixing and
pumping station shall be able to produce enough volume of
slurry required and enable continuous supply and controlled
delivery of slurry.
7.10.4. Working Platform Preparation
Working platforms shall be designed, prepared and maintained by the

Contractor in a manner suitable for the safe movement and working of the
deep soil mixing equipment. The material used to provide working
platforms shall be suitable for the ground conditions on which it is placed
and shall not be detrimental to the drilling operation. Site working levels for
the treatment shall be provided and maintained by the Contractor
throughout the deep soil mixing works.
7.10.5. Soil Mixing Work
7.10.5.1. Unless otherwise specified, pressure feed of the binder shall be

terminated approximately 0.5m to 1.0m below the working
platform. Satisfactory quality shall not be relied on in the design
over a depth of 1.0m below the working level, i.e. within the
working platform material. If the deep soil mixing operation is
interrupted for any reason, re-mixing or repositioning may be
required upon confirmation from the S.O. on site.
7.10.5.2. The mixing tool rotation speed shall be adjusted to

accommodate a constant rate of mixing as given in the design.
The penetration/withdrawal rate of the mixing tool shall be
maintained such that the proper amount of binder is added and
the proper amount of mixing time is allowed as per design. Both
the rotation speed for mixing tool and penetration/withdrawal
rate can be adjusted according to drilling difficulty, upon
confirmation from the S.O. on site.
7.10.5.3. The injection rate per vertical meter of column shall be

predefined by the Contractor. The injection rate shall be
adjusted accordingly, if necessary, with the working parameters
in the paragraph above herein, throughout the work to achieve
the requirement for the DSM columns. The injection rate of the
binder shall be measurable and monitored with the appropriate
device as proposed by the Contractor.
7.10.5.4. After completion, the DSM columns shall be left undisturbed for
at least 14 days. The area of DSM columns shall not be driven
over with heavy equipment.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
7.10.6. Obstruction
In the event of obstructions preventing the drilling and installation of DSM

columns, the S.O. shall be informed immediately. Remedial options subject
to approval from the S.O. shall include:
7.10.6.1. Reposition the column a short distance from the original

position.
7.10.6.2. Additional DSM column(s) around the obstruction, if necessary.
7.10.6.3. Excavate, remove the obstruction, backfill and compact to the

requirements of Standard Specification for Building Works
SECTION B: EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORKS and reinstall
the DSM column.
7.10.7. Verticality
The maximum permitted inclination of the DSM columns is 1 in 75.
7.10.8. Length, diameter and spacing
The length, diameter and spacing of the DSM columns shown in the
Drawing shall be adjusted to suit site conditions when deemed necessary
as instructed by the S.O..
7.10.9. Tolerances
The maximum permitted deviation of the centre of the DSM column from
the centre point shown on the setting out drawing shall be 150 mm in any
direction.
7.11. Construction Records
7.11.1. On the same day, a daily record shall be submitted to the S.O.
summarizing the points done and depths of DSM column installed. Two (2)
copies of signed records for each soil mixing element shall be submitted to
the S.O. on the next working day.
7.11.2. The record shall include the following information, but not limited to: -
7.11.2.1. Column ID or reference number;
7.11.2.2. Depth of installation;
7.11.2.3. Column top and toe level;
7.11.2.4. Binder type and composition, injection rate and total injection
volume;
7.11.2.5. Time for mixing during penetration and withdrawal;
7.11.2.6. Rotation of mixing tool versus depth and blade rotations by

numbers;

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
7.11.2.7. Weather report;
7.11.2.8. Any other information as may be required by the S.O..
7.12. Preliminary DSM Column(s)
7.12.1. Before commencement of the DSM works, the Contractor shall carry out
field trial as shown in the Drawing. A total number of minimum four (4)
numbers of preliminary columns shall be constructed to verify the deep soil
mixing methodology, suitability of the mixing tool and the design
parameters. The quality of DSM columns shall conform to the design
requirements and shall be verified using the appropriate testing method,
e.g. by the mean of the load test. Loading on the DSM column shall not
commence until fourteen (14) days have elapsed after completion of its
installation.
7.12.2. Where excavation is possible, assessment of the geometric and

mechanical characteristics of the DSM column should be made by visual
inspection. Coring can be made on the completed columns. Unconfined
Compressive Strength Testing (UCS) on samples recovered by coring or
excavation can be made to verify the soil-mixing material compressive
strength as specified in the design. At least one (1) of the trial columns
shall be sampled and UCS testing shall be carried out on three samples.
The sampling and testing frequency may be varied based on project
requirements or at the instruction of the S.O..
7.13. Quality Control and Quality Assurance
7.13.1. Quality Control
7.13.1.1. Before the commencement of all works, procedures for

verification, control and acceptance shall be established in the
method statement with reference to the drawing and
specification.
7.13.1.2. Blade rotation number of soil mixing shall be used as a guide to

verify the consistency of mixing and forming homogenous
columns. Minimum blade rotation number in cohesionless soils
shall be at least 300, whereas for cohesive soils it shall not be
less than 400. For peaty and organic soils, the blade rotation
number shall be at least 600. These requirements shall be
followed unless otherwise stated in the project requirement or
instructed by the S.O..
7.13.1.3. The construction process shall be controlled and monitored

automatically, with the aid of a computerised system. The
construction parameters and information as detailed in Table
V9 shall be monitored continuously during execution.
7.13.2. Sampling
7.13.2.1. The sampling of soil mixing improved ground shall be done by

conventional vertical coring. Double tube sampling shall also be
acceptable provided the Contractor can demonstrate that good
sample recovery can be obtained. Wet grab sampling shall also
be permitted, and samples shall be prepared from wet grabs at
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
the instruction of the S.O.. The S.O. shall also instruct at what
depth the sampling needs to be taken. Sampling shall ensure
that the recovery ratio is at least 80% or otherwise instructed by
the S.O..
7.13.2.2. At least 1% of the installed columns shall be sampled by coring,

double tube or wet grabbing, unless otherwise stated in the
drawing. Minimum three (3) samples from each sampled
column shall be tested for UCS. The sampling and testing
frequency may be varied based on project requirements or at
the instruction of the S.O..
7.13.3. Unconfined Compression Test
7.13.3.1. Where necessary, the improvement from the treatment shall be

tested by Unconfined Compression Test (UCT) of samples. The
Unconfined Compressive Strength (UCS) of samples shall meet
the requirements of the design, where the characteristic
strength of samples shall be more than the project
requirements.
7.13.3.2. UCT testing shall be done on cylindrical or cube samples

having a minimum dimension of 50 mm diameter. Corrections
to readings and reporting of values shall be as per BS EN
12504-1.
7.13.3.3. Where required the S.O. may specify additional tests to

determine other engineering properties of the improved ground.
7.13.4. Load Test
7.13.5. Submission of Test Results
This section shall be in accordance with sub-section 6.13.5..
7.14. As-Built Drawing
7.14.1. The Contractor shall submit an as-built DSM columns location plan
certified by a Licensed Surveyor to the S.O. within fourteen (14) working
days after the completion of the works. Partial as-built plan may be
submitted throughout construction of the works for verification by the
S.O..
7.14.2. The as-built Drawing shall include the following information:
7.14.2.1. The DSM column identification number and corresponding as-

built depth of each point;
7.14.2.2. Spatial coordinates of reference points delineating the

treatment; and where DSM columns positions were deviated
on site due to obstructions or other reasons with the
knowledge of the S.O., the new position coordinates shall be
included.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
8. Dynamic Compaction
8.1. General
The works shall consist of the supply of plant, equipment and specialist personnel
for the execution of dynamic compaction (DC) works for ground improvement. This
section shall also be in accordance with sub-section 5.1..
8.2. Specialist Contractor
DC works shall be carried out by experienced Specialist Contractor approved by the

S.O.. The Specialist Contractor shall have the following experience and the
personnel:
8.2.1. The Specialist Contractor shall employ competent and experienced

geotechnical engineer who is capable of analyzing existing soil data,
obtaining and interpreting additional data as required, performing field
testing prior to, during and after DC works.
8.6.1. This section shall be in accordance with sub-section 6.5..
8.6.2. At locations where acceptable peak particle velocity or acceleration are

likely to be exceeded, cut off trenches or other protective measure shall be
taken. Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the S.O., by trials,
that his proposal will reduce the maximum peak particle velocity or
acceleration to acceptable values.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
8.8. Workmanship
8.8.1. Contractor shall satisfy the S.O. on the suitability and efficiency of the
equipment to be employed.
8.8.2. The dynamic compaction (DC) works shall be performed by a qualified

Contractor. The DC works shall be carried out up to the designed
depth/compaction energy required to make sure the design criteria are
achievable.
8.9. Setting Out
Contractor shall perform setting out from the temporary bench mark (TBM)
provided and shall be maintained by the Contractor. The approximate limits of
work shall be shown in the DC shop Drawing and the exact limit shall be
determined by the Contractor upon completion of the pre-treatment testing. DC
points shall be marked with suitable and identifiable markers.
8.10. Working Platform
The working platform shall be prepared and maintained by the Contractor and
suitable for safe movement and working for the DC plant and equipment. The
working platform shall be made of granular material and at least 1000 mm above
the ground water level.
8.11. Spacing
The spacing of the DC point shall be shown in the construction drawing. This shall
be confirmed by field calibration or field trial conducted as approved by S.O..
8.12. DC Field Trial Area
The Contractor shall perform at least one (1) DC field calibration or trial area prior
to commencement of the full production DC works. Minimum trial area shall be
20m x 20m. The objective of the field trial is to determine the optimum compaction
energy to be applied to the DC point and to confirm the technical data obtained is
as per design.
8.13. Site Records
The Contractor shall keep and submit to the S.O. the following records:
8.13.1. Number of blows for each DC point for each phase of DC works.
8.13.2. DC pounder free fall height for each blow for each phase of DC works.
8.13.3. Ground level before and after DC works.
8.13.4. Any other record as required by the S.O..
8.14. Testing
8.14.1. Pre-Treatment Testing
8.14.1.1. The Contractor shall undertake soil testing prior to

commencement of DC works to provide data for the purpose of
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
refining the preliminary design to comply with the acceptance

criteria as specified. The field testing shall include the following:
(i) Pressuremeter Tests (PMT) shall be performed at every

meter vertical interval and at changes in strata in
accordance with the method outlined in ASTM D4719 or
the latest version of BS EN ISO 22476-4.
(ii) Cone Penetration Tests (CPT) shall be performed in

accordance with ASTM D5778 or the latest version of BS
EN ISO 22476-1.
8.14.1.2. The Contractor shall determine the total number of locations of

pre-engineering tests necessary to analyse the soil conditions
and to delineate the areas requiring DC works. Pre-engineering
testing shall include the following as a minimum:
(i) A minimum of one PMT for every 2000m² of area marked

for improvement in the Drawing.
(ii) A minimum of one CPT for every 2000m² of area marked

8.14.1.3. The Contractor shall determine locations of any additional

testing that may be required if conflicting test results are
indicated by two adjacent tests or to delineate areas for ground
improvement.
8.14.2. Final Acceptance Testing
8.14.2.1. The Contractor shall verify the ground improvements works for
compliance with the acceptance criteria by in-situ tests of the
improved soils and by analysis of the test results. The final
testing shall be conducted at a minimum of one week after
completion of the ground improvement works.
8.14.2.2. The final tests shall generally be at the locations of the pre-
engineering test locations and shall include the following field
tests:
(i) PMT shall be performed at every meter vertical interval

and at changes in strata in accordance with the method
outlined in ASTM D4719 or the latest version of BS EN
ISO 22476-4.
(ii) Cone Penetration Tests (CPT) shall be performed in

accordance with ASTM D5778 or the latest version of BS
EN ISO 22476-1.
8.14.2.3. Final testing shall include the following as a minimum:
(i) A minimum of one PMT for every 2000m² of area marked

(ii) A minimum of one CPT for every 2000m² of area marked

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
8.14.2.4. Areas in which the specified criteria are not met shall be
reworked by the Contractor until the specified requirements are
met. The S.O., at his/her discretion, may check the Contractor’s
test results by conducting additional and independent testing.
8.14.2.5. If necessary, correlation between the CPT results with PMT

results can be conducted to obtain the limit pressure and
pressure meter modulus required for the engineering
calculations.
8.15. Documents Submission
8.15.1. The contractor shall submit to S.O. documents regarding the DC works as
follows:
8.15.1.1. Pre-treatment testing proposal – this document is a plan and

schedule for pre-treatment testing and shall be submitted at
least seven (7) days before the pre-treatment testing is
scheduled to begin.
8.15.1.2. Pre-treatment testing report – this document shall be submitted

not later than fourteen (14) days after completion of pre-
treatment testing.
8.15.1.3. Interim progress report – this document stated the DC works

operations, including pre-treatment testing, final acceptance
testing, elevation measurements, quantities completed during
month, cumulative quantities to date and a forecast of
remaining work.
8.15.1.4. Final technical report – this document shall be submitted at the

completion of the DC works. The report shall contain graphical
presentation of all parameters used by the Contractor to
accomplish the acceptance criteria including all pre-treatment
testing and final testing results together with as built Drawing.
The report shall be submitted in five copies duly endorsed by a
Professional Engineer.
9. Piled Embankment
9.1. General
9.1.1. The works shall consist of all labour, materials, tools, transportation,
instrumentation, etc. necessary to construct piled embankment in
accordance to the Drawing and SECTION C: FOUNDATION WORKS AND
WORKS BELOW LOWEST FLOOR LEVEL.
9.1.2. The works shall cover the following:
9.1.2.1. Mobilization and demobilization of all labour, plants, piling and

drilling equipment on site.
9.1.2.2. Supply, handling, pitching and installation of piles to the pile

lengths as specified in the Drawing.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
9.1.2.3. Lengthening of piles by jointing to detail.
9.1.2.4. Strip pile to cut-off level and check pile eccentricity.
9.1.2.5. Construct reinforced concrete slab as per the details in the

Drawing.
9.1.2.6. Carry out pile testing in accordance to SECTION C:

FOUNDATION WORKS AND WORKS BELOW LOWEST
FLOOR LEVEL on working piles as specified.
10. Geotechnical Instrumentation
10.1. General
10.1.1. Instrumentation shall be installed to measure horizontal and vertical

displacement of the subsoil or structures supported by the subsoil and
water pressures within the works and shall remain operational both
during and after the construction period specified in the contract.
10.1.2. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall follow the instruction of
the manufacturer and the requirements of this specification in the
installation, calibration and testing of all measuring instruments and
equipment, which shall be carried out under the direct supervision of the
S.O.. The Contractor shall inform the S.O. at least 2 days prior to
undertaking installation of the equipment. The Contractor shall make due
allowances in his construction programme for any delays which may
arise on account of the installation of the instruments.
10.1.3. Protection and Maintenance of Instruments
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect the

instruments and maintain the instruments in good working order after
commissioning. For all instruments which project through and above the
fill, special precautions shall be taken to provide protection from vehicles
and plant including substantial and readily visible barriers at a radius of
750mm around each instrument. Heavy compaction equipment shall not
approach within 1.0m of projecting instruments. Damaged instruments
shall be replaced or repaired by the Contractor at his own expense within
seven days.
10.1.4. Stabilising Electronic Readout Devices
All electronic readout devices and transducers shall be shaded from

direct sunlight during use. Probes which are used inside access tubes
shall be placed inside the tube and allowed to come to a stable
temperature for at least 10 minutes before use. Zero or starting values
shall only be taken once temperature stabilization is complete. All
readout units shall be calibrated at least once a year and the calibration
certificates submitted to the S.O..
10.1.5. Personnel
10.1.5.1. The Contractor shall submit names and curricular vitae of

personnel including instrumentation engineer and
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
instrumentation technician to carry out the instrumentation and

monitoring and a programme of their attendance for the
approval of the S.O.. Deviation from the approved programme
of attendance or the requirements given in this clause shall only
be permitted with the approval of the S.O..
10.1.5.2. The instrumentation engineer shall be responsible for the

overall planning, implementation and monitoring of the
instruments. He shall be on site throughout installation,
commissioning and initial monitoring. He shall be on site for the
remaining monitoring on a basis to be agreed with the S.O..
10.1.5.3. All instrumentation and monitoring works shall be carried out by

an experienced instrumentation technician. Instrument data
obtained shall be verified by an instrumentation engineer.
10.1.6. Boreholes for Instruments
10.1.6.1. Boreholes for instruments may be drilled by any method

provided that it results in a clean and stable hole of the required
diameter to the correct depth. The method of forming
boreholes, including the procedure for advancing casing, shall
be submitted to the S.O. for approval before commencement of
the works.
10.1.6.2. Boreholes shall be cased to their full depth unless strata are
sufficiently competent for the hole to stay open under dry
conditions. If boreholes are drilled using water as a flushing
medium, clean water shall be used. Drilling mud or polymer
additives shall only be used with the approval of the S.O.. In the
case of installation of piezometers, drilling mud or polymer
additives shall not be permitted.
10.1.6.3. During drilling care shall be taken to ensure that minimum

material is lost from outside the casing. Surging of the casing
shall not be allowed and flushing of drilling water outside the
annulus of the casing shall be minimized.
10.1.7. Grouting of Boreholes
For all instruments placed in boreholes, grouting is required for part or the
entire borehole during installation. The grout shall be a bentonite: cement
mixture with sufficient water to achieve a pumpable mix. The proportions of
the mix shall be such as to imitate as closely as possible the strength or
consistency of the natural soils present. Unless otherwise stated in the
Drawing, the Contractor shall propose the suitable bentonite: cement
mixture to S.O.’s approval. Grout shall be pumped into boreholes using a
tremie pipe.
10.1.8. Labelling and Marking of Instruments
All instruments shall be labelled with their reference numbers at the

location where readings or measurements are taken. The labelling shall be
permanent using a method or material to be agreed with the S.O..

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
10.1.9. Survey Equipment and Survey Reference Station
10.1.9.1. The Contractor shall be responsible for establishing survey

reference station at locations selected by the S.O. to monitor
settlement markers, settlement plates, displacement markers
and other instruments deemed necessary.
10.1.9.2. All survey equipment used in conjunction with the monitoring of

instrumentation, including measuring tapes, levels and total
stations shall be maintained and calibrated as required by the
manufacturers and good surveying practice.
10.1.9.3. The survey reference station provides a reference for levelling

or horizontal measurement to other points. The location of the
survey reference station, shall be agreed by the S.O.. The
coordinates and elevation of the survey reference station shall
be surveyed in and submitted to the S.O..
10.1.9.4. The survey reference station shall be established on

undisturbed ground clear of the embankment. The survey
reference station shall be located on stable ground not affected
by the Works, preferably away from the construction activities.
The survey reference station is to be located on structures free
of settlement and lateral movement or as agreed by the S.O..
10.1.9.5. The survey reference station may comprise of a steel rod of

20mm diameter, which shall be driven vertically into the
undisturbed ground for a minimum distance of 1.0m and shall
project approximately 75mm above ground surface. The rod
shall be surrounded by not less than 0.03m3 of concrete at
surface level, and the top of the rod shall be carefully centre-
punched.
10.1.9.6. The survey reference station shall be checked at intervals to be

established by the S.O. to ensure that it is stable during the
course of the monitoring works.
10.1.10. Deep Levelling Datum
10.1.10.1. A deep datum is required to provide a reference for

measurement of ground levels in areas of soft ground.
10.1.10.2. The Contractor shall propose the location and depth of the deep
levelling datum for the approval of the S.O..
10.1.10.3. The datum itself shall be fixed into hard ground with Standard
Penetration Test (SPT) value more than 50 or rock and isolated
from soft and compressible overlying strata. If the SPT value of
more than 50 is not achievable at great depths, the contractor
and the S.O. shall mutually agree on the termination depth.
10.1.10.4. A deep levelling datum shall consist of a 25mm galvanized iron

(GI) pipe fixed into hard ground with cement grout. The datum
pipe shall be isolated from the overlying soft ground by a 75mm
GI pipe bedded into the top of the cement grout. The upper part
of the 75mm pipe shall be surrounded by a square concrete
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
plinth of not less than 0.03m 3 of concrete. The details of the

deep levelling datum including its protective measures are as
shown in the Drawing. The concrete shall be scored with the
reference number of the datum.
10.1.10.5. The level of a deep levelling datum shall be established by

standard levelling techniques from agreed bench mark in the
vicinity. Levelling shall be closed back to the bench marks to
check for accuracy. The level shall be measured three times
soon after installation of the datum and shall be checked at
intervals to be agreed by the S.O..
10.1.11. Instrumentation Equipment References
Details of equipment shall be submitted to the S.O. for approval. If the

S.O. considers it necessary, demonstrations shall be arranged by the
Contractor. Any supplier of geotechnical instrumentation shall demonstrate
that the manufacturer operates an adequate system of product quality
assurance.
10.2. Displacement Marker/Settlement Marker
10.2.1. Displacement marker/Settlement marker is required to monitor the

horizontal and vertical movement of the ground or embankment surface.
The Contractor shall be responsible for establishing settlement markers
at locations as shown in the Drawing or as determined by the S.O..
10.2.2. The marker shall comprise of a steel rod of minimum 20mm diameter
which shall be driven vertically into the embankment or undisturbed
ground for a minimum depth of 1.0m and shall project approximately
75mm above the ground surface. The rod shall be surrounded by not
less than 0.03m3 of concrete at ground level, and the top shall be domed
and centre-punched. The details of the installation are shown in the
Drawing. The concrete shall be scored with the reference number of the
marker.
10.2.3. For the settlement markers, the level of the top of the rod shall be
measured using standard precise levelling techniques, referencing and
closing back to the survey reference station with instrument to a
minimum of +1mm accuracy.
10.2.4. For the displacement markers, the lateral movement shall be measured
using a total station or other survey techniques agreed by the S.O..
10.3. Building Settlement Marker
10.3.1. Vertical deformation of adjacent structures shall be determined by

means of precision devices to an accuracy of + 1.0mm. The Contractor
shall install building settlement points at location as specified by the
S.O..
10.3.2. The precise levels shall have robust tripods. Levelling studs are to be
provided for the purpose of precise levelling. Levelling studs shall be: -
10.3.2.1. Manufactured from stainless steel.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
10.3.2.2. Fixed to the building lining in the same manner and standard.
10.3.2.3. Designed such that their use in conjunction with the

appropriate precise instruments allow precision levelling to an
accuracy of + 1.0mm.
10.3.2.4. Designed such that the heads of the levelling studs on the
walls can be easily levelled without the studs being vulnerable
to damage.
10.3.2.5. Designed such that the studs are safe from any hazards and to
human life.
10.4. Rod Settlement Gauge
10.4.1. Rod settlement gauge is required to measure settlement beneath the

embankment. The Contractor shall provide and install rod settlement
gauge at location and level as shown in the Drawing or as specified by the
S.O..
10.4.2. The details of the rod settlement gauge shall be as shown in the Drawing
and the Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of all the gauges
as work proceeds. The base plate and first length of the rod shall be
placed as early as possible during earthworks, preferably before any
significant filling has been placed. Extension lengths shall be installed
when the level of compacted embankment is 250mm below the top of the
preceding lengths.
10.4.3. Should a rod settlement gauge be damaged, or should the Contractor fail
to extend the gauge when required, the Contractor shall stop all filling
activities in the vicinity of the gauge until the necessary remedial works
have been carried out. The Contractor shall be liable for any delay in his
programme, or any additional works that need to be done as result of such
damage.
10.4.4. Should any rod settlement gauge be damaged in such a way as to make it
useless for its purpose and unable for S.O. to assess the settlement, the
contractor shall engage a third-party specialist at his own cost to assess
the settlement for measurement purposes and shall be agreeable and
approved by S.O. as the final decision.
10.4.5. Rod settlement plates shall be monitored by standard precise levelling

techniques, referencing and closing back to the survey reference station
with instrument to a minimum of +1mm accuracy. Levels shall be taken at
the top of rod itself and the fill adjacent to the gauge on each occasion.
When rods are extended, levels shall be measured immediately before and
immediately after adding the extension.
10.5. Inclinometer
10.5.1. Inclinometer provides a method of measuring a continuous profile of

horizontal deflection both at the surface of and within a mass of soil. The
Contractor shall install Inclinometer at locations and depths as specified by
the S.O.. The details of the Inclinometer shall be as shown in the Drawing.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
10.5.2. Inclinometer access tube shall consist of broached polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
tubing with four keyways set at right angles to each other and with
couplings and end caps where necessary. The S.O. may instruct the
Contractor to obtain spiral metric measurements of the keyways in the
inclinometer tubing after installation. After that, assembly joints and rivets
shall be wrapped in sealing tape. The tube shall be coated with thick
grease over its upper part when it passes through compressible subsoils.
10.5.3. The assembled tube shall be lowered into borehole backfilled with a
suitable bentonite: cement grout mix. Alternatively, the tube may be placed
in an open borehole and grout placed afterwards. In granular material, the
backfill may be sand or pea gravel. The keyways shall be orientated such
that movements are measured parallel to and at right angles to the
embankment axis.
10.5.4. Angular movements shall be measured by an inclinometer probe (torpedo)

which shall be a biaxial type and the system shall be capable of measuring
lateral deformation to an accuracy of ± 6mm over a depth of 25m.
10.5.5. The inclinometer data logger unit shall display the readings from the
inclinometer torpedo on an alphanumeric display. The following facilities
are also, required within the readout unit:
10.5.5.1. Scan stored data.
10.5.5.2. Display of face errors as readings are being obtained.
10.5.5.3. Display of mean deviation and cumulative deviation of anyone

set of readings.
10.5.5.4. Backlit LCD display.
10.5.6. The readings shall be read at every 0.5m and stored in the data logger.
10.5.7. The level of the top of the access tube shall be measured by standard
precise levelling techniques as and when necessary.
10.6. Horizontal Inclinometer
10.6.1. The horizontal inclinometer provides a method of measuring vertical

displacement beneath an embankment. Readings are taken at regular
intervals across the entire width of the embankment. The contractor shall
install the horizontal inclinometer across the full width of the
embankment at locations and with details as shown in the drawing.
10.6.2. The horizontal inclinometer shall be installed before earthworks

commence as shown in the Drawing and shall consist of 70mm or 85mm
inclinometer casing installed in a trench. The trench shall be filled with
sand or the excavated material provided it is suitable fill and stone free,
and approval is given by the S.O.. Each end of the inclinometer casing
shall have an end cap and shall have an eye for retention of the
instrument draw cord. Each end of the inclinometer casing shall also
pass freely through a plastic protective cover set into a concrete pad.
The concrete pads shall have minimum dimensions of 1.5m x 1.5m x
0.3m. They shall be located beyond the influence of the area causing

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
settlement. At each concrete pad, a survey pin shall be cast into the
concrete.
10.6.3. Sufficient inclinometer casing shall be installed to accommodate large

relative movement of the ground.
10.6.4. The horizontal inclinometer readout unit shall have a resolution of

+0.02mm or better and a sensor accuracy of +0.1mm or better.
10.6.5. Immediately before taking a set of readings, levels shall be taken of the
two survey pins set into the concrete pads.
10.7. Hydrostatic Profile Gauges
10.7.1. The hydrostatic profile gauge provides a method of measuring vertical

displacement beneath an embankment. Readings are taken at regular
intervals across the full width of the embankment and provide a
continuous profile of settlement. The Contractor shall install hydrostatic
profile gauges at locations and with details as shown in the Drawing.
10.7.2. The hydrostatic profile gauge shall be installed before earthwork

commences as shown in the Drawing and shall consist of semi rigid or
high-density polyethylene (HDPE) profile tube with minimum outer
diameter of 50mm installed in a trench. The trench shall be filled with
sand or the excavated material provided it is suitable fill and stone-free,
and approval is given by the S.O.. Each end of the access tube shall
pass freely through a protective cover fabricated in plastic complete with
solid PVC taper-threaded plug. The plug shall have an eye for retention
of the instrument drawcord.
10.7.3. Each protective cover shall be set into a concrete pad. If the expected
settlement is large such that the protective cover may not be long
enough to accommodate the relative movement of the access tube, then
the protective cover shall be extended using a suitable piece of plastic
pipe. The concrete pads shall have minimum dimensions of 1.5m x 1.5m
x 0.3m at both ends of the HDPE tube. The concrete pads shall be
located beyond the influence of the located area causing settlement. A
survey pin shall be cast into each of the concrete pad. Both ends of the
access tube shall be covered with a suitable end cap at all times.
10.7.4. The readout device system shall be capable of measuring elevation with
reference to the survey pin to an accuracy of ±1.0mm. Immediately
before taking a set of readings with the hydrostatic profile gauge, levels
shall be measured of the two survey pins set into the concrete pads.
10.8. Magnetic Extensometer
10.8.1. Magnetic extensometer provides a method of measuring settlement at a

point or a series of points below the ground surface. The Contractor shall
install magnetic extensometer at locations and as specified by the S.O..
The details of the magnetic extensometer shall be as shown in the
Drawing.
10.8.2. The magnetic extensometer shall consist of an access tube and a series
of magnetic targets which are free to slide down the tube, together with a
datum magnet which is fixed to the tube near its base. The access tube
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
shall be a rigid PVC tube with minimum 33mm outer diameter and 24mm
inner diameter. External coupling shall be used to connect the access
tube and this compression/extension coupling shall allow axial
movement of access tubes to minimize distortion due to vertical strain. A
rigid PVC endcap shall be fixed to the lower end of the series of tubes.
10.8.3. A datum ring magnet shall be fixed approximately 1m above the lower
end of the tube. Spider magnets shall be used within the subsoil and
plate magnets within fill.
10.8.4. The tubes and spider magnets shall be assembled prior to installation in
such a way that the magnets remain in the correct position in relation to
the tube.
10.8.5. It shall then be lowered together with all magnets and necessary
accessories fixed in position into a 100mm diameter borehole backfilled
with a suitable bentonite: cement grout mix. Once in position the spider
magnets shall be released.
10.8.6. Where the access tube passes through fill which is being placed, the
access tube and outer sleeve shall be extended as filling progresses.
The top of the access tube, and the larger diameter sleeve where
present, shall be protected with a suitable cover.
10.8.7. Magnetic extensometer shall be monitored by passing the probe down to

the base of the access tube. The probe shall then be pulled upwards
measuring the position of each magnet from the top of the tube. The
position of each magnet shall be measured, once with the probe moving
upwards from the base. Immediately before or after taking a series of
readings, the level of the top of the access tube shall be measured by
standard levelling techniques.
10.9. Combined Magnetic Extensometer and Inclinometers
10.9.1. Combined magnetic extensometer and inclinometer provide a method of

measuring both vertical settlement and horizontal displacement at a
series of points below the ground surface. The Contractor shall install
combined magnetic extensometer and inclinometer at locations, and with
depths and details as specified by the S.O or as shown in the Drawing or
as specified by the S.O..
10.9.2. The specification for magnetic extensometer shall be referred to sub-

section 10.8. and the specification for Inclinometer shall be referred to
sub-section 10.5..
10.9.3. The magnets shall be positioned in relation to sleeved joints such that
they can move downwards without obstruction sufficiently to monitor the
expected settlement.
10.9.4. The borehole shall be 150mm diameter.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
10.10. Standpipe
10.10.1. Standpipe provides a method of monitoring the water table or ground

water level. The Contractor shall install standpipe at locations and with
depths and details as specified in the Drawing or S.O..
10.10.2. The standpipe shall be slotted unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (UPVC)

tubing of nominal size 50mm diameter. The perforated part shall be
wrapped with filter fabric as indicated in the Drawing.
10.10.3. The UPVC tubing shall be installed in not less than 3m lengths, except
for one shorter length as required to suit the total standpipe dimensions.
The concrete upper end of the tube shall be set in concrete.
10.10.4. The standpipe shall be placed in a 100mm diameter borehole backfilled

with a graded filter sand (600 to 1200microns) to the depth indicated.
The top of the hole shall be sealed with bentonite pellets, and with a
concrete plug. A protective cover shall be set into the concrete with caps
and air vents.
10.10.5. Depth to water in the standpipe shall be measured using a dipmeter.
10.11. Piezometers
10.11.1. Standpipe Piezometers
10.11.1.1. Standpipe piezometers give a measurement of piezometric

level at a specific depth within a soil profile. They are
generally used in soils of medium to high permeability. The
Contractor shall install standpipe piezometer at locations,
and with depth and details as shown in the Drawing or as
10.11.1.2. Standpipe piezometer shall be installed in boreholes at

locations as shown in the Drawing or as instructed by the
S.O.. The piezometer tip shall consist of a porous ceramic,
plastic element or other suitable element not less than 150
mm long with minimum diameter of 25mm and shall be
protected at each end by UPVC fittings. The filter element
shall have a pore diameter of not more than 60 microns and
a permeability of not higher than 3 x 10-4 m/s. The tubes
shall be jointed together and to the porous element with
threaded coupling or other approved coupling, tape and
glue in such a manner that the joints remain leak proof
under the anticipated head of water.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
10.11.1.3. The standpipe piezometer shall be installed in a borehole of

minimum 76mm diameter. The sand filter surrounding the
porous element shall be clean and fall wholly between the
limits of grading 600 and 1200 microns. The contractor shall
ensure that no sand adheres to the soil in the sides of the
borehole. Where there is water in the borehole the contractor
shall allow sufficient time for all sand to settle. The final level
of the top of this sand shall be recorded. The porous element
shall be placed in the hole and the remaining sand filter shall
then be added as described above.
10.11.1.4. Seals consisting of bentonite pellets shall be placed above,

and if necessary, below a sand filter. The remainder of the
hole shall be filled with a bentonite: cement grout, and the top
part with concrete with caps and air vents as indicated in the
drawing. Before taking initial readings, the contractor shall
carry out simple falling head test by raising the water level
1.5m above the static level, using an extension pipe if
necessary.
10.11.1.5. The depth to water in the standpipe piezometer shall be

measured using a dip meter.
10.11.2. Pneumatic Piezometers
10.11.2.1. Pneumatic piezometer is used to measure pore water

pressures at specific depths within a soil profile. They can be
used in a wide variety of soil types. The Contractor shall
install pneumatic piezometers at locations, and with depths
and details as shown in the Drawing or as directed by the
S.O..
10.11.2.2. Pneumatic piezometer tips shall be of high air entry ceramic

type with an average pore diameter of 1 micron using
stainless steel. The piezometer system shall be capable of
measuring water pressures to an accuracy of 0.2m head of
water in the range 0-35m head of water.
10.11.2.3. The piezometers shall be connected to twin tubing with

suitable brass couplings. Joints in the tubing other than at
the piezometer tip or at the terminal point shall not be
permitted. The tubing shall be connected either to suitable
quick release couplings or a terminal point which shall be
protected at all times. Where tubing is laid in trenches the
backfill shall either be sand or excavated material provided it
is suitable fill and stone-free. The tubing shall be laid with
sufficient slack to take up any lateral movements that are
expected to occur due to settlement of embankments or
structures.
10.11.2.4. Before installation and taking initial readings, the Contractor

shall conduct a pressure test on the pneumatic piezometer tip
in a container of water after connection to the tubing to check
for leaks or poor connections. The ceramic element shall be
workable under vacuum and precautions shall be taken to
ensure that it remains saturated during installation. During
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
installation, readings shall be taken when the piezometer tip

is lowered down the borehole, when it is pushed in or placed
in the sand pocket and at various times after installation to
check the response of the piezometer and help find the static
pressure value before the initial base readings are taken.
10.11.2.5. Readings shall be taken by and stored on the readout device.

Care shall be taken to ensure that the flow and return leads
are connected correctly.
10.11.3. Vibrating Wire Piezometer (VWP)
10.11.3.1. The Vibrating Wire Piezometer is used to measure water

pressure at specific depths in variety of soil types. The
Contractor shall install vibrating wire piezometer at location,
and with depths and details as specified by the S.O.. Prior to
the installation of the VWP, the Contractor shall submit all
required technical specifications, including a calibration
certificate for S.O.’s approval.
10.11.3.2. VWP is used to monitor pore water pressures in soils. The

VWP converts water pressure signal via components of VWP,
include a porous tip containing a pressure-sensitive
diaphragm; a pre-tensioned steel wire; and an electro-
magnetic coil, one end of which is connected to the
diaphragm, and the other to the body of the piezometer.
10.11.3.3. The VWP tip shall be of high air entry ceramic type with an
average pore diameter of 50 micron using a stainless steel
body. The piezometer system shall have a pressure range
with an accuracy of 0.1% of full scale.
10.11.3.4. The cable shall be laid with sufficient slack to take up any
lateral movements that are expected to occur due to
settlement of embankments or structures.
10.11.3.5. During installation, readings shall be taken when the

piezometer tip is lowered down the borehole, when it is
pushed in or placed in the sand pocket and at various times
after installation to check the response of the piezometer and
help find the static pressure value before the initial base
readings are taken.
10.11.3.6. Readings shall be taken by connecting the signal cable to the

readout unit and the data shall be stored in the readout unit.
10.11.4. Installation of Piezometer (All Types)
10.11.4.1. The piezometer shall be installed in a borehole of not less than

76mm diameter. The drilling medium shall be water and extra
care and attention shall be given during boring to ensure that
the borehole is as vertical as possible to the required depth.
Steel casing shall be used to prevent the collapse of the
borehole. The borehole shall be flushed clean with water prior
to installation.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
10.11.4.2. Before installation the piezometer element shall be immersed in

de-aired water for at least 24 hours to saturate the element. De-
aired water shall be prepared by boiling, and subsequently
allowing the water to cool before use.
10.11.4.3. The piezometer tip shall be installed in a borehole backfilled

with graded sand filter to the depth indicated. The sand filter
surround to the porous element shall be clean and fall wholly
between the limits of grading 600 and 1200 microns. The
contractor shall ensure that no sand adheres to the soil in the
sides of the borehole. The Contractor shall allow sufficient time
for all sand to settle. The final level of the top of the sand shall
be recorded. The porous element shall be placed in the hole
and the remaining sand filter shall then be added as described
above.
10.11.4.4. Seals consisting of bentonite pellets shall be placed above, and

if necessary, below the sand filter. The remainder of the hole
shall be filled with a bentonite: cement grout, and the top part
with a concrete plug. The bentonite: cement grout mix shall be
designed to mimic the surrounding soil or as shown in the
Drawing. A protective cover shall be set into the concrete with
caps and air vents as indicated in the Drawing.
10.12. Commissioning and Base Readings
10.12.1. After installation the functioning of each instrument shall be

demonstrated to the S.O. including the recording of measured values
using the appropriate readout device. As part of the commissioning
three sets of readings shall be taken and compared. This three sets of
readings shall be taken immediately after installation of the
instruments. If there are significant differences or anomalies, further
readings shall be taken. Once three sets of comparable readings have
been taken, these shall be averaged to form the base readings.
10.12.2. In cases where instruments are installed during earthworks, three sets
of readings shall be taken in quick succession and the results
compared. These results shall be used to provide base readings in a
manner to be agreed with the S.O..
10.13. Readings
10.13.1. The measured values shall be recorded on a record sheet. for readings
that are recorded on data loggers, a record sheet shall be required
giving references to the data stored. The format of plotted results shall
be submitted to the S.O. for approval. Details of information and values
to be stored on each record sheet in addition to the general information
required but not limited to the details in Table V10.
10.13.2. The Contractor shall submit to the S.O. the specified number of copies
of each record sheet with necessary raw data within one working day
of taking the readings.
10.13.3. If any anomalous readings are detected and verified to be correct, the
S.O. shall be informed immediately.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
10.13.4. Frequency of Readings
Each instrument shall be read immediately before and after each

change in loading (i.e. each layer of embankment or structural fill, etc.)
unless otherwise shown in the Drawing or as directed by the S.O. Any
instruments found to be faulty shall be promptly brought to the S.O.'s
attention so that remedial measures can be implemented.
10.13.5. Anomalous Readings
Whenever sets of data are measured, they shall be compared to

previous sets of data. If anomalous readings are present which differ
from the expected values or trends, then further readings shall be
taken immediately and the S.O. shall be informed. If the anomalous
values persist, then the S.O. shall be informed and an investigation
shall be carried out to find the reason(s) for the anomalous readings.
10.14. Report
10.14.1. General Information on All Records
All records of instrumentation including installation, readings or monthly

summaries, shall contain the following information:
(i) Project name
(ii) Contract name and number
(iii) Instrument reference number and type
(iv) Dates and times of installation and completion,
(v) Summary of reading
(vi) Chainage and offset / coordinates in WGS 84
(vii) Personnel names, roles and responsibilities
(viii) Relevant comments or remarks
10.14.2. Installation Records and Reports
The Contractor shall prepare an installation record sheet for each

instrument to be installed and submit to the S.O. for approval at least two
weeks before installation commences.
10.14.3. Monthly Monitoring Reports
10.14.3.1. A sample of the format of the report shall be submitted to the S.

O. including all graphical presentations for approval at least one
month before submission of the first monthly report unless
specified by S.O. Each monthly report shall include:
(i) A description/scope of monitoring works

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
(ii) Information on reading anomalies or corrections, if any,

and factors which may influence measured data
(iii) Observations or remarks
(iv) A Drawing showing installed locations of instrumentation
(v) Data tabulations or plots of instrument readings include

but not limited to the details in Table V11
10.14.3.2. The Contractor shall submit four sets of report (hardcopy and
softcopy) within 7 days after the end of each calendar month of
monitoring.

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
Table V1. Sampling Frequency and Testing Requirements for Geotextile
Area of Geotextile Number of Rolls to Testing by the Contractor

(m2) be Sampled Non-Woven Geotextile High Strength Woven
Representing the Geotextile
Area of Geotextile
Initial 10,000 or part 1 Tensile strength, Tensile strength,
thereof Elongation, Elongation
Each subsequent 1 CBR puncture,
100,000 or part Permeability,
thereof Effective Opening Size
(O90) or Apparent
Opening Size (O95)
Table V2. Sampling Frequency and Testing Requirements for Geogrid
Area of Geogrid (m2) Number of Rolls to be Sampled Testing by the Contractor

Representing the Area of
Geogrid Geogrid
Initial 10,000 or part thereof 1
Each subsequent 100,000 or 1 Tensile strength, Elongation
part thereof
Table V3. Guidelines for Geotextile Overlap Requirements as a Function of

(Foundation Soil) Strength
Soil CBR Minimum Overlaps
>3 0.3 – 0.45 meter

1–3 0.6 – 1 meter
0.5 – 1 1 meter or sewn
< 0.5 sewn
(Source: AASHTO M288-06,2007)

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
Table V4. Properties of Non-woven Geotextile
Types of Non-Woven (NW) Geotextile

Test
Item Properties Unit
Standard
NW 9 NW 13 NW 19 NW 24
1. Wide width tensile ISO kN/m
strength 10319 or
≥9 ≥ 13 ≥ 19 ≥ 24
ASTM
D4595
2. Wide width ISO %
elongation at break 10319 or ≥ 35
ASTM
D4595
3. CBR puncture ISO N
resistance 12236 or
≥ 1500 ≥ 2100 ≥ 2850 ≥ 3850
ASTM
D6241
4. Cone drop ISO mm
≤ 40 ≤ 25 ≤ 20 ≤ 15
13433
5. Permeability at ISO l/m2/s
50mm head 11058 or
≥ 90 ≥ 70 ≥ 55 ≥ 45
ASTM
D4491
6. Effective opening ISO µm
≤ 120 ≤ 100 ≤ 90 ≤ 90
size, O90, 12956
or
Apparent Opening ASTM µm
≤ 270 ≤ 240 ≤ 190 ≤ 180
Size, O95 D4751
7. UV resistance EN %
12224 retained
after
430
hours
or ≥ 70
ASTM %
D4355 retained
after
500
hours

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
Table V5. Properties of High Strength Woven Geotextile
Types of High Strength (HS) Woven Geotextile*

Test
Item Properties Unit HS HS HS HS HS HS
Standard
100/50 200/50 300/50 400/50 600/50 800/50
1. Characteristics ISO
Short Term 10319 or ≥ 100 ≥ 200 ≥ 300 ≥ 400 ≥ 600 ≥ 800
kN/m
Strength – MD** ASTM
D4595
2. Characteristics
ISO
Short Term
10319 or kN/m ≥ 45 ≥ 90 ≥ 135 ≥ 180 ≥ 270 ≥ 360
Strength at 5%
ASTM
elongation –
D4595
MD**
3. Characteristics ISO
Short Term 10319 or kN/m ≥ 50
Strength – CD*** ASTM
D4595
4. Elongation at ISO
Characteristics 10319 or % ≤ 10
Short Term ASTM
Strength – MD** D4595
5. Long Term
Design Strength ≥ 55 ≥ 110 ≥ 170 ≥ 220 ≥ 355 ≥ 475
BS 8006 kN/m
at 120 years
design life****
* For high strength woven geotextile with required strength more than 800 kN/m, special design and specification
shall be discussed with the designer
** MD: Machine Direction
*** CD: Cross Direction
****The long-term design strength assessment should take into consideration of reduction factors for creep, installation
damage, environmental effects and extrapolation of data

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
Table V6. Properties of Geogrid
Types of Geogrid (GD)*

Test
Item Properties Unit
Standard
GD GD GD GD GD GD GD
40 60 80 100 130 150 200
ISO
Characteristics ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
1. 10319 or ≥ 150 ≥ 200
Short Term kN/m 40 60 80 100 130
ASTM
Strength – MD**
D4595
Characteristics ISO
≥ ≥ ≥
2. Short Term 10319 or kN/m ≥ 50 ≥ 65 ≥ 75 ≥ 100
Strength at 5% ASTM 20 30 40
elongation – MD** D4595
ISO
Characteristics
3. 10319 or kN/m ≥ 30
Short Term
ASTM
Strength – CD***
D4595
Elongation at ISO
4. Characteristics 10319 or % ≤ 10
Short Term ASTM
Strength – MD** D4595
Long Term Design
≥ ≥ ≥
5. Strength at 120
BS 8006 kN/m ≥ 50 ≥ 75 ≥ 80 ≥ 105
years design life 20 30 40
****
* For geogrid with required strength more than 800 kN/m, special design and specification shall be discussed with
The designer
** MD: Machine Direction
*** CD: Cross Direction
****The long-term design strength assessment should take into consideration of reduction factors for creep, installation
damage, environmental effects and extrapolation of data

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
Table V7. Properties of Prefabricated Vertical Drain
Types of PVD
Item Properties Test Standard Unit
Type A* Type B**
Continuous plastic drain
Material Core Filter core wrapped in non-
woven geotextile material
Width mm 100 ± 3
1. Dimension of drain
Thickness mm 4 to 5
Coefficient of permeability of
2. ASTM D 4491 m/s ≥ 1 x 10-4
drain filter
Discharge Capacity at Pressure,
≥ 100 x 10-
3. P=240kN/m2 and Hydraulic ASTM D 4716 m3/s ≥ 25 x 10-6 6
Gradient, i=1
4. Apparent Opening Size, O95 ASTM D 4751 m ≤ 90 ≤ 90
5. Tensile strength of entire drain ASTM D 4595 N ≥ 2500 ≥ 2800
6. Tensile strength of filter ASTM D 4595 N/m ≥ 3000 ≥ 6000
Tensile elongation of entire
7. ASTM D 4595 % ≤10 ≤ 10
drain at 1000N
* PVD Type A: For common application where soft soil depth is generally <25m and less compressible soil [Vertical
strain (Settlement) < 15%].
** PVD Type B: For more critical application such as when soft soil depth is generally ≥25m, highly compressible soil
like peat or gyttja [Vertical strain (Settlement) ≥ 15%], PVD associated with vacum preloading method or other special
considerations based on engineering judgement of the designer.
Table V8. Typical Gradings Used with the Different Processes for Stone
Column
Process Grading in mm
Dry top-feed process 40 to 75
Wet process 25 to 75
Dry bottom-feed process 8 to 50
Table V9. Construction Parameters to be monitored during DSM Installation
Dry Method Wet Method

 Air tank pressure  Slurry pressure; air pressure (if any)
 Time vs depth (penetration and retrieval  Time vs depth (penetration and retrieval
rate) rate)
 Rotation speed (revs/min during penetration  Rotation speed (revs/min during penetration
and retrieval) and retrieval)
 The quantity of binder per meter of depth  The quantity of slurry per meter of depth
during penetration and retrieval during penetration and retrieval

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
Table V10. Data Required for Each Instrument
Instrument Data Required
Displacement marker - distance from fixed point (m) (details to be given) including base
reading
- change in distance from fixed point relative to base readings (mm)
Settlement marker - reduced level of top of rod (mRL) including base reading
- change in reduced level of top of rod relative to base readings and
previous reading (mm)
Building Settlement - reduced level of stud (mRL) including base reading

Marker - change in reduced level of stud relative to base readings and
previous reading (mm)
Survey reference - chainage, offset, coordinates (in WGS 84) and reduced level of top of
station rod (m)
Deep levelling datum - reduced level of datum (mRL)
Rod settlement gauge - reduced level of top of rod (mRL) including base reading
- original ground level at gauge location (mRL)
- reduced level of ground adjacent to gauge (mRL)
- record of fill placed (m)
- total thickness of fill (m)
- record of extensions (m)
- settlement of plate relative to base readings and previous reading
(mm)
Hydrostatic profile - reduced levels of survey pins (mRL)

gauge - original ground level every 10.0m along line of gauge (mRL)
- level of fill every 10.0m along line of gauge (mRL)
- thickness of fill along the line of the
- gauge (m)
- distance from end of access tube to point used as reference for
longitudinal measurement (m)
- listing of elevation of access tube relative to survey pin at 1.0m
intervals (mRL)
- graph of settlement of access tube relative to base readings and
thickness of fill against distance along the tube
- maximum settlement relative to base readings and previous reading
and its location (mm)
Horizontal - reduced levels of survey pins (mRL)

Inclinometer - original ground level every 10.0m along line of gauge (mRL)
- level of fill every 10.0m along line of gauge (mRL)
- thickness of fill a long line of gauge (m)
- distance from end of access tube to point used as reference for
longitudinal measurement (m)
- listing of elevation of access tube relative to survey pin at 0.5m
intervals (mRL)
- graph of settlement of access tube relative to base readings and
thickness of fill against distance along the tube
- maximum settlement relative to base readings and previous reading
and its location (mm)
No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
Instrument Data Required
Magnetic - reduced level of top of access tube (mRL)

extensometer - reduced level of ground adjacent to access tube (mRL) -distance of
each magnet from top of tube (m)
- reduced level of each magnet (mRL)
- settlement of each magnet relative to base readings (mm)
Inclinometers - reduced level of top of access tube (mRL)

- reduced level of ground adjacent to access tube (mRL)
- graph and listing of horizontal movement of access tube relative to
base readings against depth
Combined magnetic - reduced level of top of access tube (mRL) including base reading
extensometer and - reduced level of ground adjacent to access tube (mRL) -distance of
inclinometer each magnet from top of tube (m)
- reduced level of each magnet (mRL)
- settlement of each magnet relative to base readings (mm)
- graph and listing of horizontal movement of access tube relative to
base readings against depth depth to water from top of tube (m)
Standpipe - depth to water from top of tube (mRL) including base reading
piezometers - reduced level of top of tube (mRL)
- reduced level of ground adjacent to standpipe (mRL)
- water head (mRL)
- change in water head relative to base readings (m)
Pneumatic - water pressure reading (m water) including base reading

piezometers - reduced level of piezometer tip as installed (mRL)
- water head (mRL)
Vibrating wire - water pressure reading (m water) including base reading

piezometer - reduced level of piezometer tip as installed (mRL)
- water head (mRL)

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
Table V11. Data Required for Each Instrument
Instrument Data Required Plots and Summaries Required
Displacement marker - deflection vs. time indicating direction of movement (tabulation and
plot)
Settlement marker - settlement vs. time (tabulation and plot)
Building settlement - settlement vs. time (tabulation and plot)

marker
Survey reference - chainage, offset coordinates and reduced level (tabulation)

station
Deep levelling datum - reduced level (tabulation)
Rod settlement gauge - thickness of fill and settlement of plate vs. time (tabulation and plot)
Hydrostatic profile - latest graph of settlement of access tube relative to base readings and
gauge fill thickness against distance along the tube
- maximum gauge settlement and corresponding fill thickness vs. time
(tabulation and plot)
Horizontal inclinometer - latest graph of settlement of access tube relative to base readings and
fill thickness against distance along the tube maximum gauge
settlement and corresponding fill thickness vs. time (tabulation and
plot)
Magnetic extensometer - settlement of each magnet vs. time (tabulation and plot)
- settlement of each magnet vs. depth for latest set of readings (plot)
Inclinometer - latest graph of horizontal movement of access tube relative to base

readings against depth
- Maximum horizontal movement relative to base readings vs. time
(tabulation and plot)
Combined Magnetic - as per magnetic extensometer and inclinometer described above

Extensometer
Inclinometer
Standpipe piezometer - water head vs. time (tabulation and plot)

/Pneumatic piezometer/ - excess water head vs. time (tabulation and plot)
Vibrating wire - all instruments in a profile plotted on the same graph
piezometer

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
No. Keluaran : 01
SECTION V: GROUND
No. Pindaan : 00
IMPROVEMENT
(i) Prayer Seam (ii) J Seam
(iii) Butterfly Seam
Figure V1. Types of Seam with Double Thread Lock Stitch

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
SECTION X: INTERNAL COLD No. Keluaran : 01
WATER AND SANITARY No. Pindaan : 00
PLUMBING SYSTEM Tarikh : 02 Januari 2020
JKR MALAYSIA Muka Surat : X/32
APPENDIX X1
Limit of Mechanical Scope of Design (Civil and Mechanical)
Figure X1. Indirect Feed System

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
Figure X2. Pumping to Multiple Building Blocks

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
Figure X3. Direct Feed from Main Water Pipe

No. Dokumen : JKR 20800-0226-20
Figure X4. Pumping to Elevated Water Tank

Standard Specifications For Building Works 2020 JKR

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Standard Specifications For Building Works 2020 JKR

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Standard Specifications For Building Works 2020 JKR

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

JABATAN KERJA RAYA MALAYSIA

KEMENTERIAN KERJA RAYA

All enquiries regarding this book should be forwarded to:

Tel : 03 - 2616 5055 / 03 - 2616 5408

Perpustakaan Negara Malaysia Cataloguing-in-Publication Data

SECTION A : PRELIMINARIES AND GENERAL CONDITIONS A/1 - A/36

Cawangan Kontrak Dan Ukur Bahan (CKUB)

Advisor of Standard Specifications For Building

Chairman of Standard Specifications For Building

Master Committee Members

lr. Dr. Lim Char Ching Pengarah

Sr Anita Binti Ibrahim Juruukur Bahan Penguasa Kanan

Table A 1 - Submission of Documents A/20

Table U1 - Physical Property Requirements for Filter Cloth U/2

Figure C1 - Plan View of Typical Pile Load Test Set Up C/64

B.Q. Bills of Quantities

APPENDIX A/1 - LEGISLATION AND REGULATIONS A/29

SECTION A: PRELIMINARIES AND GENERAL CONDITIONS PAGE

1. Scope of Works A/1

© COPYRIGHT JKR MALAYSIA

© COPYRIGHT JKR MALAYSIA

The following references shall mean:

(i) AASHTO - The American Association of State Highway and Transportation

@COPYRIGHT JKR MALAYSIA

The Contract Documents shall consist of:

PWD Form of Contract (for contract based on Specification and

Special Provisions to the Conditions of Contract as listed in the PWD

Specifications and addendums;

Summary of Tender and Schedule of Rates (for contract based on

B.Q. (for contract based on Quantities); and

Any other relevant documents included therein.

Special Provisions to Conditions of Contract shall take preference over

Addendum to Conditions of Contract shall take preference over

The Addendum Specification shall take preference over the Standard

Drawings shall take preference over Standard Specifications.

5. Goods, Materials and Workmanship

Wherever in this Specification any proprietary goods or materials are specified,

6. Use of Local Materials

Under no circumstances will the Contractor be permitted to incorporate or supply

@COPYRIGHT JKR MALAYSIA

7. Sustainable Materials and Products

Notwithstanding the materials and products shown on the Drawings or specified

Environmentally friendly materials or “Green” products that are certified

Product registered under MyHijau Mark Scheme.

Products self-declared “Green” by the manufacturer with certification

Unless otherwise specified hereinafter or shown on the Drawings, only materials of

10. Supply of Materials by Government

@COPYRIGHT JKR MALAYSIA

11. Shop Drawings, Samples and Mock-ups

The Contractor shall submit samples of materials or execute samples of

The Contractor shall prepare sample installations as required to match specified

12. Contractor’s Plant

13. Construction Plan

A detailed work programme using the Critical Path Method (CPM)

@COPYRIGHT JKR MALAYSIA

presented in the form of Gantt chart and network diagrams indicating,

The work programme shall be prepared, updated and revised as

The work programme shall be prepared and maintained by trained and

The Contractor shall also furnish in writing to the S.O. or S.O.’s

Contractor’s Organisation Chart